X-Ray Planned Maintenance - SM - 46-019510 - 19

GE Medical Systems
Technical
Publications
Direction 46–019510
Revision 19
X–Ray Planned Maintenance
© 1991 - 2019 General Electric Company,

All Rights Reserved.
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY X–RAY PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
DIRECTION 46–019510
REV 19 46–019510
D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING D IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
D DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
D FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT D SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
D NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
D LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES
DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
WARNUNG
D FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
D VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES
KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN
WURDE.
D WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO D SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN
SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN.
D NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
D LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA
NATURALEZA.
i
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL

EM INGLÊS.
ATENÇÃO
D SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A
GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA
RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
D NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
D O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA
DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS,
MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
AVVERTENZA
D SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
D SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
D NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER
FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
COMPANY X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
REV 15 DIRECTION 46–019510
46–019510
REV 15
19 DIRECTION 46–019510
Direction 46–019510
Revision 9
X–Ray Planned Maintenance
IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

X-ray equipment if not properly complete protection. Nor can any on Radiation Protection, and take
used may cause injury. practical design compel the adequate steps to protect against
Accordingly, the instructions operator to take adequate injury.
herein contained should be precautions to prevent the
thoroughly read and understood possibility of any persons carelessly The equipment is sold with the
by everyone who will use the exposing themselves or others to understanding that the General
equipment before you attempt to radiation. Electric Company, Medical Systems
place this equipment in Group, its agents, and
operation. The General Electric It is important that everyone having representatives have no
Company, Medical Systems anything to do with x-radiation be responsibility for injury or damage
Group, will be glad to assist and properly trained and fully acquainted which may result from improper use
cooperate in placing this with the recommendations of the of the equipment.
equipment in use. National Council on Radiation Various protective material and
Protection and Measurements as devices are available. It is urged that
Although this apparatus published in NCRP Reports such materials or devices be used.
incorporates a high degree of available from NCRP Publications,
protection against x-radiation other 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room CAUTION: United States Federal
than the useful beam, no practical 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, law restricts this device to use by or
design of equipment can provide and of the International Commission on the order of a physician.
iii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
If you have any comments, suggestions or corrections to the information in this document,
please write them down, include the document title and document number, and send them to:
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY MEDICAL SYSTEMS

MANAGER – INFORMATION INTEGRATION,
AMERICAS W–622
P.O. BOX 414
MILWAUKEE, WI 53201–0414
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT
All electrical installations that are shall be performed by qualified GE requirements of the applicable
preliminary to positioning of the Medical personnel. The products electrical codes.
equipment at the site prepared for the involved (and the accompanying
equipment shall be performed by electrical installations) are highly
licensed electrical contractors. In sophisticated, and special The purchaser of GE equipment shall
addition, electrical feeds into the engineering competence is required. only utilize qualified personnel (i.e.,
Power Distribution Unit shall be In performing all electrical work on GE’s field engineers, personnel of
performed by licensed electrical these products, GE will use its own third-party service companies with
contractors. Other connections specially trained field engineers. All of equivalent training, or licensed
between pieces of electrical GE’s electrical work on these electricians) to perform electrical
equipment, calibrations, and testing products will comply with the servicing on the equipment.
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely upon discovery, or in any event, 8*285–3468 immediately after
examined at time of delivery. If within 14 days after receipt, and the damage is found. At this time be
damage is apparent, have notation contents and containers held for ready to supply name of carrier,
“damage in shipment” written on inspection by the carrier. A delivery date, consignee name,
all copies of the freight or express transportation company will not pay freight or express bill number, item
bill before delivery is accepted or a claim for damage if an inspection damaged and extent of damage.
“signed for” by a General Electric is not requested within this 14 day
representative or a hospital period. Complete instructions regarding
receiving agent. Whether noted or claim procedure are found in
concealed, damage MUST be Call Traffic and Transportation, Section “S” of the Policy &
reported to the carrier immediately Milwaukee, WI (262) 827–3468 / Procedure Bulletins.
6/17/94
iv
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY X–RAY PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY COMPANY X–RAY PLANNED
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TAB TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
LETTER OF INTENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
RAD RAD FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAD–1
R&F R&F FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R&F–1
SPECIALS SPECIALS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC–1
RAD PORT RAD PORTABLES FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAD PORT–1
MOBILE FL MOBILE FLUORO FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOB FL–1
MAMMO MAMMO FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAMMO–1
1 XPM 0–99 GENERAL &

XPM–100 SAFETY AND FUNCTIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–i
2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
3 XPM–300 GENERATOR PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–i
4 XPM–400 GENERATOR PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–i
5 XPM–500 IMAGING PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–i
7 XPM–700 MAMMO and RAD MOBILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–i
8 XPM–800 RADIOGRAPHIC PORTABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–i
9 XPM–900 MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–i
10 SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–i
12 CHECKLISTS AND DATA SHEETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 12–i
13 ADDENDUM - PLANNED MAINT. OF EXPOSURE CONTROLS.. 13–1
14 ADDENDUM - ELECTRICAL SAFETY TESTS FLUKE ESA612.........14-1
v
PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY TO X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
vi
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
REV 15
46–019510
19
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

0 May 10, 1991 Initial release.
1 Nov. 22, 1991 General update.
2 Apr. 2, 1993 General update.
3 Jan. 21, 1997 Updated format to current standards; changes to Job Card XPM–490.
4 July 23, 1997 Revised Electrical Leakage specifications in section 12. Added Note to RAD
PORT pages. Added XPM–440.
5 Nov. 19, 1997 Revised XPM–704, Mammography focal spot resolution limit, form F4773 and
the mammo flow diagram. Revised XPM–490.
6 Dec. 21, 1998 General updates.
7 Apr. 9, 1999 Updates to XPM 440, 524, 554, 556.
8 July 9, 1999 Updated Chapter 12 Forms.
9 Nov. 19, 1999 Updated XPM–800, XPM–110, XPM–112, XPM–114, XPM–150, XPM–152,
XPM–300, XPM–360, XPM–362,
10 June 6, 2000 Updated XPM–100, RFX replacement cycle.
11 June 27, 2000 Updated page ix, RAD PORT Flow Diagrams, and XPM–800 to include
AMX–4 and AMX–4+.
12 Jan. 16, 2001 Updated XPM–100 (Chart 1, RFX) and XPM–118. Updated XPM–320,
XPM–330, and XPM–340 (added Note regarding PM frequency).
13 May 18, 2001 Updated Mobile Fluoro Flow diagram sheets 1 through 4.
14 March 19, 2002 Updated by MVS division for use also on non GEMS systems. Added XPM –
750.
15 May 16, 2003 General updates.
16 15MAR2013 Addition of Addendum for Planned Maintenance of Exposure Controls, Tab 1
17 26FEB2014 A Added Prestige and Prestilix Planned Maintenance Section, Tab 13, Sec 13-3
18 21MAR2018 A Added details on Membrane Exposure Switches in Section 13.2.
19 10AUG2019 Manual updated due to ECR#2278997:
Addition of Addendum ELECTRICAL SAFETY TESTS-FLUKE ESA612, 14-1.
vii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
REV 15
46–019510
19
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Title Page 17 TAB 2 TAB 9

9–i and 9–ii 17
i thru x 17 TAB 3 9–1 thru 9–12 17
3–i and 3–ii 17
TAB – RAD 3–1 thru 3–30 17 TAB 10
RAD–1 thru RAD–4 17 10–i and 10–ii 17
TAB 4 10–1 thru 10–54 17
TAB – R&F 4–i and 4–ii 17
R&F–1 thru R&F–8 17 4–1 thru 4–24 17 TAB 11
TAB – SPECIALS TAB 5 TAB 12
SPEC–1 thru SPEC–8 17 5–i and 5–ii 17 12–i and 12–ii 17
5–1 thru 5–42 17 12–1 thru 12–42 17
TAB – RAD PORT
RAD PORT–1 thru TAB 6 TAB 13 17
RAD PORT–6 17
TAB 7 Back Page -
TAB – MOBILE FL 7–i and 7–ii 17
MOB FL–1 thru 7–1 thru 7–26 17
MOB FL–4 17
TAB 8
TAB – MAMMO
MAMMO–1 thru 8–i and 8–ii 17
MAMMO–4 17 8–1 thru 8–12 17
TAB 1
1–i and 1–ii 17
1–1 thru 1–50 17
viii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
STATEMENT OF INTENT AND USE
The goal is to provide a living, updatable, planned maintenance inspection

program that meets our commitments to our customers, within the con-
straint on today’s work environment. The most crucial of these constraints
being time and room availability.
The inspections are intended to be done semi-annually, or divided into

smaller blocks, dependent on your agreement with your customer. AMX–4
and Stenoscop inspections should be done annually. For AMX–4+ the first
inspection should be done after 13 months, annually thereafter.
The total inspection times will be the base time plus any options on your sys-
tem. The basic times are as follows:
RAD 6 hours
R&F 8 hours
Specials 8 hours
Mobiles 4 hours (2 hours for AMX–4 & AMX–4+)
(3 hours for Stenoscop)
Mammo 4 hours
Prior to implementing this program, a contract review should be done with

the area service manager and the customer. A contract review is needed so
the customer and GE both have a clear understanding of what the custom-
er’s expectations are and what advantages the customer will receive from
this program.
Scheduling of the inspections should include a review of the room log to in-
sure no major problems exist that would compromise your ability to do the
inspection. Considerations of the customer’s patient care such as cleaner
or paint fumes, noise, and housekeeping assistance should be arranged at
this time.
The checklist was written to summarize the work for the customer depart-
ment head, and therefore, does not contain technical details or items that
are meaningless to them. The checks give the customer feedback on items
that were found OK, items that you had action on, or items that need to be
scheduled for additional service.
The intent of the inspection is to be only an inspection. Items that can be
corrected with very little time required, can be done. Any items found that
will affect your ability to complete the inspection within the available time
must be noted in the comments and time scheduled for additional service.
The original copy of the checklist is for the customer. The additional carbon-
less copies are for the GE office file and a copy for your use.
The technical data sheets should be kept in the room for further reference
during service and future inspections. The benchmark nature of the data will
be a good base line for service troubleshooting. A copy of the data can be
given to the customer upon request or at your discretion.
ix
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
The flow diagrams function as a steering guide to get you from the checklist
item to the appropriate procedures. See Illustration. The checks are in a log-
ical top–down progression at the left of the flow diagram, as in checking the
processor before running test films. The procedures on the right of the flow
diagram are in a building block process. For example, on an R&F room the
RAD tests are first and the R&F tests are in the additions to the RAD tests.
The intent of this structure is to allow flexibility for you to divide up the tests to
fit your time availability. The flow diagrams can be folded out to enable refer-
ring to them while the manual is open to a procedure.
The estimated time for each job card is for that test only. Some test times are
short because they are intended to be done during other tests, so use your
time efficiently.
The X–ray Products Guide for Planned Maintenance inspections is in-

tended to guide you in standardizing the time and work performed while al-
lowing flexibility to meet your customer needs. Additional information can
be found in the 900 section or in the X–ray Standards Handbook, Direction
46–017239. Procedures for correcting problems found during the inspec-
tion will be in the specific equipment manual for the item you are inspecting.
Reference the System Field Test for HHS, Direction 46–013894 for legal tol-
erances.
The loose leaf format of the manual allows easy updating and additions that
may be needed to suit your local area or specific customer’s requirements. If
an error or more efficient procedure is found, please forward it to FSDE, at-
tention Planned Maintenance Documentation, so everyone can benefit.
Following the inspection, the customer should be contacted every time.

The follow-up will give you feedback on the inspection and the customers
perceptions. Scheduling or repairs and follow-up work can be agreed on at
this time.
This handbook does not replace the certified setup procedures in the
service manuals, but is a more efficient method of measuring the system
performance. This bench mark testing approach results in its being class
“C” proprietary. This classification allows flexibility for use in cooperative
contracts.
Note addition of Planned Maintenance of Exposure Controls. Reference Tab 13.
FLOW DIAGRAMS
Safety
Check List Job Card Name

Item Number
Next or Optional Job Card

Number
x
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY X–RAY
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY COMPANY MAINTENANCE
REV 19
RAD FLOW DIAGRAM
Discuss PM with Customer Discuss PM

and review log book XPM–010
Safety
Counterweight Safety–RAD–Cwt
Cable Check XPM–100
Mechanical – RAD
XPM–106
Safety–RAD–Cwt.–Chain Drives
XPM–108
Mounting Bolt Safety–RAD–Mounting

Inspection XPM–110
Accessories Safety–Accessories
Checked XPM–118
Functional
Component Visual Inspection–RAD

Clean and Clean and Lube–RAD

Lubricate XPM–130
System Operation Functional–RAD

Check XPM–140
Drives and Locks Functional–RAD

Checked XPM–140
Indicator and Interlock Indicator Lamps–RAD

Check XPM–170
RAD–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS P
DIRECTION 46–019510 R
RAD FLOW DIAGRAM (CONT.)

Performance
Verify Generator RAD Timer

Calibration XPM–320
RAD kVp
XPM–330
RAD mA
XPM–340
Protection Circuits Tube Protector

Confirmed XPM–300
Rotor Controller
XPM–310
Memory Data and Battery

XPM–350
Collimation Collimation and Phototiming

Verified XPM–360
Manual Collimator
XPM–364
Phototimer Collimation and Phototiming

Checked XPM–360
Tomo Functional–Dedicated Tomo

Checked XPM–150
Functional–Tomo Option
XPM–150
Review Previous
Performance
Restore Normal Final Checkout

Operation XPM–020
Review Results
with Customer
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
R&F FLOW DIAGRAM

Safety
Counterweight Safety – RAD – Cwt

Cable Check XPM –100
Safety – R&F – Cwt

XPM–102
Mechanical – RAD
XPM–106
XPM–108
Mounting Bolt Safety – RAD – Mounting

Safety – R&F – Mounting

XPM–112
Ground Leakage Ground Leakage Survey

Survey XPM–490
Accessories Safety – Accessories

Checked XPM–118
Functional
Component Visual Inspection – RAD

Visual Inspection – R&F

XPM–122
Clean and Clean and Lubricate – RAD

Lubricate XPM–130
Clean and Lubricate – R&F

XPM–132
R&F–1
R&F FLOW DIAGRAM (CONT.)
System Operation Functional Check – RAD

Check XPM–140
Functional Check – R&F

XPM–142
Photospot Camera
XPM–522
Functional Check – Remote

XPM–143
Drives and Locks Functional Check – RAD

Checked XPM–140

XPM–142
Functional Check – Remote

XPM–143
Indicator and Interlock Indicator Lamps – RAD

Check XPM–170
Indicator Lamps – R&F

XPM–172
Film Changer/Stepper Functional Check – FC/S

Check XPM–160
Performance
RAD kVp
XPM–330
RAD mA
XPM–340
Fluoro Timer
XPM–400
Fluoro kVp
XPM–410
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19

Confirmed XPM–300
Rotor Controller
XPM–310
Memory Data & Battery

XPM–350
Collimation
Verified
Collimator and Photo – RAD
XPM–360
Phototimer
Checked
Tomo Functional Dedicated Tomo

Checked XPM –150
Functional Tomo Option

XPM–152
Max ‘R’ Output Fluoro mA

Checked XPM–420
Dose Input Dose

Verification XPM–440
Image Quality Image Quality

Evaluation XPM–500
Resolution
XPM–510
Processor Processor – Sheet Film

Check XPM–540
Spot–Film Alignment Collimator and Photo – R&F

Check XPM–362
Photospot Camera Photospot Review

Checked XPM–520
DR Image Review
XPM–524
R&F–3
Digital Image DF Vascular Image Quality

DG/DX Vascular Image Quality

XPM–554
Mag Tape Drive

XPM–570
Film Formatter GE Formatter

Checked XPM–560
MI–10 Formatter
XPM–562
3M Laser Camera
XPM–564
Review Previous
Performance
Return System to Final Checkout

Normal Operation XPM–020
Review Results
with Customer
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
SPECIALS FLOW DIAGRAM

Safety
Counterweight Safety – RAD – Cwt

Cable Check XPM –100
Safety – R&F – Cwt

XPM–102
Safety –Vascular – Cwt

XPM–104
Mechanical – RAD
XPM–106
XPM–108
Mounting Bolt Safety – RAD – Mounting

Safety – R&F – Mounting

XPM–112
Safety – Vascular – Mounting

XPM–114
Ground Leakage Ground Leakage Survey

Survey XPM–490
Accessories Safety – Accessories

Checked XPM–118
Functional
Component Visual Inspection – RAD

Visual Inspection – R&F

XPM–122
Visual Inspection – Vascular

XPM–124
SPEC–1
SPECIALS FLOW DIAGRAM (CONT.)

Lubricate XPM–130
Clean and Lubricate – R&F

XPM–132
Clean and Lubricate – Vascular

XPM–134
Photospot Camera
XPM–522
Cine Camera
XPM–532
System Operation Functional Check – RAD

Checks XPM–140

XPM–142
Functional Check – Vascular

XPM–144
Drives and Locks Functional Check – RAD

Checked XPM–140

XPM–142
Functional Check – Vascular

XPM–144
Indicator and Interlock Indicator Lamps – RAD

Check XPM–170
Indicator Lamps – R&F

XPM–172
Indicator Lamps – Vascular

XPM–174
Film Changer/Stepper Functional Check – FC/S

Check XPM–160
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19

Performance

RAD kVp
XPM–330
RAD mA
XPM–340
Fluoro Timer
XPM–400
Fluoro kVp
XPM–410
Cine Max PW
XPM–460
Cine Max kV & mA

XPM–470

Confirmed XPM–300
Rotor Controller
XPM–310
Memory Data & Battery

XPM–350
Collimation Collimation Manual

Verified XPM–364
Max ‘R’ Output Fluoro mA

Checked XPM–420
Dose Input Dose

Verification XPM–440
Image Quality Image Quality

Resolution
XPM–510
Processor Processor – Sheet Film

Check XPM–540
Processor – Cine
XPM–542
SPEC–3

Photospot Camera Photospot Review
Checked XPM–520
DR Image Review
XPM–524
Cine Camera Cine Film Review

Checked XPM–530
Cine Projector Cine Projector

Checked XPM–580
Digital Image DF Vascular Image

DF Cardiac Image
XPM–552
DG/DX Vascular Image

XPM–554
DG/DX Cardiac Image

XPM–556
Mag Tape Drive

XPM–570
Film Formatter GE Formatter

Checked XPM–560
MI–10 Formatter
XPM–562
3M Laser Camera
XPM–564
Review Previous
Performance
Return System to Final Checkout

Normal Operation XPM–020
Discuss Results
with Customer
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
RAD PORTABLES FLOW DIAGRAM
NOTE: For AMX–4 and AMX–4+ refer to the Flow Diagram at the end of this section.
Safety and Functional
Check RAD Portable

Brake XPM–800 and XPM 750 (1.0)
Check RAD Portable

Bumpers XPM–800 and XPM–750 (2.0)
Safety RAD Portables

Inspection XPM–800 and XPM–750 (3.0)
XPM–108
Inspect Electrical Visual Inspection – RAD

Cables XPM–120

Lubricate XPM–130
Check Drawer RAD Portable

Mount XPM–800 and XPM–750 (4.0)
Verify Motor RAD Portable

Drive XPM–800 and XPM–750 (5.0)
Inspect Wheels and RAD Portable

Casters XPM–800 and XPM–750 (6.0)
Inspect RAD Portable

Handswitch XPM–800 and XPM–750 (7.0)
RAD PORT–1
RAD PORTABLES FLOW DIAGRAM (CONT.)
NOTE: For AMX–4 and AMX–4+ refer to the Flow Diagram at the end of this section.
Performance
Verify Indicators Indicator Lamps – RAD

and Interlocks XPM–170
Check Collimation Manual Collimators

and Light XPM–364
Check RAD Portable

Batteries XPM–800 and XPM–750 (8.0)
Check RAD Portable

Generator XPM–800 and XPM–750 (9.0)
Keithley
XPM–900
Check RAD Portable

Phototimer XPM–800 and XPM–750 (10.0)
Compare Data
to Previous Data
Return System Final Checkout

to Normal Operation XPM–020
Discuss PM
with Customer
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
RAD PORTABLES AMX–4/AMX–4+ FLOW DIAGRAM
Customer Interview – 5 min Discuss PM

Recent physicist report and any XPM–010
problems
Drive Checkout – 5 min RAD Portable

Check brakes, bumpers, and verify XPM–800 (1.0, 2.0, 5.0)
motor drive
Mechanical/Safety – 20 min Visual Inspection – RAD

Check electrical cables, XPM–120
mechanical cables, wheels/casters,
and draw mount
RAD Portable
XPM–800 (3.0, 6.0, 4.0)
Battery Checkout – 25 min RAD Portable

Check conditions of batteries, XPM–800 (8.0)
connections for tightness,
corrosion and wiring
System Checkout – 40 min RAD Portable

Check generator, handswitch, XPM–800 (9.1, 7.0)
collimator light, light field to x–ray,
and verify indicators/interlocks
Manual Collimators
XPM–364
Indicator Lamps – RAD

XPM–170
Keithley
XPM–900
Mobile–Aid AEC Test – 5 min Phototimer

XPM–800 (10.0)
Restore System –15 min Clean and lubricate – RAD

Re-install covers, adjust cable XPM–130
drape, and clean/lubricate as
needed
Wrap–up – 10 min Final Checkout

Schedule repair time, order parts, XPM–020
and customer status report
RAD PORT–3

PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
MOBILE FLUORO FLOW DIAGRAM
Safety and Functional
Function Fluoro Portable

Check – 10 min. XPM–850 (1.0)
XPM–108
Verify Skin Fluoro Portable

Guard – 1 min. XPM–850 (2.0)
Check Electric Visual Inspection – RAD

Cabling – 15 min. XPM–120
Verify Ground Fluoro Portable

Fault – Polarix Only XPM–850 (3.0)

Lubricate – 15 min. XPM–130
Performance
Check Indicators Indicator Lamps – RAD

and Interlocks – 10 min. XPM–170
Indicator Lamp – R&F

XPM–172
Check Fluoro Portables

Collimator – 20 min. XPM–850 (4.0)
MOB FL–1
MOBILE FLUORO FLOW DIAGRAM (CONT.)
Check Generator Keithley

Calibration – 30 min. XPM–900
Fluoro Portable
XPM–850 (5.0)
Check Fluoro Portable

Spot–Film – 20 min. XPM–850 (6.0)
Check ‘R’ Fluoro mA

Limit – 15 min. XPM–420
Check Fluoro Image Quality

Imaging – 20 min. XPM–500
Verify Video Fluoro Portable

Storage – 10 min. XPM–850 (7.0)
Compare Data
to Previous Data – 5 min.
Return System Final Checkout

to Normal Operation – 15 min. XPM–020
Discuss PM
with Customer – 5 min.
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
MAMMOGRAPHY FLOW DIAGRAM
Safety/Functional
Verify Counterbalance Safety – RAD – Cwt

Condition XPM–100
Mammo
XPM–700 (1.0)
XPM–108
Clean & Clean & Lubricate

Lubricate XPM–130
Verify Safety and Mammo

Interlock Switches XPM–700 (3.0)
Inspect Electrical Mammo

Cables XPM–700 (4.0)
Verify Current Ground Leakage Survey

Leakage XPM–490
Verify Lead Glass Shield Mammo

Condition XPM–700 (5.0)
Check Transport Modification Mammo

(Vans Only) XPM–700 (6.0)
Verify Lock Mammo

Operation XPM–700 (7.0)
Check Column Mammo

Drive XPM–700 (8.0)
Verify Compression Mammo

Operation & Condition XPM–700 (9.0 & 10.0)
MAMMO–1
MAMMOGRAPHY FLOW DIAGRAM (CONT.)
Check Operator Lamps, Mammo

Controls and Indicators XPM–700 (11.0)
Check Mammo
Bucky XPM–700 (12.0)
Performance
Verify Collimator Mammo

Alignment XPM–700 (13.0)
Verify Generator Generator Calibration

‘R’ Output
XPM–702
Check CPU NVRAM Battery

XPM–350
Verify AEC Performance & Mammo

RMI Phantom Visualization XPM–700 (14.0)
Calculate Average Glandular Dose

Glandular Dose XPM–705
Check Focal Spot Size Focal Spot Dimension

or Limiting Spatial Resolution XPM–704
Verify Processor – Sheet Film

Processor XPM–540
Final Check & Final Checkout

Database Backup XPM–020
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY X–RAYPLANNED
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY COMPANY X–RAY
REV 16
REV 15
15 DIRECTION46–019510
DIRECTION
46–019510
SAFETY Job Card XPM–104 1 of 1
job card: VASC SAFETY – COUNTERWEIGHT CABLES – CHAIN DRIVES – ETC.

subassembly: VASCULAR POSITIONERS, VASCULAR
date: 11/98
TABLES, IMAGING SUSPENSIONS
purpose: To check condition and age of all counterweight
time: 15 min.
cables. To check tension of chain drives and
operation of all safety dogs and other cables.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Soft cloth
STP or similar weight oil
Tool kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Use appropriate back, energy lockout, and blood borne pathogens protection when
inspecting or repairing the system.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Before starting this job card, make sure that all PM has been done
on the previous job cards. This job card adds to XPM–100 and XPM–102 and does
not replace them.
Procedure:
(refer to XPM–100 for details, if needed).
Check the counterweight cables in the positioners LU/A, LU/C:
X–ray Tube
Image Intensifier
Film Changer
Check all chains and drive belts
1–3
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
GENERAL, SAFETY AND FUNCTIONAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–010 REVIEW SITE LOG/DISCUSS PM WITH CUSTOMER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

SITE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
SERVICE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
XPM–020 RETURN AND REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
XPM–100 RAD SAFETY – COUNTERWEIGHT CABLES –
CHAIN DRIVES – ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
XPM–102 R&F SAFETY – COUNTERWEIGHT CABLES –
CHAIN DRIVES – ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
XPM–104 VASC SAFETY – COUNTERWEIGHT CABLES –
CHAIN DRIVES – ETC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–18
XPM–106 MECHANICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–19
XPM–108 SAFETY – GAS SHOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20
XPM–110 RAD MOUNTING BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–21
XPM–112 R&F MOUNTING BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–22
XPM–114 VASC MOUNTING BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
XPM–118 SAFETY – ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
XPM–120 RAD VISUAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
XPM–122 R&F VISUAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
XPM–124 VASC VISUAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
XPM–130 RAD CLEAN AND LUBRICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
XPM–132 R&F CLEAN AND LUBRICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
XPM–134 VASC CLEAN AND LUBRICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–33
XPM–140 RAD FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–34
XPM–142 R&F FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–36
XPM–143 R&F FUNCTIONAL CHECKS – REMOTE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–37
XPM–144 VASCULAR FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–39
1–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
GENERAL, SAFETY AND FUNCTIONAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–150 DEDICATED TOMO TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–40

XPM–152 TOMO OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–43
XPM–160 FUNCTIONAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–44
XPM–170 RAD INDICATOR LAMPS AND INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–45
XPM–172 R&F INDICATOR LAMPS AND INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–49
XPM–174 VASC INDICATOR LAMPS AND INTERLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–50
1–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510
SITE LOG/DISCUSS PM Job Card XPM–010 1 of 1
job card: REVIEW SITE LOG/DISCUSS PM WITH CUSTOMER
subassembly: date: 05/0195
purpose: Review Site Log. Discuss PM with customer. time:

Record initial settings.
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the site log is to provide an active history of the room’s performance. This will
be especially effective when an engineer other than the site engineer works on the
equipment. It is also an aid for the site engineer to detect intermittent problems. This
will aid in communication between the engineer and the customer.
Review the performance of the room. If there are major problems with the room, the PM may
have to be postponed until the room is in good functional condition. Discuss with the
customer scheduling of the room for the PM and if any special considerations for
patient needs and/or housekeeping need to be taken.
Discuss the objectives of the PM with the customer. Restate, if necessary, that we are in-
specting not fixing the equipment at this time.
Record initial settings of the equipment on the data sheet. This will be useful for the engineer
to return the equipment to the customer’s normal operating mode.
Check last PM notes for date of the last PM. This will be helpful in determining which
schedules will be used for the current PM.
Established safety procedures, such as precautions for Bloodborne Pathogens, Electrical

and Mechanical Energy Lockout, and lifting safety, MUST be followed when
performing PMs.
1–1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
SITE LOG
HOSPITAL NAME:
ROOM NUMBER:
SYSTEM I.D. NUMBER:
CONTRACT: - YES - NO
COVERAGE TYPE: _____LABOR _____PARTS _____GLASS
HOURS:
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
1–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
SERVICE LOG
SYSTEM ID:
CUSTOMER NOTES SERVICE NOTES

DATE: TIME: DATE: TIME:
TECH: SERVICE ENG:
ERROR CODE:

TECH: SERVICE ENG:
ERROR CODE:

TECH: SERVICE ENG:
ERROR CODE:
1–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510
FINAL CHECK Job Card XPM–020 1 of 1
job card: RETURN AND REVIEW
subassembly: FINAL CHECKOUT date: 11/98
purpose: Compare data to PM data. Return system to time:

operational mode. Discuss PM with the customer.
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
Compare the data compiled with the previous PM data. If any discrepancies are noted,
check the appropriate box for work to be scheduled at a later date. Make a note of
parts to be ordered.
Check the error logs in the system for indication of problems and check for tube warmup
bypasses. Discuss any issues with the customer that may impact system
performance.
Perform a database backup (if applicable).
Return the system to its original operating mode.
Discuss scheduling of work required with the customer. Discuss pertinent problems which
may require immediate service and those which can be scheduled later. Leave the
customer copy of the checklist with him and a copy of the checklist with the site log.
Update the site log information relating to the PM.
A completed new certificate of inspection may be delivered to the customer. This new
certificate can be ordered by Form Number F4787X (if required).
1–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510
job card: RAD SAFETY – COUNTERWEIGHT – DRIVES – ETC.

subassembly: TABLES, CHEST STANDS, TUBE STANDS &
date: 11/98
HANGERS, TOMO SYS., MAMMO SYS.
purpose: To check condition and age of all counterweight time: 1 hour
cables, belts and gas pistons. To check tension of
chain drives and operation of all safety dogs and
other cables.
PREREQUISITES
Tool kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Use appropriate back, energy lockout and blood–born pathogens protection when inspecting
or repairing the system.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Check condition of all counterpoise and counterweight cables and belts.
Visually inspect cables and belts for signs of deterioration (i.e., kinking, fraying,
cracking, worn or missing teeth, etc.)
Run soft cloth along length of cables to detect any broken wires.
NOTE: For more information regarding the checking of counterweight cables, see Service
Note 1625.
CAUTION: At the first signs of deterioration, replacement of counterweight and/or
safety cables should be scheduled.
Check time intervals for mandatory replacement of counterpoise components for your
specific equipment.
For a Schedule of Mandatory Replacement, refer to Chart 1 (or to OEM service

documentation if applicable).
NOTE: If cable replacement is required, schedule time for it to be done at a later date. Also
check time intervals for your specific equipment. Some service notes with replacement
procedures are contained in chapter 10 of this manual.
The part number for the sticker on the back of the hangers is as follows:
48 Hangers 46–233572P1
XT Handers 46–240718P1
If customer refuses replacement of the cables or spring assembly, document on a dispatch
and notify your Area Service Manager as soon as possible.
1–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510
job card: RAD SAFETY – COUNTERWEIGHT –

DRIVES – ETC.
Job Card XPM–100 2 of 12
Chart 1
Part Replacement Cycle
Number (years)
AMX–110
Counterweight Cable 46–165782P1 3
AMX–2
AMX–3
AMX–4
Compax I–I/T and 40E

No requirements
Diamentor
Ion chamber matching cal (refer to manual # 2135777–100 Job Card CAL001 2
DLX (no required replacement)

Battery kit 2157723 Expected life 4 years
(reference PM document # 2198948)
DRI
Memory battery 067–026 (or TADIRAN T5186) 7
Fuji FCR AC–3 (reader)

Suction Cup (2) 2137055 2
Suction Pump 2137046 3
Erasure Lamps (5) 2136770 2
Cleaning Roller 2137054 2
Fuji FCR 9000/C (reader)

Suction Cups (3) 2137154 1
Suction Pump 2137046 3
Erasure Lamp (5) 2136770 2
Brush Roller 2137151 2
Brush Roller 2137152 2
If MAF is used
Suction Cups (3) 2137153 2
Suction Cups (6) 392N0007 2
1–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
Fuji CR–LP D/FL–IMD (Laser Imager)
Suction Cups(2) 392F0030 3
Suction Pump 133Y2026 3
Program X
Battery 99171019 3
(or replace if voltage falls below 2.7V)
Senographe 500T/TS/CPM and 600T/TS

Suspension Cable C195574 4
Shaft 45202147 4
Pulley C195572 4
Circlips (10 mm ext. Dia.) 990180600 4
Casing 45202168 4
Screw (ST M5x8) 99059757 4
Release Rollers (2 used) 45202050 4
Spring 45553860 4
Senographe DMR
Compression Motor Belt 91726680 *
Compression Arm Drive Belt 36005885 *
Column Elevator Gas Piston 91726753 *
* Diagnostic – 3 years or 90000 exposures / Screening – 18 months or 90000 exposures
Senographe 700T/800T
Compression Arm Drive Belt 2132430 3
Senix HF 500T/TS and 600T/FD

Suspension Cable (2 used) 45070784 4
Filter C192649 4
Battery 99171019 4
Centering Light 45066644 3
Cable Assembly C809446 3
Diodes (252 for triph – 2 used) 99170486 4
Relay Plate 45559687 4
1–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
Senix 500T ET and 600T Triphase
Suspension Cable C195574 4
Shaft 45202147 4
Pulley C195572 4
Flat Washer 91637505 4
Circlip (10 mm extn dia) 99018600 4
Housing 45202168 4
Headless Screw (m5x8) 99059757 4
Ressort 45553860 4
Filter C192649 4
Battery 99171019 4
Centering Light 45066644 3
Cable Assembly C809446 3
Diodes (252 for triph – 2 used) 99170486 4
Relay Plate 45559687 4
SenoVision
No Requirements
Silhouette 20S
Counterweight cable kit 167–01–250 3
(reference service manual # 2117481–100)
Silhouette HF
No Requirements (reference service manual # 2127416–100)
Stenoscop 6000 & 9000

Battery 99171019 3
StereoTix
No Requirements
TomoLink
No Requirements
48–4 Hangers
Spring and Drum Asm (48–4A) 46–144311G1 8
Spring and Drum Asm (48–4B&C) 46–165472G1 8
Safety Asm 46–216816G2 8
Idler Asm 46–216791G1 8
1–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
48–5 Hanger
Spring and Drum Asm T3484C 8
Safety Device Spring 46–166128P1 8
Main Counterweight Cable 46–163291P1 4
Safety Counterweight Cable 46–163787P1 4
XT RAD and Fluoro Suspension
Spring and Drum Asm T3484D0 10

Safety Asm (old style) 46–270453G1 8
Safety Asm (new style) 46–219298G1 8
Main Cable Kit 46–173995P1 5
XT Vascular Suspension
Spring and Drum Asm T3484D 10
Safety Asm 46–169150G34 8
Main Cable Kit 46–173995P1 5
CGR Suspension 3 (S/N 930004A)

Cable Fittings (2 used) C172143 9
Circlips ext.D10 Type 89 (2 used) 99018600 9
V2x15 Cotter Pin (4 used) 99153015 9
Fhc Screw M6x20 (4used) 99087354 9
Column Cables 2160537 9
Drum Tensioner (8kg spool ass.) C165780 3
Drum Tensioner (3kg spool ass.) C166241 3
Reference Maintainence ASM # 2164694-100 and PM Supplement # 2201990-100
CGR Suspension 6
Gas Springs (S/N 4020) 45474865 3
Counterweight Cables Kit (S/N 4019) 45203722 3
65 Tube Stand
Cables (2 used) 1005048P1 4
80 Tube Stand
Balance Spring Asm 46–900157G1 5
S1U Tube Stand (Compact 500)

Cable and Pulleys 45561312 5
1–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
Telegem 90 (no required replacement)
Main Counterweight Cable 46–163170P1
Main Counterweight Cable 46–163170P2
II Counterweight Cable 46–163170P3
II Counterweight Cable 46–163170P4
Televix 2 (serial no. 11700/1 thru 11710/3) and

Televix 3 (10170/1 thru 11003 manuf Apr.18,74 thru Jan.76) (See S/N 4014)
Angulation Chain (12.7mm pitch) 811550P065 4
Closing link 851695P275 4
Pinion (if required) 811557P034
Tilt–C
No mandatory component replacement, but additional mechanical checks are

required adding about 6 hours to the PM every 3 years. 3
Refer to direction 2106462–100.
EP Table
No requirements
Televix 2 (serial no. 1170/4 manuf on or after Jan.23,76)

Televix 3 (serial no. 11004/1 manuf. on or after Jan.26,76) (See S/N 4014)
Angulation Chain (19.05mm pitch) 811551P025 4
Closing Link 851695P295 4
Pinion (if required) 819352P015
Futuralix 10/11/12
Tilt Chain C318234 6
Tilt Quick–release Link 91628077 6
Tilt Belt (2 used) C368131 6
Carriage Belt C365845 6
Column Belt (2 used) C373089 6
Long. Tabletop Double Chain C363129 6
Long. Tabletop Tension Pinion C190368 6
Long. Tabletop Reduction Pinion C365735 6
Long. Tabletop Quick–release Link (2 used) 91628072 6
Futuralix 20
Tilt Belt (pair) C372680 6
Tilt Quick–release Link 91628077 6
Carriage Belt (2 used) C372757 6
Column Belt (pair) C373957 6
1–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
Futuralix 20 (cont.)
Long. Tabletop Belt (2 used) C366094 6
Futuralix 90
Tilt Belt (pair) C373542 6
Column Belt (pair) C373957 6
Long. Tabletop Belt (2 used) C366094 6
Futuralix 1500
Tilt Brake–tensioner C196763 6
Tilter ( See note) 45201891 6
Carriage Chain C321750 3
Carriage quick–release Link (2 used) C341663 3
Column Belt (2 used) C321739 6
SID Motor Belt 91628717 6
Long. Tabletop Brake 91202704 6
Long. Tabletop Roller C324858 6
Long. Tabletop Ring 91566049 6
Long. Tabletop Bush 91628772 6
Long. Tabletop Double Chain (3 links) C325945 6
Long. Tabletop Double Chain (433 links) C363129 6
NOTE: For systems that have NOT been upgraded to the corrected toothing tilter the following
items will be needed (see S/N 4015):
Servo Pot Gear C32952
Resistor (R36 on Board S–197052, 4.99k ohm instead of 8.06k ohm) 99063202
Resistor (R4 on Board S–1977052, 510 ohm instead of 1 ohm) 99041756
Resistor (R8 on Board S–198107, 6.8k ohm instead of 10k ohm) 99028136
Check Resistor R118 is 2.15k ohm (Board S–198107)
Tool Kit (extender bd and 35 mm flat wrench) 45201894
Two flat 30 mm wrenches C325771
Two 700 mm high stands
1–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
Power Pax
No requirements
Prestilix 110/150/150ANGIO
Tilt Quick–release Link (2 used) C344966 9
Tilt Roller (2 used) C323659 9
Tilt Anti-friction ring for roller (2 used) C344817 9
Tilt Belt C344676 6
SID Belt (except PTX 110) (2 used) C340817 6
Fulcrum Belt 91628062 6
Long. Tabletop Belt 91618060 6
Long. Tabletop chain C317369 6
Long. Tabletop Quick–release Link (2 used) C371979 6
Prestilix 1690/1690S/1694
Tilt Belt (pair) 851661P735 6
Carriage Belt (set of 3) 851661P475 6
Column Belt 851668P075 6
Prestilix 1600/Televix 1600/Futuralix 1600 (Counterweight) (see SN 4336)

Tilt Double Link Chain (3 used) 851695P295 9
Tilt Curved Link Chain 851695P495 9
Tilt Double Roller Chain 811551P035 9
Tilt Belt (2 used, with counterweight cables) 851665P055 6
Tilt Belt (1 used, without counterweight cables) 851661P735 6
Selector Chain (Spanish tables) 811543P045 6
Selector Chain (Belgian tables) 811543P035 6
Selector Quick–release (2 used) 91628078 6
Carriage Belt 851665P425 6
Column Belt (length = 612) 851665P395 6
Column Belt (length – 637) 851665P405 6
Column Belt (length – 662 851665P415 6
Power Relay (2K3) 854273P065) 9
Power Relay (2K10) 854273P065 9
Power Aux Block 854273P525 9
Footrest 2211040 6
Footrest control tool 2221516 6
Counterweight rollers 2221532 6
1–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
Prestilix 1600 AV
Tilt Double Link Chain (3 used) 851695P295 9
Tilt Curved Link Chain 851695P495 9
Tilt Double Roller Chain 811551P035 9
Tilt Belt (2 used) 851665P055 6
Selector Belt 851665P425 6
Power Relay (2K3) 854273P065 9
Foot rest kit 2211040 6
Prestilix 1600 X–E

Tilt Belt (2 used) 851665P055 6
Selector Belt 851665P425 6
Power Relay (2k3) 854273P065 9
Foot rest kit 2211040 6
Prestige SI
Integrated console battery ? 8
Prestige VH
Integrated console battery ? 8
Monitrol 15
Counterweight Cable 1001236P9 4
Counterweight Cable 508A855P19 4
Monitrol 90
Counterweight Cable (2 used) 508A855P18 4
Counterweight Cable (2 used) 1001236P16 4
Counterweight Cable 508A855P19 4
1–13
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
MPG (console)
Battery 99171019 3
(or replace if voltage falls below 2.7v)
MPH (console)
Battery 99171019 3
(or replace if voltage falls below 2.7v)
RFX
Carriage Counterweight Cable 46–223317P7 4
Carriage Counterweight Cables (2 used) 2129515 4
Main Counterweight Cable 2129536 4
SFD Main Cable 2129515–3 4
(reference PM manual #2144932–100)
M–200 Table
Belts (2 used) 45560080 2
Gas Spring 91713595 2
Polyurethane Bearings (16 used) 91636612 2
Polyurethane Rollers (8 used) C801253 2
Polyurethane Rollers (4 used) C801293 2
Protection Strips (4 used) C801671 2
Protection Pins (8 used) C801672 2
M–200 Table (cont.)

Protection Springs (4 used) C801673 2
Protection Rollers (8 used) C801674 2
Electric Jack 45562517 6
AFM
Elevator Belt 45201470 5
L/U–A, L/U–C, LC, LC/LP

No Requirements
LCA, LCV+, LCN+

C–ARC gearbox 2119830 5
II Elevator gearbox (32 cm) 2116071 (T3694F) 5
II Elevator gearbox (40 cm) 2116071 5
1–14
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
DIRECTION
46–019510

DRIVES – ETC.
Chart 1 (Cont.)
Number (years)
Legacy
Carriage Counterweight Cable 46–223317P7 4
Carriage Counterweight Cables (2 used) 2129515 4
Main Counterweight Cable 2129536 4
SFD Main Cable 2129515–3 4
(reference PM manual #2144932–100)
LP3
No Requirements
Omega Tables
No Requirements
VMX and VMX+

Battery (CPU) 99171019 2
Gas Springs Kit (set of 2) 45296226 5
Capacitor Tank 45297168 8
Booster Tank 45296467 8
Relay X1 91671756 5
Relay X5 99184000 5
Relay X6 & X7 99184001 5
Relay X8 91716996 5
Relay X9 91717794 5
Monitrol Booms (no required replacement)

Verify Clam Shell is present
SEP–90
Battery ES9067034 3
1–15
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV

DRIVES – ETC.
All Systems
Check the negator on systems if present.
Check all safety devices associated with the cables:
safety on hanger
safety dog on table
myelographic stops
Check alignment of the pulleys and for wear and tear.
Make sure cables cannot escape pulley guards and do not rub as the cables leave
the pulley.
Check for excessive wear on counterpoise take–up drums. (Some older systems such as
48–4 & S–6 have poor fleet angles by design and rub. No adjustment is possible.)
Check for .005–.020I clearance between the drum cable guard and the cables on the
straight drum. Re-adjust the guard if necessary.
Check cable termination points for rust and tightness. Replace if rust is found.
Check belt termination integrity.
Check chain drives on tables, generators (CGR kVp drive on cpg and compression chains
on Ibis tables).
Check chain tensions – if proper chain tension is questionable, refer to service manual for
specific equipment and/or defer service to later date. (See Service Note #3284 for
RFX/SFX, Section 10.)
Visually inspect gas counterbalance pistons for signs of leakage.
Check integrity of masterlinks and attachment links.
Check torque washers on CGR tables also.
Check safety device on vertical bucky stand and changex.
Check adjustment of safety mechanism on 48–4 hangers with following actuation test:
a. Bounce off bottom end stop – safety should engage and ratchet (if
applicable).
b. Release safety (if applicable).
c. Bounce off top end stop – safety should NOT engage (if applicable).
Inspect condition of table top and angulation drive belts.
Check for SID pot gear mesh and belt condition on all hangers (if applicable).
1–16
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: R&F SAFETY – COUNTERWEIGHT CABLES – CHAIN DRIVES – ETC.
subassembly: R&F SYSTEMS date: 11/98
purpose: To check condition and age of all counterweight

time: 15 min.
cables. To check tension of chain drives and
operation of all safety dogs and other cables.
PREREQUISITES
Tool kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Use appropriate back, energy lockout and blood borne pathogens protection when
TASK DESCRIPTION
Before starting this job card, make sure that all PM has been done on the previous job card.
This job card adds to XPM–100 and does not replace it.
Procedure:
Check the condition of the counterweight cables (refer to XPM–100 for details, if needed).
Check any safety devices connected with the fluoro hanger, if applicable.
Check alignment of the pulleys for wear and tear.
Check cable termination points for rust and tightness.
Replace if rust is found.
Check chain drive tension for power assist.
Check condition of belts and/or springs in the spot–film device.
Check condition of gears associated with these belts also.
Check TV monitor and console carts if present.
1–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
HV CABLE BRAID 1/1 XPM-106

job card: MECHANICAL
subassembly: HV Cables date: 05/01/95
purpose: Verify continuity of HV cable braid time: 15 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Multimeter
Tool kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
NOTE: This test is required for all non–line frequency systems.
Turn off all power and lockout system.

Remove a high voltage cable at the tube end and discharge cable pins to ground.
Conect the multimeter from the cable shield to a common ground poiont.
The resistance should be less than 100 ohms.
If the resistance is too high, verify your ground point and that the HV transformer is
grounded. If the resistance is still too high, verify that the problem is the HV cable.
Replacement of the HV cable will be needed.
1-18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
SAFETY 1/1 XPM-108

job card: SAFETY - GAS SHOCKS
subassembly: POSITIONER WITH GAS SHOCKS date: 11/98
purpose: To check condition or gas shocks. time: 15 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tool kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Gas shocks are under pressure and can be VERY dangerous when disconnected. Use
proper procedures if replacing and use caution during inspections.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Check travel of movement involving the counterweighting by gas shocks. Ease of
movement and speed of travel should be equal in both directions.
Systems containing gas shocks include the following:
Stenoscop
M200 table
VMX
Prestilex systems
Suspension 6 hangers
1-19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
SAFETY RAD 1/1 XPM-110

job card: RAD MOUNTING BOLTS
subassembly: RAILS date: 11/99
HANGERS
TABLES
CHEST STANDS/CHANGEX
COLLIMATORS
TUBES
TOMO SYSTEMS
purpose: Tightness of mounting bolts time: 10 min.
NOTE: The frequency for checking mounting bolts is once every 12 months.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Tool kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Check tightness of all mounting bolts.
Some of this can be accomplished by good observation during operation of the
equipment.
Check the overhead suspension by moving it around while running the column up and
down with the Lat and Long locks engaged.
Extend the table top out and then attempt to move the table by pushing the top around. It
should be solid.
Mounting bolts on rails.
End caps, gooseneck on hangers.
Bolts mounted to carriage on hanger.
Table base anchors, table tub bottom screws, bucky screws, patient step, and lead weights.
Tube mounting bolts.
Collimator baseplate bolts to tube, 3 (or 5) mounting screws to baseplate.
Chest stand mounting anchors.
Ordograph mounting bolts.
Tomo tube stand anchors.
Inspect radiation shield for cracks or loose mounts, pivot pins and joints (if present).
Inspect ceiling mounted injectors and surgery lights for cracks or loose mounts, pivot pins
and joints (if present).
1-20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
SAFETY 1/1 XPM-112

job card: R&F MOUNTING BOLTS
subassembly: SPOT-FILM DEVICE date: 11/99
TABLES
PREREQUISITES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Before starting this job card, make sure that all PM has been done on the previous
job card. This job card adds to XPM–110 and does not replace it.
Procedure:
equipment.
Check the spot–film device carriage.
Check all mounting bolts.
Turn on all locks and try to shake the SFD. It should be secure.
Check the TV monitor cart.
Check the monitor suspension and yoke if applicable.
Tilt–C system requires all gearbox mounting bolts be retorqued every 3 years. Refer to
direction 2106462–100.
1-21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
SAFETY 1/1 XPM-114

job card: VAS MOUNTING BOLTS
subassembly: VASCULAR TABLES date: 11/99
VASCULAR POSITIONERS
XRT AND MONITOR SUSPENSIONS
PREREQUISITES
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Before starting this job card, make sure that all PM has been done on the previous
job cards. This job card adds to XPM–110 and XPM–112 and does not replace
them.
Procedure:
equipment.
For example, the LU type systems can be tested by rotating the “L” arm and observing the
base for abnormalities such as gaps or shifting and problems in movement.
Extend the table top and lock all the locks. Try to move the end of the table top, magnetic
locks should take a reasonable force to override.
Check the overhead positioners in the same way.
1-22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
SAFETY 1/1 XPM-118

job card: SAFETY - ACCESSORIES
subassembly: ROOM ACCESSORIES date: 11/98
purpose: Verify the safety and mechanical integrity of the time: 5 min.
system accessories
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Normal hand tools
Current clamp–on meter (for systems with Powertech Filter)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Check all system accessories for safe operation.
Foot Rest – Verify the foot rest can be securely fastened to the foot end and the
head end of the table. Inspect the table top mounting holes for wear. Check to make
sure the safety pin latches in the hole and that there is no way it can come out
except by lifting the latch. Verify that warning labels/operation instructions are in
place.
Shoulder Rest – Verify that the shoulder rest attaches securely and will not come
loose or off with normal movement.
Handles – Table and Chest Board – Check to see that the handles can be attached
securely and will not come off except by the proper method.
Collimator Cylinder Extension – Check to see that the collimator cylinder extension
will not come off the cylinder when extended all the way out. Also verify that it fits
securely in the collimator tracks and latches in place. Check that the telescoping
column does not drift down when cylinder is attached.
Shields – Check that shields, if present, operate correctly. Inspect lead aprons on
spot–film device and radiation shield (if present) for tears or damage.
Hand Switch – Verify that the hand switch hanger is in good condition and is
positioned so that the x–ray machine cannot be operated in an unsafe manner.
Positioning Restraints – Verify that the restraints can be properly mounted to the
table.
Check other accessories that may be in the room for safe operation.
For Systems with Powertech Suppressor/Filter

Using a clamp–on current meter, verify that the current in the current loop for each power
phase is still within the range as indicated on the factory tag on each loop.
CAUTION: Doing this test requires power on, therefore, use proper safety
precautions.
1-23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
VISUAL INSPECTION RAD 1/2 XPM-120

job card: RAD VISUAL INSPECTION
subassembly: GENERATORS, TABLES, HANGERS, date: 11/98
TUBE SUPPORTS, CHEST STANDS
purpose: To perform a visual inspection of various compoĆ time: 10 min.
nents including important contactors in the generator, cirĆ
cuit boards, regulator motors, cables, covers, etc.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Tool kit with flashlight
Do this job card in conjunction with job cards XPM–130, XPM–132 and XPM–134, Cleaning
and Lubricating.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1-24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
VISUAL INSPECTION RAD 2/2 XPM-120

job card: RAD VISUAL INSPECTION
subassembly: GENERATORS, TABLES, HANGERS, date: 11/98
TUBE SUPPORTS, CHEST STANDS
purpose: To perform a visual inspection of various compoĆ time: 10 min.
nents including important contactors in the generator, cirĆ
cuit boards, regulator motors, cables, covers, etc.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Remove all power from equipment and lockout energy source before
proceeding!
Procedure:
While cleaning and lubricating system, check for obvious signs of heat on circuit boards,
leaky caps, and loose connections. JUST KEEP YOUR EYES OPEN.
Check cable drape, concealments, and harnesses for strain relief, cut cables, and proper
routing of cables..
Check spark gaps on HV transformers for proper gap, if present — should be a business
card width (0.10 to 0.15I).
Check condition of MOV’s or similar devices if present on HV transformer.
Check for excessive oil leakage from HV transformers.
Check all major contactors for free non–binding operation.
Check the contacts for signs of pitting or erosion.
Include the line, safety, fluoro and charger contactors.
Schedule replacement if necessary.
Check and if necessary, tighten all power connections in the power cabinets.
Include the volt–pac, all capacitors, contactors, SCR’s and etc.
Ensure that all circuit boards, plugs, jacks and push–on connectors are firmly seated.
Verify that regulator motors are not seized.
Check the volt–pac brushes for excessive or uneven wear, and volt–pac surface for pitting
or burn marks.
Verify collimator tape measure is in good condition.
Check gear reducers for leakage. If leaking, check level of lubricant.
NOTE: If system is new, verify the gear box has shipped with oil.
Look for damaged or missing components and hardware, replace if found.
Snap rings, cotter pins, mounting screws, etc.
Trim covers, especially in patient areas.
Weldments and castings for signs of cracks and wear.
Chain master links and master link keepers.
Verify warning labels are present and legible.
1-25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
VISUAL INSPECTION R&F 1/1 XPM-122

job card: R&F VISUAL INSPECTION
subassembly: MONITOR CART date: 05/01/95
MONITOR SUSPENSION
FREE SUSPENSION
SFD
IMAGE SYSTEM
purpose: Visual inspection of various system components time: 5 min.
to insure the integrity of the system.
PREREQUISITES
and Lubricating.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Remove power from equipment and lockout energy source before proceeding!
Procedure:
Do all applicable procedures in job card XPM–120 before performing XPM–122.
Remember to JUST KEEP YOUR EYES OPEN.
Image System
Check circuit boards and connectors
Check all camera mounts on intensifier for proper setting and be sure camera’s are
mounted securely.
Check the image gate drive belt for condition.
If necessary, schedule its replacement.
Check the monitor cart.
Check the monitor suspension. Make sure the safety pin is secure.
Visually inspect the spot–film device.
Check the myelographic cone and grids.
Check the control panel.
Check cables and cable routing.
Check any intensifier free suspensions present.
1-26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
VISUAL INSPECTION VASC 1/1 XPM-124

job card: VASC VISUAL INSPECTION
subassembly: VASCULAR POSITIONERS date: 05/01/95
VASCULAR TABLES
IMAGE SYSTEMS
MONITOR SUSPENSIONS
purpose: Visual inspection of various system components time: 5 min.
to insure the integrity of the system.
PREREQUISITES
and Lubricating.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Remove power from equipment and lock out energy source before
proceeding!
NOTE: For LC and LC/LP systems, refer to direction #46–019472 for additioinal
information on maintenance precedures.
Procedure:
Do all applicable procedures in job card XPM–120 AND XPM–122 before performing
XPM–124.
Another friendly reminder to KEEP YOUR EYES OPEN.
Check all cables and connections at the pulse bias tank and focus bias tanks.
Check for excessive oil leakage.
Check the intensifier and related cables and cameras.
Check the positioners.
Cables, cable drapes and cable routing.
Any possible interference of positioner with cabling, cameras and anything else on
the
system or in the room
Check the tables.
Check cables and cable drapes.
Check accessories on the table.
Check the table top and rails for signs of wear.
Check that table accessory rails are tight.
1-27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
CLEAN and LUBRICATE RAD 1/2 XPM-130

job card: RAD CLEAN AND LUBRICATE
subassembly: ALL EQUIPMENT date: 05/01/95
purpose: To clean all necessary equipment and to lubricate time: 2 hours
moving parts and bearing surfaces.
PREREQUISITES
Rags
LPS or STP (lubricant) or equivalent
Formula 409 (cleaning solution) or equivalent
Vacuum
Silicone grease
Lubricants:
Designation Type Trade Name Code Number
G1 Grease Shell Alvania 2 870001P305
G2 Grease White Rocol 850756P015
O1 Oil Castrol Rusilo 870001P031
O2 Oil JwlSS VP2 Kombi 876867P104
O3 Oil Molykote Omniglass 870001P019
Use G1 for bearings and rollers.
Use G2 for gears, slides, and jaws.
Use O1 for shafts, bores, and rails not treated for anti–rust.
Use O2 for chains and pinions.
Use O3 for all joints.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1-28
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
CLEAN and LUBRICATE RAD 2/2 XPM-130

job card: RAD CLEAN AND LUBRICATE
subassembly: ALL EQUIPMENT date: 05/01/95
purpose: To clean all necessary equipment and to lubricate time: 2 hours
TASK DESCRIPTION
This job card should be done along with XPM–120, XPM–122 and XPM–124 Visual
Inspection.
CAUTION: Check with the customer for housekeeping assistance for proper disposal
of needles, etc. Make sure all power is off for safety reasons.
Procedure:
Clean all filters, fans, and interiors of cabinets with a vacuum.
Check all fans for rotation when power is turned on.
Remember the fans below the inverters and card racks.
Clean all bearing tracks with oil. Use sparingly as excessive oil will collect dirt and/or cause
movement problems.
On XT hanger rails, check for .02I gap between the top of the bearings and the bottom of
the rail.
Make sure you cover rails, hangers, tube stands, tables, and chest stands.
Regrease high voltage cables if needed. This should be done at least once a year.
Verify pin spread for good contact (especially CATH cables).
Check the oil in wells at the high voltage transformer.
Make sure that all high voltage cables are tight when finished checking oil/grease.
Clean, and polish all exposed surfaces.
If paint touch up is required, schedule with customer to reduce patient discomfort.
1-29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
CLEAN and LUBRICATE R&F 1/2 XPM-132

job card: R&F CLEAN AND LUBRICATE
subassembly: GENERATORS date: 11/98
SFD DRIVES
IMAGE GATE
MONITORS
CAMERA and INTENSIFIER LENSES
purpose: To clean all necessary equipment and to lubricate time: 30 min.
PREREQUISITES
Rags
Vacuum
Silicone grease
Lense cleaning kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Inspection.
CAUTION: Check with customer for housekeeping assistance for proper disposal of
needles, etc. Make sure all power is off for safety reasons.
1-30
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
/REV 19 46–019510
CLEAN and LUBRICATE R&F 2/2 XPM-132

job card: R&F CLEAN AND LUBRICATE
subassembly: GENERATORS, SFD DRIVES, IMAGE date: 11/98
GATE, MONITORS,
CAMERA and INTENSIFIER LENSES
Procedure:
Clean and lube the SFD drives and cables.
Include the film carriage, grid drive, mask drives and myelographic cone drive.
Clean and lube the image gate in the intensifier housing.
When done, clean the image gate mirror and the II lense.
Clean accessible lens surfaces.
If inaccessible surfaces need cleaning, schedule additional time for service.
Clean the monitor – case and face plate.
Photospot camera – see job card XPM–522.
Clean and inspect all nylon guides and rollers.
Smoothness of movement on remote systems is very dependent on clean bearings and
bearing tracks. Therefore, clean all surfaces and bearing races thoroughly.
Check filter and water level in tank for tube water chiller.
Check and vacuum condenser fins as needed.
Chiller motor bearing lubrication: Add 30 to 35 drops of SAE 20 oil.
continuous use: once per year.

Intermittent use: once every 2 years.
Occasional use: once every 5 years.
Verify water flow for systems using facility water cooling (no chiller ).
Verify chiller operation.
Prestilex 110/150/150 Angio
Clean the endless screw on the carriage but DO NOT LUBRICATE.
Prestilex 1600
Clean rails for footrest on every inspection.
(Footrest must be replaced every 6 years).
Non–GEMS Systems
For non–GEMS systems, refer to OEM service documentation.
Prestige VH/II and VH/AD
For Prestige VH/II and VH/AD refer to CDROM 2249768–200.
1-31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
CLEAN and LUBRICATE VASC 1/1 XPM-134

job card: VASC CLEAN AND LUBRICATE
subassembly: VASC TABLE RAM and WORM GEARS date: 05/01/95
VASC TABLE RAILS and STEPPER DR
VASC POSITIONERS
CINE CAMERA and MAGAZINES
PREREQUISITES
Do all applicable items in job card XPM–130 and XPM–132 before proceeding with this job
card.
Rags
Vacuum
Silicone grease
Lens cleaning kit
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TASK DESCRIPTION
Inspection.
CAUTION: Check with customer for housekeeping assistance for proper disposal of
needles, etc. Make sure all power is off for safety reasons.
Procedure:
Check, clean and lube the table ram and worm gears if present.
While in the table, check the table height pot.
Clean the table rails and the stepper drive wheel (older units) (where applicable).
Clean the cine camera and magazines.
Clean with compressed air if available.
Clean out all film chips.
Lube according to the Arri service manual.
Clean all positioners.
If necessary lube according to service manual.
Generators
Clean the focus bias and pulse bias tanks (where fitted).
Check condition of oil in CGR tetrode tanks, etc. Schedule replacement if needed.
1-32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
FUNCTIONAL CHECK RAD 1/2 XPM-140

job card: FUNCTIONAL CHECK - RAD
subassembly: HANGERS date: 05/01/95
TABLES
CHEST STANDS
purpose: To perform a Functional check on the system time: 30 min.
after the safety checks have been completed.
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
Hangars:
Check smooth operation of hanger longitudinally, laterally, and vertically.
Verify that locks hold and that detents and motor drives are operable where applicable.
Check tube angulation and detents.
Check tube rotation and detents.
Check plumb of column by lowering tube to lowest position and aligning crosshairs to the
floor. Tape a piece of paper to the floor and mark where the crosshairs appear. (If
you have a tile floor, align crosshairs to the point where four tiles make a cross.)
Raise the tube to the highest position and verify that the crosshairs are still within
specs.
Verify SID and warning stickers are present where required.
With the table horizontal, center the tube over the table and verify with the collimator light
that the tube is centered to the table. Run the tube longitudinally down the table to
check tracking. Angulate the tube also while centered and light on to check tracking
of the column.
Table:
Check longitudinal and lateral (if applicable) movements of the table top. Also check top
limits while angulating.
While angulating, verify operation of angulation indicator.
Check that the red emergency stop button is operational, if equipped.
Check that no angulation is possible with the patient step out.
Check horizontal stop feature as well as table centering switches.
Check movement, locks, and counterbalance of the bucky.
Check that the cassette tray plug aligns properly and that cassette tray stop is functional.
Check that the cassette has minimal side to side play when inserted.
Remove cassette tray and visually clean, inspect and lubricate as needed. Inspect cassette
tray tunnel for wear, particularly for damage to ion detector if present.
1-33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
FUNCTIONAL CHECK RAD 2/2 XPM-140

job card: FUNCTIONAL CHECK - RAD
Silhouette HF Systems
Check the table Scissor elevating mechanics for binding.
Check the operation of the printer, if equipped. If service is needed refer to the
service manual.
Chest stand:
Verify vertical locks hold and when locks release, it should move freely and with minimal
side play.
For vertical bucky stand–release angulation lock (not applicable for 46–162743P3) – it
should tilt forward 20 degrees and backwards 90 degrees to horizontal.
Engage angulation lock. It should hold and not bind.
Bucky should also rotate 0 degrees to 180 degrees.
Sitting position – tilt bucky to horizontal position. Release leg assembly and lower bucky to
the floor until legs touch the floor.
For vertical cassette holder – operate cassette size knob. Try all cassette sizes and verify
that the detent holds when a cassette is inserted.
Changex:
Check film transport.
Install the film supply magazine – red check light on.
If fewer than 15–20 films in the magazine then amber film light will be on.
Install patient ID card, then red check light goes out.
Green ready light turns on as film transports to exposure area.
Switch changex power off then on.
Film transports out of exposure area and red check light turns on.
If you have a takeup magazine, remove the magazine and verify that a film was exposed.
If you have a processor, the wait light will come on – the tower and the film will be
developed through the processor.
1-34
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
FUNCTIONAL CHECK R&F 1/1 XPM-142

job card: R&F FUNCTIONAL CHECK
subassembly: SFD date: 05/01/95
FLUORO
purpose: To perform a functional check on the system after time: 15 min.
the safety checks have been completed.
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Check that the angulation knob on the SFD angulates the table to its full movement.
Verify that control does not stick at any position.
Check that the table top movement operates from the SFD controls.
Verify that the 1–on–1, 2–on–1, 3–on–1, 4–on–1, 6–on–1 and minispot (if applicable) are
selectable and brings in the appropriate mask.
Verify cone drive (or manual operation) is permissible.
With horizontal stop off (on table control panel) verify no cone drive and cone light flashes
when cone selected.
If applicable verify that power assist handle works.
Verify that the travel of the carriage is smooth with no binding.
Check that forward park latch operates properly and that exposures are disabled with no
cassette in place.
With a removable intensifier, verify that the II is secure and that the intensifier in place
switch works properly.
With a removable II, check that long and lateral movements are smooth.
Verify that the intensifier is balanced on the support arm.
1-35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

job card: R&F FUNCTIONAL CHECKs - REMOTE TABLES
subassembly: REMOTE R&F TABLES date: 05/01/95
purpose: Check Functionality of Remote Table Systems. time:
PREREQUISITES
Hand Tools
TASK DESCRIPTION
Console:
Check the operations of all controls and switches.
Check that the joystick operation is balanced in both directions.
Verify that the enable relay is not energized with the joystick centered. If so, check
the joystick.
Verify the footswitch operation.
Check the table side control operation.
Check the operation of the compression device and the proper movements are
locked outwhen it is not parked.
Table:
Verify all table movements for smooth operation.
Check that the travel is to the full range and limits are operational.
Check the motor brakes are operating.
Verify that the motor drives, gear reducers, belts, and chains do not show signs of
excessive wear or binding.
Check the cassette tray operation and cassette clamping.
Observe the mask operation when the film selection is changed.
Verify the collision sensors in all modes.
Run the table to check that no collision is permitted with the ceiling, floor, cabinets,
etc.
Verify that table tilt is only enabled with the tube at minimum SID.
Verify the min. and max. SID travel stops and that travelis about the same speed in
both directions. If not, the gas spring may be the probelm (if equipped).
For systems with grid drive, check that the grid drives to the proper position as the
system modes are changes.
Verify the collimator operation and controls.
Verify the tube rotation and rotation interlocks.
Check that the mylar shields are tight and in position.
Check condition of the DIN (accsssory) rails on th etabletop.
If equipped with a docking film changer, check the interlocks are operational an dthe
proper movements are locked out.
Verify operation of the system centering function.
1-36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

job card: R&F FUNCTIONAL CHECKs - REMOTE TABLES
subassembly: REMOTE R&F TABLES date: 05/01/95
purpose: Check Functionality of Remote Table Systems. time:
Prestilix 1600
Verify the compression linking bar is tight and no play is evident (see FMI–11063 if
required).
Futuralix 12/20/90
If tabletop chain tension is incorrect, refer to Service Note # RRF 930003A.
Futuralix 1500
If tabletop chain tension is incorrect, refer to SErvice Note
for American pole #3424
for European pole # RRF 930003
Non–GEMS Systems
Refer to OEM Service Documentation if required.
1-37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
FUNCTIONAL CHECK VASC 1/1 XPM-144

job card: VASCULAR FUNCTIONAL CHECK
subassembly: VASCULAR date: 05/01/95
purpose: Functional check of a vascular room time: 15 min.
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
Mount magazines on all cameras.
Verify that freeplay in the U–arm is no greater than 1 degree (hardware in the U–arm lock
assembly has a tendency to work loose).
With the controls at the table, drive the L–arm and the U–arm through their range of travel
and verify that motion is smooth and doesn’t stall.
Verify while driving arms that the motion can be stopped with a minimal applied force.
Return L and U to 0 degrees.
Move II up and down its full travel and verify that there is no drift from wherever it is
positioned.
Verify operation of the functions on the status control and that the buttons are illuminated
when selected.
Verify table movements: up and down with no binding or excessive noise.
Verify lateral, longitudinal, and rotational movements of the table are smooth; that locks
hold, and that centering switches are operable.
Verify that monitor suspension movements are smooth.
Check LU Arm Lead Glass Shield moves smoothly and freely along the bridge.
Shield arm should move freely from min. to max. height. The shield should rotate 360
degrees. The lead glass shield suspension arm should rotate 330 degrees.
For non–GEMS systems
Refer to OEM service documentation if required.
1-38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
FUNCTIONAL CHECK TOMO 1/3 XPM-150

job card: DEDICATED TOMO TABLES
subassembly: TOMO TABLES date: 11/99
purpose: Functional check of dedicated Tomo tables. time: 10 min.
Mechanical check and Tomo exposure check.
NOTE: Films are not required unless the customer is complaining of film quality.
The frequency of mechanical checks is once every 12 months.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Hand tools, Tomo phantom
TASK DESCRIPTION
After functional check is done on the table, use the tomo phantom during an x-ray exposure in
the Tomo mode to check the Tomo capability of the table. Pictures should not appear blurred.
Procedure:
Check that exposures are disabled if the cassette tray is empty (if applicable).
Compression Devices
Check that tomo and tube angulation is disabled if eh compression device is not parked.
Check that scanning an dtable movements are disabled when the compression device is in
contact with a patient.
VRT Tables:
Depress the table lock foot pedal to the first position.
Verify that the top moves freely in the longitudinal direction only (lateral direction
remains locked).
Depress the table lock foot pedal all the way down.
Verify that the top is free floating in all directions.
Release and verify that the top is locked in all directions.
At the collimator:
Depress and hold the vertical lock button.
Verify that the tube arm moves up and down freely.
Release the button and insure that the arm is locked in place.
Depress and hold the angulation lock button.
Verify that the tube and collimator rotates freely about the horizontal axis.
Release and insure that the tube is locked in place.
Depress and hold the column rotation button. The column should rotate freely to the
head end and the foot end of the table.
Release the button and insure that the column is locked in place.
Depress and hold the drive to head button. Verify that the tube stand drives
smoothly and stops at the bucky’s end of travel.
1-39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

Depress switch again. Verify that the tube stand drives to the limit switch at the end
of the tube stand rail.
Repeat using the drive to foot pushbutton.
Using the slide out operator control on the table.
Depress and hold the Tomo button until the tube stand stops driving and the Tomo
light
is on steady.
Verify that the bucky is coupled to the tube stand.
RTE, RTI, RTP, RTT Tables:

Depress foot pedal and verify that the table top floats in all directions.
Release pedal and verify that the top is locked in all directions.
For RTE, verify both pedals:
Depress and hold the bucky lock release button at the foot end of the bucky.
Verify that the bucky moves freely from the head to the foot end of the table.
Release button and verify that the bucky is locked in position.
For RTE:
Depress the up foot pedal and the vertical drive enable switch on the bucky.
Verify that the table drives up and stops at the exposure position.
Let off the foot pedal and depress again.
Verify that the table drives to the upper limit position and stops.
No further upward drive is possible.
Repeat with the down foot pedal.
Verify that the drive stops at the exposure position and the lower limit
position.
For non–GEMS systems, refer to OEM service documentation.
For RTT and RTI also:
At the collimator, depress and hold the vertical lock button.
Verify that the tube arm moves freely up and down.
Release button and verify that the arm is locked in place.
Depress and hold the angulation lock button.
Verify that the tube and collimator rotates freely about the horizontal arm
axis.
Release button and verify that the tube is locked in place.
Depress the longitudinal lock button.
Verify that the tube stand moves freely from the head to the foot end of the
table.
Depress the button again and verify that the tube stand is locked in position.
1-40
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

Televix , Telegem
Verify table top drive in all directions.
Verify other table movements.
Center the system (T–90 via the system center switch)
Center the Tomo phantom in the exposure area.
Select auto collimation.
Select 1 on 1 film format.
Select a plane of cut.
Select a cut height to approximately center of the phantom.
Observe the plane height display (T–90 must be above 4 mm).
Put a cassette in the bucky and run the tray in.
Set the generator to 60 kVp and 20 mAs.
Prep the Tomo arm.

Prep the rotors and observe the bucky carriage drive and grid operation.
Expose the film.
Observe the system operation and movement for smooth drive or signs of problems.
Process the film and verify proper Tomo operation
No abnormal variations of density
clarity of plane of cut area
proper cut height
all areas out of the plane of cut blurred out.
Return the system to normal non–Tomo mode.
Prestilix Systems:
Verify the collision sensor operations.
Verify the Sudden Movement Safety Circuit by the following:
Turn power off to the table and remove the 1A81 board.
Restore power to the table.
Attempting a left scan should disable power to the table.
Attempt a right scan.
Turn power to the table off again.
Reinstall the 1A81 board and remove the 1A7A board.
Restore power and try the test again.
1-41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

job card: TOMO OPTION
subassembly: ORDOGRAPH (GE) / TOMOLINK date: 11/99
purpose: Functional check of the tomo option. time: 10 min.
NOTE: Films are not required unless the customer is complaining of film quality.
The frequency of mechanical chacks is once every 12 months.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Hand tools and Tomo phantom
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
NOTE: For non–GEMS systems, refer to OEM service documentation as required.
Set the tube support at its lateral detent over the bucky.
The collimator light should be centered laterally.
If a 48–4 hanger is present, release the angulation lock and detent.
Mount the fulcrum bracket to the rail at the rear of the table.
There should be indicators showing where to mount the bracket.
Unlock the bucky and center it on the fulcrum bracket.
Leave it unlocked. The lock should allow the bucky to move freely.
Set the SID of the tube support at 40I (1016 mm) and center it over the bucky.
The SID indicator on the tube support should be easily read.
Connect the tube arm to the tube support if a separate tube arm is used.
The tube arm knob threads should be good and the installed arm should be rigid.
Connect the linkage bar to the tube support and the bucky, making sure the fulcrum pivot is
engaged with the linkage bar.
The linkage bar should be easy to install and be parallel to the fulcrum bracket.
Turn the crank on the fulcrum bracket until the pointer is at “0.”
The small dial at the handle shall also read “0.”
With the tube support coupled to the bucky, center the tube unit over the bucky.
Push the “on” button on the control.
There may be a slight delay during which the motor rotates the cam to the “0” position.
When the cam is reset the Ordo “on” light will light.
At the same time a “click” should be heard indicating that the clutch has engaged.
Depress and hold the “prepare” button.
The tube support should travel 17.6I (447 mm) towards one end of the stationary
rails.
The prepare light should light and remain on.
After functional check is done, perform a radiation test using the Tomo phantom with the
system in the Tomo mode.
Check the films for a good sharp image and that the Tomo plane is cutting at the correct
level.
1-42
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
FUNCTIONAL CHECK 1/1 XPM-160

job card: FUNCTIONAL CHECK
subassembly: FILMCHANGERS AND STEPPERS date: 11/98
purpose: To perform a functional check on filmchangers time: 15 min.
and/or table top steppers
TASK DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Use fresh film to do these runs.
Filmchangers without a stepper.
Turn on the filmchanger.
Set up 80 kVp and 200 mA.
Bring the filmchanger into the field to expose the film.
Line up the tube unit with the filmchanger with the light from the collimator.
The collimator should be in auto.
Advance a film to the expose position.
Expose a film and verify film coverage.
Select a couple of films to process (if done in previous step) to verify that there are
no
scratches, bent corners or indications of problems.
PUCK and SEP systems:
Clean rollers and film paths.
Check backup battery in controller (replace every 3 years).
Check film sensor and magazine sensor switches.
Verify film counter.
System with a stepper:
Enable and prepare the stepper.
Set up the kVp or the mAs stepper (whichever is applicable).
Select 80 kVp and 200 mA.
For LU systems:
L must be at 90 degrees
Table must be centered
laterally
rationally
Take a run with two exposures per step exposing the film.
Verify that the table steps smoothly.
Observe changing of kVp/mAs by watching:
Console readout
Voltpac change (visual or meter on no loads)
Processing all films
Select a couple of films to process (if not done in previous step) to verify that there are no
scratches, bent corners or indications of problems on the film from the run.
1-43
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
LAMPS and INTERLOCKS RAD 1/4 XPM-170

job card: RAD INDICATOR LAMPS AND INTERLOCKS
subassembly: GENERATORS date: 05/01/95
COLLIMATORS
TUBES
purpose: Check all indicator lamps and verify system time: 10 min.
interlocks.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Lamps and Hand tools
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Check generator console (not applicable for Advantx) for burned out lamps by selecting all
functions and replace as needed. If troubleshooting is required, you may need to
schedule additional time.
MPG 65/80/100 generators:
To enter self–test hold down the small focal spot, technique 1, and KV– (KV minus)
keys simultaneously for 1 sec. (Repeat to exit.)
To troubleshoot use ASM chapter 4 job card VF 007.
MPG 50/50E generators:
Prior to turning on power, instll the 30 cm service cable (C806315) in series with the
console cable.
Turn on the system: all pushbuttons should light and an ”R” will be intermittently
appear on the left display. (For abnormal displays, see the IMEX manual.)
Press both mode select buttons just above the display (service buttons #4 & 8).
The indicator lamps will go out and will light along with the a sould if pressed in
conjunction with the service button #1.
Turn off power and remove the service cable.
Program X pushbutton lamps and troubleshoot with job card VF 005.
Phasix 60/65/80 generators:
All buttons should light during system power up.
Masix generator:
Press the <lt> button to verify all display segments.
MVP Micro generator:
Enter ”Cal Mode” by setting switch P6 to on and switches P1 an dP4 of SW272 on
the MS1A1A1 mother board
Enter data”04” in address C012
Auto Test message will be displayed.
Press the AEC button to start.
Verify that the displays for on and off in the following sequence:
Set Low Tech, Ready, Tech O/L, XS, Rotor ON, 72 SID, XL, Tube 1
AEC ON/AEC Reset, 40 SID, Tube 2
1-44
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

COLLIMATORS
TUBES
interlocks.
MVP and MSX generators:
Prior to turning on power, set the following switches on th econsole microprocessor
board:
MVP–switch 5 of SW99 to off
MSX–switch 1 of SW193 to off
Turn on Power
Now switch the following on th econsole processor board:
MVP–switch 8 of SW99 to off
MSX–switch 2 of SW193 to off
Verify all displays
Return system to normal and check for proper operation after cycling system power.
Other products including non–GE systems:
Check for legibility of indicators.
Verify that switches appear to be working.
Verify that tube select lamps operate and that cabinet “on” lamps are lit.
Verify no exposure is possible with door interlock open, if applicable.
Verify operation of the x–ray indicator lamp outside the room door.
Verify no exposure above 50 kVp is possible with Mammo filter pulled out.
Verify operation of all limit switches on all travel and that you do not hit floor, ceiling or walls.
Note: Limits are spceially important on remote systems!
Check all protective rubber flaps an dmylar are correctly in place.
Verify collimator lamp turns on and timer holds lamp on for approximately 25–70 seconds.
Check that X–ray field is clearly defined in a fully illuminated room. (If in doubt, verify
light output per service manual – defer if necessary.)
Set generator console to lowest possible kVp, mA, and time settings.
Take an exposure and verify that there is a visual and audio tone for x–ray.
Check error logs for indications of problems.
Read tube counters and note in log book.
Check all the emergency stop buttons. If a fault is found, notify the customer if assistance is
needed for repair.
1-45
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

COLLIMATORS
TUBES
interlocks.
REMOTE SYSTEMS
Verify that the proper movements are disabled when the compression device is not parked
if equipped.
If the system is capable of moving so that the tube is not aligned to the receptor, verify that
fluoro is disabled if not centered.
Prestilix 110/150/150–Angio Movement Safety:
Safety circuit on board 1120 protects from unwanted movement by removing power.
Testing this operation requires the CI test tool. Start with all CI test switches in
normal. After each test, you will need to return the switch to normal and recycle
power. For all potentiometer tests, you will need to remove power from the table
before setting switches (3,6,9,12).
Function Switch /Movement Power Cut–off
Column Safety
Move control 1 no instant
Posit. Error 2 yes instant
Potentiometer 3 yes delayed
Carriage Safety
Tilt Safety
Long. Tabletop Safety
For the 150 ANGIO system, unlock the changer and move it out a few centimeters. The tilt
command should be disabled.
1-46
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510

COLLIMATORS
TUBES
interlocks.
Prestilix 1600 Sudden Movement Safety Check:
Turn off table power
Remove the 1A81 board (for 1600 systems with counterweights, remove fuse F6)
Turn on poewer and attempt a left scan movement
Power supply should cut off
Repeat the test for the right movement by removing the 1A17 board (or for 1600
systems with counterweights remove fuse F17)
Return system to normal.
Futuralix 1500 Undesired Movement Protection:
Safety circuit C550099 is to detect movement not controlled by the operator and protected
by opening the table breaker. you must restore the system by recycle power
between each test.
Function Fault Simulation LED Lights

Tilt Remove wire 71 on X1 contactor D1
Carriage Remove wire 71 on X3 contactor D3
Long. Top Remove wire 71 on X6 contactor D2
SID Remove wire 71 on X7 contactor D5
Column Unsolder diodes D15 and D17
Start radiation at foor directioin D4
Start radiation at head direction D4
Pot safety Disconnect PR 260A plug from pot D4
Restore system to normal.
1-47
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
LAMPS and INTERLOCKS R&F 1/1 XPM-172

job card: R&F INDICATOR LAMPS AND INTERLOCKS
subassembly: SPOT-FILM DEVICE date: 11/98
FLUORO CONTROLS
interlocks.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Lamps
Hand tools
Perform job card XPM–170 before doing this job card.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Check for burned out lamps on all the fluoro controls. replace if needed.
Check for burned lamps on the spot–film device controls. Replace if needed.
Make sure that no exposure is permitted when the SFD is moved towards the park position.
Legacy Systems
Verify display operation; verify the display rotates when the table is angulated beyond 45
degrees.
1-48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19 46–019510
LAMPS and INTERLOCKS VASC 1/1 XPM-174

job card: VASC INDICATOR LAMPS AND INTERLOCKS
subassembly: DISPLAYS date: 05/01/95
STATUS CONTROL
STEPPER DISPLAY
FILM CHANGER INTERLOCKS
COLLISION INTERLOCKS
COLLISION AVOIDANCE
interlocks.
PREREQUISITES
Perform job card XPM–170 and XPM–172 before doing this job card.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Check all displays for proper intensity and that all segments are illuminated.
Check all status controls (table and stepper).
Check that the buttons function.
Check that all buttons are illuminated.
Check film changer interlocks
Changer should index at zero and +90 degrees
Exposure should only be possible at 0 and +90 degrees
Verify that the LU–A “U” arm will only rotate past 45 degrees when the table is rotationally
centered.
Verify that no exposure is possible during filmchanger interchange on LU–A.
Verify that LU–A interchange collision sensor works.
Verify that the collision sensors on the bottom of all II’s are functional.
Verify that the collision sensors on the x–ray tube and collimators are working.
Verify that collision avoidance on LC/LP systems are working.
1-49
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
GENERATOR PERFORMANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–300 TUBE PROTECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
XPM–310 ROTOR CONTROLLER/X–RAY TUBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
XPM–320 RADIOGRAPHIC TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
XPM–330 RADIOGRAPHIC KVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
XPM–340 RADIOGRAPHIC MA/MAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
XPM–350 NON–VOLATILE MEMORY DATA AND BATTERY VOLTAGE . . . . . . 3–19
XPM–360 RAD COLLIMATION AND PHOTOTIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22
XPM–362 R&F COLLIMATION AND PHOTOTIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
XPM–364 MANUAL COLLIMATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–30
3–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
3–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
GENERATORS Job Card XPM–300 1 of 2
job card: TUBE PROTECTOR
subassembly: GENERATOR CONTROL date: 11/99
purpose: To check the maximum allowable exposure technics time: 5 min.

against the tube rating charts
NOTE: This job card/task is not required on Advantx Generators.
PREREQUISITES
X–ray tube technic charts available.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Check the maximum and minimum tube technics against the tube ratings chart for each tube
in the system. This is more likely to drift in older non-CPU based systems.
Micro-processor based systems should not change!
Procedure:
Select medium kVp and highest mA station.
Select 10 ms (or as close as possible) and increase kVp until a technic overload is reached
or the generator automatically changes mA or time.
Repeat this for 100 ms, 1 sec and 2 sec.
Repeat this for the small focal spot.
Verify that exposures are not enabled above the curve on the chart for the given mA.
If there is a significant difference between the technic chart and the actual allowable technic
by the generator, then the tube protector will have to be scheduled for adjustment or
have the memory locations checked. If the tube protector is over protecting, consult
with the customer before changing. They may want this setup.
3–1
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: TUBE PROTECTOR Job Card XPM–300 2 of 2
Advantx Generators (Not Required)

CGR
Some CGR generators will need to have the “KW” verified on the generator.
MPH Generator
In accordance with SN 4282 if you have an MX100 XRT, check the values for the MX100
High Speed small spot .6 filament in Job Card RG002. Small focus parameters
should be:
G=37
E=0.687
ALPH=2.46.
Change these if not correct and perform RG003 Heat Current Calibration for the
Small Focus.
GE
GE generators use specific break points to develop the tube protector curves.
MPX Generators
The MPX generator has new revised tube curves per SN 3829. The new values should be
entered into the MPX database by either using the MPX Data Base Tool Rev 2.2 or
higher or by manually loading in the new values. SN 3829 contains the correct values
for all commonly used GE tubes.
For non–GE Systems
For non–GE systems, refer to OEM service documentation as required.
3–2
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
DIRECTION46–019510
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV 19
job card: ROTOR CONTROLLER/X–RAY TUBE
subassembly: ROTOR CONTROLLER/X–RAY TUBE date: 11/98
purpose: Verify proper rotation of x–ray tube and bearing noise time: 5 min.
PREREQUISITES
System is operating properly.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Observe and note the bearing noise during the acceleration and braking periods.
Check (Listen) that the acceleration and braking times are typical for the tubes used. If
needed check timing with a scope.
If any problems are encountered, then schedule the room for troubleshooting, repair or
calibration of the rotor controller.
The noted acceleration and braking times are typical.
Check tube housings for proper ventilation.
Chiller
Check for proper water levels, water leaks and proper chiller operation.
Clean chiller pump strainer. Check for proper ventilation in chiller.
Test the tube sensors, if equipped, using the following CGRGR Chiller:
Chiller test 1:
Turn off power.
Disconnecting the 40 degree C sensor (one of the ”EAU” wires at TS1 of the TIRC).
Restore power.
Shut off the water and the thermometer lamp should flash on the console or an error
will be displayed.
Chiller test 2:
Turn off power.
Disconnect the ”Security” wires on TS1 of the TIRC for the 70 degree C sensor.
Restore power.
The thermometer lamp and the red inhibit lamp at the console should be on or an
error will be displayed.
Remove power and restore the system to normal operation.
3–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: ROTOR CONTROLLER/X–RAY TUBE Job Card XPM–310 2 of 4
VAMP (MPPU) Chiller

Pull XJ212 on the bottom of MPPU2. Simulates the 40 degree C Sensor trip in the XRT.
Chiller should run
Replace XJ212.
Temperature should be at 20 degrees C 1 degree. Push display switch for set point.
MVP, Advantx
These times are software controlled and may vary depending on generator software revs.
MVP Micro
Same as MPX for high speed systems.
MPX
Verify approximate SARC acceleration and brake times for each tube.
RAD MX75/100 Accel. 1.2 sec. Brake 3.5 sec.
MX125 2.9 sec. 6.0 sec.
FL MX75/100 Accel. 2.0 sec. G1 Brake 2.0 sec.
(Also verify 90 sec. rotor delay)
0.8 sec. G2
MX125 Accel. 2.2 sec. Brake 3.5 sec.
SF/PS MX75/100 0.8 sec. (Time delay until exposure in)
CINE MX125 XM/XL 1.5 sec. (H.S. boost)
XS/SFT 2.5 sec.
MX75/100 1.2 sec. (Expo. delay from stopped rotor)
MX125 2.9 sec. (Verify 10 sec. high speed hold)
MSI
The MSI generator can be used with a variety of rotor controllers. Consult with the specific
rotor controller manual for more detail.
RARC–II
TYPICAL ACCELERATION DELAYS
Speed MAX 75R MAX 100 MAX 125
Low .7 sec. .85 sec. 2.2 sec.
High .7 sec. 1.15 sec. 3.0 sec.
MST
The MST generator can be used with a variety of rotor controllers. Consult with the specific
rotor controller manual for more detail.
3–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
RARC–II See MSI

D32 Panel Internal rotor controller module only (low speed only)
Maxiray 100 tubes 1.4 second rotor time delay
Other compatible tubes .75 seconds
If there is a mixture of tubes that include a MAX 100 then all tubes will have a 1.4
sec. delay.
DXS 650 and DXD 350

Maxiray 100 tubes 1.4 second rotor time delay
Other compatible tubes .75 seconds
If there is a mixture of tubes that include a MAX 100 then all tubes will have a 1.4
sec. delay.
MPG, Phasix, MP (all systems with TIRC)

Remove power.
Remove ”auxillaire” wire from TS1 in the TIRC. Green wire to XRT.
Restore power and Prep the rotors.
The console should display an error and exposures should be inhibited.
Remove power and reinstall the ”auxillaire” wire.
Remove the ”principle” wire from TS1 of the TIRC. Black wire to XRT.
Restore power and prep the rotors.
0–3,400 0–10,000 3,400–10,000 10,000–3,400 3,400–0

GE MX–75 0.65 0.67 0.38 0.80 1.10
GE MX–100 0.85 1.15 0.88 1.00 1.30
GE MX–125 2.20 3.00 2.40 2.80 3.00
Machlett
WMO 3” 1.20 1.20 0.80 4.70 N/A
WMO 4” 1.59 1.50 1.00 6.00 N/A
CGR 8–SLOT (50/100)
150G 3.50 3.50 2.40 13.50 N/A
120G 2.10 2.10 1.50 8.50 N/A
90G WMO 1.80 1.80 1.30 7.10 N/A
90G 1.20 1.20 0.90 4.70 N/A
(times in seconds)
3–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
VAMP (MPPU)
0–3,400 0–10,000 3,400–10,000 10,000–3,400 3,400–0
MX150 V2 1.5 3.0 2.4 2.5 2.5
MX150 V3 7.0 8.0 2.0 0.9 4.0
MPH/SCPU Generators
0 to LS 0 to HS LS to HS HS to LS HS to 0 LS to 0
MAX 100 0.8 1.2 .0.8 0.85 6 2
(times in seconds)
Systems with TUG starter
Remove power.
Remove ”auxillaire” wire from Tb2 in the TUG.
Restore power and Prep the rotors.
The console should display an error and exposures should be inhibited..
Remove power and reinstall the ”auxillaire” wire.
Remove the ”principle” wire from Tb2 of the TUG. Black wire to XRT.
Restore power and prep the rotors.
Times can be checked if needed with a scope on output 1 of 80A3 Op25A
0–9000 3000–9000 9000–3000
8 Slot (50/100 ohms)
90 WMO 1.8 1.3 7.1
90G 1.2 0.9 4.7
120G 2.1 1.5 8.3
150G 3.5 2.4 13.5
24 Slot (6/11 ohms)
120G 1.7 1.25 6.8
150G 2.8 2.0 11
Machlett Junior Super (950 & 960)
Dyn50 75mm (23/56 ohms) 1.2 0.8 4.7
Dyn60 102mm (20/50 ohms) 1.5 1.0 6.0
Note: Times are in seconds and are based on the correct line voltage.
Silhouette Generators
Tube charts are in the service manuals.
All Other Systems
Use the appropriate service manual to check for proper operation.
3–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RADIOGRAPHIC TIMER
subassembly: CONTROL date: 11/98
purpose: Check/verify the RAD timer for accuracy time: 5 min.
NOTE: PM frequency for MP/MPPU/SCPU Radiographic timer is 1 year. For all others, the
PM frequency is 6 months unless indicated otherwise in the specific product manual.
RAD time is checked at the 75% point on the kVp waveform.
RAD time can be checked using the Keithley (job card XPM–900), the HV divider (Tab 13) or
an ion chamber or other non–invasive kVp device.
Some generators have other test points that can be used to check the timer.
The timer should be checked while doing the RAD kVp (job card XPM–330) and/or the mA
(job card XPM–340).
Turn off the Phototimer.
TASK DESCRIPTION
All accuracy measurements are based on specific preconditions. If additional information is
needed, refer to the system operator’s manual.
3–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RADIOGRAPHIC TIMER Job Card XPM–320 2 of 4
ADVANTX LFX/SCPU/MP/MPPU (Vamp)

Use rad mode or calibration unit R013 LFX HHS Measurements. For specifications,
refer to direction 46–019357, Section 3–9, in Tab 16 of this manual.
MVP Three Phase
Measure the RAD timer using the kVp output BNC in the power unit if available.
Timer accuracies:
At any kVp:
10 through 25 mA + (1% +6) msec
32 through 100 mA + (1% +3) msec
125 mA & up:
1 to 4 msec. + 5% –0.6 +1 msec
5 to 50 msec . + (2% +1) msec
64 to 320 msec + (1% +1) msec
400 msec to 8 sec. + 0.5%
MVP MICRO
Timer accuracies: 60 Hz 50 Hz
less than 0.160 sec. + 0.005 + 0.005
0.150–0.400 sec. + 0.0083 + 0.01
0.500–1.00 sec. + 0.0167 + 0.02
1.2–6.4 sec. + 2% + 2%
MPX
Timer accuracies:
1.0 msec. to 2.5 msec. + .5 msec.
3.2 msec. to 16 msec + .4 msec.
20.0 msec. to 8 sec. + 2%
Rejection limits:
2 sec. 1.96 to 2.04 3.2 msec. 2.8 to 3.6
.2 sec .196 to .204 2.0 msec. 1.5 to 2.5
8 msec. 7.6 to 8.4 1.2 msec. .7 to 1.7
4 msec. 3.6 to 4.4
MSI
Scope may also be used across 76R18, mAs board on swing out panel.
Select 80 kVp 100S 2 sec. + .04 sec.
80 kVp 300L .1 sec. + .002 sec.
100 kVp 300L .003 sec. + .0003 sec.
MST
Scope may also be used across 76R18, mAs board on swing out panel.
Select 80 kVp 100S 2 sec. + .04 sec.
80 kVp 300L .1 sec. + .002 sec.
100 kVp 300L .003 sec. + .0003 sec.
3–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
MVP MICRO 60 Hz 50 Hz
Select <0.160 sec + 0.005 + 0.005
0.160–0.4 + 0.0083 + 0.01
0.5–1.0 + 0.167 + 0.02
1.25–6.4 + 2% + 2%
DXS 650
Select 80 kVp 200L 1/120 sec. 1 pulse + 0 pulses
80 kVp 200L 1/10 sec. 12 pulses + 1 pulses
80 kVp 50S 2 sec. 2 sec waveform of pulses + .04 sec.
DXD 350
Select 80 kVp 200L 1/120 sec. 1 pulse + 0 pulses
80 kVp 200L 1/10 sec. 12 pulses + 1 pulses
80 kVp 50S 2 sec. 2 sec waveform of pulses + .04 sec.
CGR
Check while doing mA checks with scope.
See job card XPM–330.
TITANOS
0.01 to 1 sec at 100 kVp and 100 mA + 10%
SEPTAR
0.02 + 0.5 ms
0.05 to 0.15 sec. + 0.5 ms
0.20 to 60.0 sec. + 2%
COMPTAR
0.004 to 0.006 sec. (with forced extinction) + 4%
0.008 to 6 sec. (without forced extinction) + 4%
For 10–100 mA add + 0.003 sec.
For 101–300 mA add + 0.002 sec.
For 301–600 mA add + 0.001 sec.
SPG
1/120 to 1/5 sec. Less than 1/120 sec.
1/5 to 1.0 sec. + 1/120 sec.
1.0 to 6.0 sec. + 2%
MPH
+ 5% for selected times
CPG
0.3 ms to 1 sec. + 10% process + 2% + 2 ms
3–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
PHASIX & MPG

Exposure termination occurs on mAs.
Time accuracy is the sum of mA and mAs accuracy.
TRIPLUNIX 5–7–10–MP and ABAQUE 525

Using a 10 ohm, 1W resistor in series with the 15–16 MG bridge in the console and a
scope across the resistor, select 100 mA at 60 KV and test 0.02, 0.1 and 1 second,
Tolerance: + 1%
All other generators refer to the appropriate generator manual.

Turn Phototimer back on when completed.
3–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RADIOGRAPHIC KVP
subassembly: CONTROL POWER UNIT date: 11/98
purpose: To verify proper calibration of the radiographic kVp time: 45 min.

circuits
NOTE: PM frequency for MP/MPPU/SCPU Radiographic kVp is 1 year. For all others, the PM
frequency is 6 months unless indicated otherwise in the specific product manual.
PREREQUISITES
Previous data recorded from installation, tube change or prior PM, if available.
Line compensation set to correct line voltage, if appropriate for the generator.
Tools required: Hand Tools
DVM
Keithley or HV Divider or other non–invasive kVp device
Scope
This unit should be done in conjunction with XPM–320 (Rad Timer) and XPM–340
(Rad mA/mAs).
TASK DESCRIPTION
Verify kVp at selected mA stations, large and small filament at 80 kVp.
To verify the slope, check the highest and lowest mA stations of each filament and
one mA station in between at 60 and 120 kVp. For US systems enter this data on the
data sheets.
For European systems record the data in the log book.
If calibration data is needed by the customer, take readings as required.
Line Frequency Systems with Voltpacs
If previous calibration has been done and you have a record of no–load voltages:
Three Phase Units (LFX, MPX, MSI, MST)
Install DVM on phase one and two of the voltpac (terminal 3).
Single Phase Units
Install DVM on P1E and P2E leads.
Verify that no–load voltages for all recorded kVp’s are still within + 2 VAC.
If the mA/mAs is correct, the no–load voltages recorded from a previous PM and/or
calibration will give the correct kVp if within + 2 VAC.
If no loads are not correct, verify with a Keithley (Job Card XPM–900).
If kVp/voltages are out of tolerance, schedule the room for troubleshooting, repair
and/or calibration.
3–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RADIOGRAPHIC KVP Job Card XPM–330 2 of 4
If there is no previous calibration data available, either:

1. Use the Keithley to verify the kVp is correct.
2. Install the HV divider to check the kVp (Tab 13).
Record no–loads for future reference.
All Other Systems

Use the Keithley to verify all kVp’s. MA/mAs must be verified at the same time.
KVp must meet published specs per the operator/service manual of each generator.
If the kVp is not correct or there is any question or doubt as to the kVp readings, schedule
time in the room for troubleshooting, repair or calibration.
For US systems enter the data in the data sheets.
ADVANTX – LFX Refer to: Calibration Users Guide

Attach DVM to terminal 3 on the voltpac, phase A and B (A3 and B3).
Use Rad Table Top Mode or Cal Unit R013 LFX HHS Measurements.
If using the internal or external bleeder, check bleeder selection switch (S203) on
LFX1A1A4 is down for internal bleeder or up for the external bleeder.
Use the internal bleeder only if the accuracy of calibration has been verified
(SN 3770).
For Advantx LFX accuracy measurements refer to Tab 16, Direction 46–019357,
Section 3–9.
ADDITIONAL LFX KVP TEST POINT: LFX1 A1 A4 J9 BNC (20 kV/volt).
ADVANTX – SCPU/MP/VAMP Refer to: Calibration Users Guide
Use the Keithley to verify all kVp’s.
MPPU kV test point: Transformer – MPPU1 A1 A1 TP7 or XJ4 (1V/8kV)
SCPU kV test point: Transformer – SCPU A4 A1 TP26 (1V/8kV)
MPX
Attach DVM to voltpac MG3A8TB1 A3 and B3.
Accuracy: + (3% +1) kVp
MVP Three Phase
Attach DVM to Terminals #3 on the middle and upper voltpac.
Units without 46–904196 bleeder adapter
External bleeder connected
Use 6J11 on the power unit backplane.
Scope scale will be 1 volt per 20 kVp.
3–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Units with 46–904196 bleeder adapter

Using internal bleeder
JP14 in position internal “INT”
TP24 = 1 volt per 20 kVp
Using external bleeder
JP14 in position “EXT”
TP76 = 1 volt per 20 kVp
Accuracy:
50 to 150 kVp + (3% +2) kVp
24 to 50 kVp + 4 kVp
MPG (All)
Accuracy: 40–59KV: +6/–4 kVp
60–150KV: +/–(3%+3) kVp
MVP MICRO
Accuracy: 50 to 150 kVp + 6%
26 to 48 kVp + 3 kVp
MPH
Accuracy: + 3% + 2 kVp after 10 ms
DXS
DVM to 20TB2–P1E and 20TB2–P2E.
Accuracy: 50–150 kVp + (3% +1) kVp
DXD
DVM to 56TB2–P1E and 56TB2–P2E.
Accuracy: 50–150 kVp + (3% +1) kVp
CGR
Use Keithley non–invasive meter (job card XPM–900) to measure kVp.
TITANOS
Accuracy: 50, 80, 100, 125 and 150 kV + 10%
(between 100 and 800 mA)
SEPTAR
Accuracy: 40 to 125 kVp + 5 kVp
(between 100 and 800 mA)
COMPTAR
Accuracy: 40–60 kVp + 4%
61–125 kVp + 7%
SPG
Accuracy: 61 to 150 kVp + 10%
30 to 60 kVp + 15%
3–13
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
CPG
Accuracy: below 60 kVp + 8%
above 60 kVp + 5%
PHASIX
Accuracy: 40–59 kV +6/–4 kVp
60–150 kV + (3% +3) kVp
PROCESS
Accuracy: 5 to 1250 mA + 5%
(at 65 to 110 kVp for 900 to 1250 mA) + 8%
TRIPLUNIX 5–7–10–MP and ABAQUE 525
Accuracy: + 5%
MASIX
Verify that the premagnetization thyristor operation with a scope from TP2 to ground
on IC–E08 at the following parameters:
Three point mode at 80 kV, 125 mA, 12.5 mAs
80 kV, 320 mA, 32 mAs
No large surge peak should be evident.
Accuracy: + 5%
POWER PAX
Accuracy: + 3% + 2 kVp
SILHOUETTE
Accuracy: See Service/Operator Manual
For non–GE Systems
For non–GE systems, refer to OEM equipment specifications.
3–14
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RADIOGRAPHIC MA/MAS
subassembly: CONTROL date: 11/98
purpose: To verify proper calibrationof the radiographic mA/mAs time: 15 min.

circuits.
NOTE: PM frequency for MP/MPPU/SCPU Radiographic mA/mAs is 1 year. For all others,
the PM frequency is 6 months unless indicated otherwise in the specific product
manual.
PREREQUISITES
The radiographic timer has been verified to be accurate.
The phototimer should be disabled.
Refer to generator type for tools required.
DVM, mAs meter, scope, 10 ohm 1 W resistor
TASK DESCRIPTION
Generator specifications can be found in the operator’s manual.
Perform with XPM 320 (Rad Timer) and XPM 330 (Rad kVp).
For all line frequency systems (i.e. MPX/MSI/MST):
Verify that the mA/mAs is within stated accuracies at each mA station and that the mA/mAs
is within 5% between adjacent mA stations at the same kVp.
Verify all mA stations at 80 kVp and check space charge at 60 and 120 or max kVp for two
or three mA stations on the XS and the XL focal spot.
If more data is required then check and record all mA stations at 60, 80 and 120 (or max)
kVp at that mA station.
NOTES: If mA/mAs is not correct, schedule room for calibration, troubleshooting and/or
repair.
Use an external mAs meter in the M+ or M2 lead for mAs checks. If this is not
available, use standard procedure for determining the accuracy of the internal
mA/mAs meter. Use the procedure called out for in the appropriate service manual.
For systems other than line frequency refer to specific generator manual.
ADVANTX (LFX/SCPU/MPPU/VAMP)
Refer to: Calibration Users Guide
Radiographic Calibration Unit R013 LFX HHS Measurements
Refer to Tab 16 for specifications.
3–15
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RADIOGRAPHIC MA/MAS Job Card XPM–340 2 of 4
MASIX
Insert mas meter in place of the jumper on the HO1 HV board
Select Three point mode, 80 KV, 200 mA, 20 mAs
Verify internal meter reads the same as the external meter
Accuracy: +15%
MPG
Using a coax cable connect a scope to BNC connector on the board at the HV tank.
Select 80 KV, 400 mA, 200 ms, large spot.
Verify that exposures do not change more that + 15% from the start to the end of the
exposure.
Select 80 KV, 125 mA, 200 ms, small spot.
Verify that the exposures do not change more that + 15%.
MPG 60–80–100 mA: +5% +1 mA (+5% for kVp>130)
MPG 50–50E mA: +10%
PHASIX 60–65–80
Remove the W15 jumper
Connect a mAs meter between Tb1 and Tb4 on the 104A103 HV board
Select 66 KV, 400 ms and large Focal
Verify that the ma value with the post–displayed ma value
by pressing the ‘E’ button after an exposure.
Tolerance: + 5%
mA accuracy: + (12% + 0.4 mA)
mAs accuracy: + 4% + 3 mA
MPX
Pull the MG2A9A3 board (disable Quantamat)
Turn on the mAs meter Phase 1–4 MG2A6A37 SW37 Fwd
Phase 5 Address 395A to “01” (enable mAs meter)
“00” (disables mAs meter)
NOTE: Turn mAs meter off when done.
MVP Three Phase
1. Install an external mAs meter in the DC mA circuit at the transformer if meter
is available.
2. MA can be measured directly with a scope.
Ch. 1 to +mA TP9 Card rack backplane of the power unit.
Ch. 2 to –mA TP10
Ground to BNC connector adjacent to TP9 and TP10.
Place scope the in “ADD” mode and invert Channel 2
20 mV = 1 mA.
3–16
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
3. Use a mA meter in series with M+ lead at transformer for lower mA stations

that allow longer exposure times.
Accuracies: 24 to 150 kVp
Below 10 ms
10 mA thru 1250 mA +10 to –25%
Above 10 ms
10 to 100 mA + (3%+0.7) mA
125 mA up + (3%+1) mA
MPH
<40 ms mA + 15% AEC 3 point
mAs + 10% all modes
>40 ms mA + 10% AEC 3 point
mAs + 5% + .1 mAs all modes
POWER PAX
mAs + 5% + .1 mAs 2 and 3 point mode
MVP MICRO
All mA stations: 50 to 150 kVp + 10%
26 to 48 kVp + 20%
TRIPLUNIX 5–7–10–MP AND ABAQUE 525
Accuracy: + 10%
PROCESS GEN.
Install a 10 ohm (1 watt min.) resistor in series with +mA jack in the power cabinet by
the high voltage transformer. Use long banana plug to make proper contact.
Place scope across the resistor and read mA during an exposure 100 mA = 1 V.
Accuracy: 50–150 kV + 5%
COMPTAR III
With scope: Connect scope leads across resistor R211, 5 ohms in the power
cabinet.
With DVM: Install mA meter in series with the +mA lead at the HV transformer.
Accuracy same as Comptar I
COMPTAR I
Install mA meter in series with the +mA lead at the HV transformer.
Accuracies: 35 to 50 kVp +5 to –20% mA
51 to 150 kVp + 10% mA
SEPTAR
With scope: Connect scope leads to TP901 and TP902.
Ground on the 900 relay module.
With mA meter: Install mA meter in series with the +mA lead at the transformer.
Accuracy: 40 to 150 kVp + 20% mA
3–17
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
SPG 515S
Read mA at the console
Install mA meter in series with +mA wire inside the console.
Accuracies: 61 to 150 kVp + 15% mA
30 to 60 kVp + 20% mA
TITANOS
Install a 10 ohm (1 watt min.) resistor in series with the +mA jack on the console.
Use long banana plug to make proper contact.
Place a scope across the resistor and read the mA during an exposure
100 mA = 1 V
Accuracies: 100 mA thru 800 mA at 50 kV and 0.1 sec. + 10%
10 mA to 100 mA + 20%
CPG
Accuracies: 50–2000 mA + 10%
Up to 500 mAs + 20%
All other generators refer to the appropriate generator manual.
3–18
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: NON–VOLATILE MEMORY DATA AND BATTERY VOLTAGE
subassembly: GENERATOR CONTROL date: 11/98
purpose: Verify memory data tables and memory battery voltage time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
DVM
TASK DESCRIPTION
Verify that the memory data tables have been completed and up to date. Check a few mA
stations on each tube.
If data tables are not up to date, then schedule time, if needed, to come back into the
room to record the data. Check the non–volatile memory battery voltage.
ADVANTX
Put the DVM on SKL1A10 ASC–BIU board TP2 to TP5.
Generator off.
Lithium battery voltage should be between 2.8 to 3.5 volts DC.
If the voltage is 2.8 VDC or less, replacement is recommended.
MPPU and VAMP have a battery (B1) on the CPU board.
Make sure there is a current database backup.
MPX Phase 1 to 4
Put DVM on memory boards TP4 to TP5.
Generator off.
The ni–cad batteries should be between 2.0 and 4.1 VDC.
If the battery is 2.5 VDC or less, replacement is recommended.
Memory loss will occur below 2.0 VDC.
To replace a 1k memory board with a 4k memory board, see SN 3629A.
Phase 5
Put the DVM on MG2A6A44 memory board TP8 to TP9.
Generator off.
Lithium battery voltage should be between 2.8 and 3.5 VDC.
If the voltage is 2.8 VDC or less, replacement is recommended.
Turn generator on. DVM should read 5.0 VDC + .05 V. If not see SN 3629A
for adjustment.
Check for signs of corrosion or leakage. Clean or replace as necessary.
Use MPX Database Tool to back up and save the database, Kit #2159747.
L300/L500
Check the battery on the Cine/VTR Interface Board. In MX1A18 IRD the batteries
“BT5” should be 3.6 VDC to 4.5 VDC. If not, replace it.
3–19
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: NON–VOLATILE MEMORY DATA

AND BATTERY VOLTAGE Job Card XPM–350 2 of 3
PHASIX
Check the battery in the console
Remove the CMOS–RAM board (43A5)
The voltage should read below 3.0 VDC after 30 sec with a 500 ohm load connected.
Battery replacement is recommended every 3 years.
Replacement part # 853291P015
MASIX
Check the battery on the battery terminals of the E12 circuit.
The voltage should not be less than 2.7 V.
Battery replacement is suggested every 3 years.
Replacement Part # Y0635000
MPG
Check the battery on the MPG1A5A6 cpu board and the MG4A1 program X CPU
board.
The voltage should be 3.6 V. If the voltage is <2.7 V, replace the batteries.
Battery replacement is suggested every 3 years.
The CPU power should be +5 V + 50 mV between B52–1 and ground. The LEDs
(MPG1A5A0 and MPG2A4A0) should be on.
Replacement part # 99171019
MVP MICRO
The non–volatile RAM U–458 on the MS1A1A1 motherboard in the console has an
internal battery.
Back–up the data on the U–460 (new chip) before replacing.
Replacement every 10 years.
Part # 46–953842P33
DX/DX Hiline/DLX
If the battery on the VME147 board is low, during system power up the message
battery low and/or non–volatile RAM access error will appear. If the battery fails the
system will not boot.
The battery is internal in the NVRAM chip, so it cannot be checked with a meter. The
life expectancy is 3 years.
The battery kit is pt# 36003840. The T3 cost of the board is about 300 times the cost
of the battery kit.
Angix M200–4
Batteries must be replaced every 4 years.
On CPU board (w/o PROMS) C0808430 use part #91608835 voltage should be 3.0 V
On CPU board (w/o PROMS) 45438734 use part #99171019 voltage should be 3.6 V
(in GEMSAM add ‘CG’ before part numbers)
3–20
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: NON–VOLATILE MEMORY DATA

AND BATTERY VOLTAGE Job Card XPM–350 3 of 3
Senix HF 500/600
Batteries must be replaced every 4 years
On CPU board (w/o PROMS) C0808430 use part #91608835 voltage should be 3.0 V
On CPU board (w/o PROMS) 45438734 use part #99171019 voltage should be 3.6 V
(in GEMSAM add ‘CG’ before part numbers)
Senographe 700T/800T/DMR
Batteries must be replaced every 4 years. Use part #99171019.
VMX and VMX+
Battery must be replaced every 2 years.
For non–GE systems
For non–GE systems, refer to OEM service documentation.
3–21
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
COLLIMATION & PHOTOTIMING Job Card XPM–360 1 of 3
job card: RAD COLLIMATION AND PHOTOTIMING
subassembly: COLLIMATORS, PHOTOTIMERS, ION CHAMBERS date: 11/99
purpose: Verify proper collimator alignment and proper time: 20 min.

phototimer operation and density.
NOTE: Phototiming checks are now optional. They should be done only if the customer is
complaining of density problems, the site requires data, or you need to get
benchmark data.
PREREQUISITES
Tool required: Cu and Al from CV phantom or equivalent
Densitometer
RAT kit optional
Light meter
TASK DESCRIPTION
Light Field Check
Darken the room lights.
Turn on collimator light.
The light field pattern should be of uniform brightness (no shadows or blotches)
Light output must be minimum of 16 ft–candles @100 cm SID or the voltage above
21 VAC at the bulb.
If not, schedule time for repair.
Blade Response
Check blade response (collimator in auto mode, table horizontal, 40I or normal SID).
Remove and re-insert the cassette tray several times while observing blade motion.
(Energize the field light and watch the light pattern).
During the repositioning of the blades, there should be no more than three
oscillations of either blade set after coming to a new rest position.
There should be no evidence of binding, chattering or excessive oscillation during
blade travel.
If so, schedule time for repair.
Collimator Blade SID Tracking
While observing the light field pattern on the table top, move the tube unit and
collimator vertically from the initial 40I SID to the maximum SID available
and then back to the 40I SID.
As the SID is varied, the field size should remain approximately the same size.
(Blades should open as SID decreases and close as SID increases.)
If not, schedule time for repair.
3–22
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RAD COLLIMATION AND PHOTOTIMING Job Card XPM–360 2 of 3
36I SID Crossover Point

With a cassette installed in the cassette tray, lower the tube and collimator and
verify that the tube goes into non–auto mode below 36I (91 cm), and
returns to auto mode around 35.5I (90 cm) as the tube is raised.
Fan and Select Light
Check that the select light is lit and the fan is rotating.
Do the following phototiming density checks and collimator checks only if necessary
or called for.
Ask the customer if there are any issues with the densities of each receptor or the
collimation to each receptor.
You should take a reference film at each receptor (ion chamber) for density. This will
be useful for troubleshooting and/or component replacement.
CAUTION: The following procedures require the production of x–rays. Observe

radiation safety rules. A lead protective screen, lead apron or other protective medium
should be used to avoid unnecessary exposure.
PHOTOTIMING (Optional)
Backup Safety Timer
Close the collimator blades
Place a lead apron in the x–ray field
Select 80 kVp, 100 mA, .1 sec.
Position the tube at normal SID
Take an exposure and make sure that the safety backup tone sounds and that the
lamp is lit if one exists on the generator.
Ion Chamber Balance (skip if you have a photo tube)
Place a 14 x 17I (35 x 43 cm) film cassette in the cassette tray.
Place Cu and Al in the x–ray beam.
Select 80 kVp, 100 mA and a .5 sec. backup time on the generator.
Take an exposure using each ion chamber.
Repeat for each ion chamber and receptor in the room.
MAs or time should be approximately the same (+ 5%) for each ion chamber.
Beam Alignment, Field Size Test and Density Check
Place a 14 x 17I (35 x 43 cm) cassette in the receptor.
Manually collimate down to a 12 x 12I (30 x 30 cm) field using the collimator
pointers.
Place the RAT pattern on top of the Cu and Al.
Turn on the light field and record the light field as shown on the RAT pattern.
If a RAT pattern is not available, then you can place Allen wrenches around
the light field on top of the Cu and Al.
Select 80 kVp, 100 mA and normal backup time on the generator.
Set phototimer to customer’s normal setting and take an exposure.
3–23
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RAD COLLIMATION AND PHOTOTIMING Job Card XPM–360 3 of 3
Develop and Check the Film

Check film for normal customer density and record.
Check light to x–ray field.
Check center–to–center.
Measure the size on film (12 x 12I).
Measurement error should be no more than .05I (1 cm) for light to x-ray,
center-to-center and film size. This is an error of 1.25% at 40I (100 cm) SID
and 1.14% at 44I (110 cm) SID. A greater error may be acceptable to GE
and HHS but not to the customer. The room should be scheduled for
recalibration if needed.
Check Two Other Film Sizes (Use cassettes that are commonly used by the customer)
Observe the pointers on the collimator, after the film has been inserted in the
receptor. They should read the film size correctly.
If the collimator rotates, rotate it by 45 degrees, take an exposure, and measure the
size directly off the film.
NOTE: If the collimator on your system cannot be rotated 45 degrees, then place a
film on the table top, rotated 45 degrees.
Calculate the percent SID error using the following formula:
A film size A = measured size on the table top film
— – x 100 = error % SID X = focal spot to table top film distance
X SID film size = film size in bucky (9.5I)
SID = focal spot to bucky film distance
Verify the photo timer density can change

Take exposures at normal and a plus and minus density setting.
Make sure that the time or mAs is greater at the plus density and less at the minus
density.
Verify the minimum exposure
Select 80 kVp, 300L or 320L and .1 sec.
Align detector and x–ray beam and place tube at minimum SID.
Remove everything in x–ray path.
Exposure should be less than 5 mAs or 16 ms on each detector.
Repeat this procedure for each receptor in the system
3–24
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: R&F COLLIMATION AND PHOTOTIMING
subassembly: GENERATOR, SPOT–FILM DEVICE date: 11/99
purpose: Verify proper collimator alignment and proper time: 20 min.

phototimer operation and density
NOTE: Phototiming checks are now optional. They should be done only if the customer is
complaining of density problems, the site requires data, or you need to get
benchmark data.
PREREQUISITES
Tool required: Cu and Al from CV phantom or equivalent Cu and Al
Densitometer
Paper cassette
RAT kit or fluoro screen
TASK DESCRIPTION
Blade Response
Check blade response making fluoro radiation.
There should be no evidence of binding or chattering during blade travel.
There should be no evidence of oscillations when coming to a new rest
position.
Collimator Blade Tracking
In fluoro, observe the collimator blades while moving the tower up and down.
The blades should track as the SID is varied.
Fan
Check that the fan is rotating.
The following density and collimation checks may not be necessary. Do only if needed.
Check with the customer to see if there are any issues with density or collimation.
Check to see if exposures are routinely taken at a plus or minus density setting.
PHOTOTIMING (Optional)
Backup Safety Timer
Close the collimator blades
Place a lead apron in the x–ray field.
Select 80 kVp, 100 mA, .1 sec.
Take a spot–film exposure and make sure that the safety backup tone sounds and
that the lamp is lit if one exists on the generator.
For non–GE Product, refer to OEM specific documentation.
For MPG and Phasix systems
Close the collimator blades and place a lead apron in the beam
3–25
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: R&F COLLIMATION AND PHOTOTIMING Job Card XPM–362 2 of 5
Check the 1–point mode on large spot and 60 KV.

The exposure must be limited to 600 mAs
Check the 3–point mode at 60 KV,10 mA and 2000 ms.
The exposure must be limited to time displayed (i.e..2000 mAs)
Remove the lead apron and open the collimator.
Ion Chamber Balance (only for 8835 or 8535 SFD)
Place a 14 x 14I film cassette in the cassette tray. Select 1:1 film format.
Expose film. Note the mAs/time
Select a 2 on 1 on a 14 x 14I film cassette.
Expose film. Note the mAs/time
MAs or time should be approximately the same (5%) for each film.
If the change is greater schedule time for repair. The problem could be area comp
or ion chamber cell balance.
CAUTION: Any change will change the overall density. Make sure you have a density
benchmark so you can reset the overall densities back to normal after
repairs/adjustments.
Reproducibility
Place 2mm of copper in the field.
Select 7 kVp, 100 mA & 200 mAs.
Take 4 exposures and the mas should be with in + 15% for each exposure.
UNDERTABLE TUBE SYSTEMS:

SFD Center to Center
Select 80 kVp, 100 mA.
Select manual collimation.
Set the table top to SFD film plane distance to 11 inches.
(GE R&F tables have a focal spot to table top distance of approximately
19I [48 cm], resulting in a 30I [76 cm] total SID).
Collimate down to a medium sized square area.
Center Cu and Al from the CV phantom (or equivalent CU and Al) in the beam.
Select a 1 on 1 film format.
Expose and process a 9.5 x 9.5I (24 x 24 cm) cassette film
Find the center of the film and the center of the exposed area.
Measure the error between the centermarks.
This error must be less than 0.5I (1 cm) (0.5I represents a 1.7% SID error at
30I [76 cm] SID with compensation for minification).
A greater error than .5I (1 cm) may be acceptable to GE and HHS but not to the
customer.
The room should be scheduled for recalibration of the SFD/collimator, if needed.
3–26
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
SFD Sizing and Film Density

Select 80 kVp, 100 mA.
Center Cu and Al from the CV phantom in the beam (or equivalent Cu and Al).
Use customer normal density setting.
Maintain the 30I (76 cm) SID.
Tape a 10 x 12I (25 x 30 cm) paper cassette (part #E0252AD) under the spot–film
device, centered within the exposure area, rotated approximately 45_.
Select a 1 on 1 film format.
Using a 9.5 x 9.5I (24 x 24 cm) cassette, expose and process a film.
Measure the exposed area directly on the 10 x 12I (25 x 30 cm) film.
The exposed area must be between 8.6I (22 cm) and 9.1I (23 cm) (this is
+ 2.5% SID error with compensation for minification).
A greater error than .5I (1 cm) may be acceptable to GE and HHS but not to the
customer.
The room should be scheduled for recalibration of the SFD/collimator, if needed.
If any doubt exists on the centering or sizing, verify by using the HHS procedures in
Direction 46–013894, System Field Test for HHS (or local equivalent regulations).
For US systems, verify that the film density on the 9.5” x 9.5” (24 x 24 cm) film is
correct and record in the data sheets.
REMOTE SYSTEMS:
Beam Alignment, Field Size Test and Density Check
Place a 14 x 14I (35 x 35 cm) cassette in the receptor.
Manually collimate down to a 12 x 12I (30 x 30 cm) inch field using the collimator
pointers.
Place the RAT pattern on top of the Cu and Al.
Turn on the light field and record the light field as shown on the RAT pattern or
fluoro screen.
If a RAT pattern is not available, then you can place Allen wrenches around the light
field on top of the Cu and Al.
Select 80 kVp, 100 mA and normal backup time on the generator.
Set phototimer to customer’s normal density setting and take an exposure.
Develop and Check the Film
Check film for normal customer density and record in data sheets.
Check light to x–ray field.
Check center–to–center.
Measure the size on film (12” x 12”)or (30 x 30cm).
Measurement error should be no more than 0.75”(2cm) for light to x–ray,
center–to–center and film size. This is an error of 1.7% at 43I (110 cm) SID.
A greater error may be acceptable to GE and HHS but not to the customer.
The room should be scheduled for recalibration of the collimator, if needed.
3–27
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Ion Chamber Balance (skip if you have a photo tube)

Place a 14 x 17I (35 x 43 cm) film cassette in the cassette tray.
Take an exposure using each ion chamber.
MAs or time should be approximately the same (+ 5%) for each ion chamber.
Repeat for each ion chamber and receptor in the room.
Spot–Film Sizing
Center system movements.
Load a 9.5 x 9.5I (24 x 24 cm) cassette in the bucky and select a 1 on 1 format.
Center Cu and Al from a CV phantom in the x–ray beam.
Position a 10 x 12I (25 x 30 cm) paper cassette on top of the Cu and Al rotated
45 degrees so that all edges of the light field are visible on the film.
Expose and process the films.
Measure the field size directly on the 10 x 12I (25 x 30 cm) film. The size must fall
between 8.75I (22 cm) and 9.1I (23 cm). (Since the SID is 43.3I [110 cm]
and the film plane to table top distance is 2.75I [7 cm], this represents a
+ 2% SID error with compensation for minification.)
If you want to calculate the actual error, use the following formula:
A film size A = measured size on the table top film
— – x 100 = error % SID X = focal spot to table top film distance
X SID film size = film size in bucky 9.5I (24 cm)
SID = focal spot to bucky film distance
This error may be within FDA and GE tolerances, but objectionable to the customer.
Time may need to be scheduled for recalibration of the collimator.
Verify other film sizes and formats using the collimator light.
Insert a 14 x 17I (36 x 43 cm) film in the cassette tray as to divide the 17I (43 cm)
direction with a 2 on 1 format.
Expose the film then turn the cassette 90 degrees.
Expose the film with a 3 on 1 format.
Expose a second film with a 4 on 1 format.
Process the films and verify the blocks are equal size and the boarders are
approximately 3 mm.
3–28
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
For All Systems Verify the Phototimer Density Can Change

Select 4 on 1 film format.
Take exposures at normal, a plus,and minus density setting
Make sure that the time or mAs is greater at the plus density setting and less at the
minus density setting.
Process the film and observe the borders between the exposed areas are
acceptable to the customer.
Return the density wheel back to customer’s normal setting.
Verify the Minimum Exposure
Select 80 kVp, 300L and .1 sec.
Place SFD at minimum SID.
Remove everything in x–ray path.
Exposure should be less than 5 mAs on each detector.
3–29
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: MANUAL COLLIMATORS
subassembly: MANUAL COLLIMATORS date: 11/98
purpose: Verify manual collimator alignment time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
14 x 14I or 14 x 17I cassette
Light field edge markers
Rat kit optional
CAUTION: The following procedure requires the production of X–rays. Observe
radiation safety rules. A lead protective screen, lead apron, or other protective
medium should be used to avoid unnecessary exposure.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Position a 14 x 14I (35 x 35 cm) cassette on table top or floor.
Adjust SID of X–ray tube over the cassette to 40I.
Dim room lights to enable easy visibility of X–ray field light.
Manually collimate to a 12 x 12I (30 x 30 cm) field using the collimator pointers.
Verify the field is 12 x 12I (30 x 30 cm) on the cassette.
Mark the edges of the light field with Allen wrenches so that the 90_ end of the Allen
wrenches are pointing into the light field (or place RAT pattern on cassette).
Take an exposure using the following factors:
60 kVp
100 mA
2 mAs
Process the film.
If needed, change mAs and take a new film if edges are not easily visible.
The measured error for size 12 x 12I (30 x 30 cm) and X–ray to light field must be less than
0.5I (1 cm).
If the error is greater, schedule time for service.
If in doubt, refer to the appropriate test procedure in Direction 46–013894, System Field Test
for HHS, (or OEM service documentation).
3–30
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
GENERATOR PERFORMANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–400 FLUORO TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
XPM–410 FLUORO KVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
XPM–420 FLUORO ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE (TABLE TOP DOSE) . . . . 4–4
XPM–440 INPUT DOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
XPM–460 CINE MAXIMUM PULSE WIDTHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
XPM–470 CINE KVP AND MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
XPM–490 ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE CURRENT AND GROUND RESISTANCE . . . . . . 4–19
4–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
4–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FLUORO TIMER
subassembly: GENERATOR, IMAGE SYSTEM date: 11/98
purpose: To verify the fluoro timer is functional. time: 2 min.
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Allow the five minute fluoro timer to run out while fluoroing during other testing.
The system should do two things:
1. An audible alarm should sound somewhere near the end of five minutes.
2. Fluoro exposures should be inhibited at the end of the five minutes.
The timer should be able to be reset back to five minutes.
NOTE: Some newer systems may have a 10 minute timer.
4–1
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FLUORO KVP
purpose: To check and verify that the fluoro kVp is within time: 10 min.
stated accuracies
PREREQUISITES
DVM
Keithley kVp meter or equivalent
Coax cable
Scope
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
If previous calibration has been done and you have a record of no–load voltages:
Three Phase Units
Install DVM on phase one and two of the volt–pac (terminal 3).
Single Phase Units
Install DVM on P1E and P2E leads.
Install the Keithley (job card XPM–900) to verify kVp/no–load volts.
Raise mA until kVp values stabilize on Keithley before measuring values.
Keithley needs 3 to 4 mA for a valid reading.
Verify that no–load voltages for all recorded kVp’s are still within + 2 VAC.
Permitted Tube Current Settings (less than + 1 kV effect)

Single-phase Single-phase Three-phase
half-wave full-wave
Minimum Tube Current (12I 1 mA 2 mA 4 mA
Source–to–Table)
Maximum Tube Current (22I 750 mA 1500 mA 3000 mA
Source–to–Table)
Factory calibration performed at 200 mA, .3 mm Al inherent filtration, 22 inches source–to–
table. Six point calibration check
4–2
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FLUORO KVP Job Card XPM–410 2 of 2
Enter data on the data form.

Systems with no Volt–pac or where no previous kVp no–load readings are available:
1. Use the Keithley to verify the fluoro kVp is correct.
2. Install the HV divider to check the kVp. Record no–loads for future reference.
If there is any question or doubt as to the kVp readings then schedule time in the room for
troubleshooting, repair or calibration.
NON-PULSED KVP WAVEFORM
4–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FLUORO ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE (TABLE TOP DOSE)
purpose: To verify that the maximum patient entrance

radiation is not greater than the maximum amount time: 30 min.
permitted by federal regulations.
PREREQUISITES
Tool Required: Hand tools
Radiation meter (i.e., MDH 2025 meter use 3 cc probe or equivalent)
DVM
Port blocker and attenuator blocks from RAT kit
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
NOTE: If max fluoro mA and “R”–level data (OBTAINED WITHIN THE LAST 9 MONTHS) is
available for comparison then skip to step #3d of this procedure, eliminating the use of the
radiation meter and using the recorded console mA reading.
1. R&F Systems
Position the “R” meter probe on the table top with the axis of the probe perpendicular
to anode–cathode axis of the x–ray tube.
Lower the SFD to minimum SID. See following illustration.
SPOT-FILM DEVICE
IMAGE SYSTEM
LEAD PORT BLOCKER, 7.12” X 7.12”
(18 cm X 18 cm)
USEFUL BEAM
ATTENUATION
BLOCK
ASSEMBLY 12” (30 cm)
PROBE
4”
(10 cm) TABLE TOP
DIAGNOSTIC
SOURCE
ASSEMBLY
4–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FLUORO ENTRANCE EXPOSURE RATE

(TABLE TOP DOSE) Job Card XPM–420 2 of 4
For overtable tubes: Place the “R” meter on a stand 12I above the table.
See following illustration.
SET AS
CLOSE
AS
POSSIBLE
12I
(30 cm) PROBE
LEAD PORT
BLOCKER
7.12I X 7.12I
(18 cm X 18 cm)
TAPE IN PLACE
4I
(10 cm)
LATERAL
INTENSIFIER
DIAGNOSTIC
SOURCE
FOOTREST ASSEMBLY
ATTENUATION
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
4–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV

2. Vascular Systems
Mount the radiation probe stand to the bottom of the II tube with the probe 30 cm
(12I) from the bottom surface of the fluoroscopic imaging assembly.
Set the system to minimum SID (for LU–A move both the x–ray tube and II to
minimum SID).
Align the axis of the radiation probe perpendicular to the anode–cathode axis of the
x–ray tube. See following illustration.
30 CM
RADIATION
PROBE
4–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV

3. For all systems

a. Center the probe in the center of the primary x–ray beam if measuring “R”
output. See steps 1 and 2 for probe placement.
b. Put the II in the Normal FOV.
c. Open the collimators to maximum.
d. Protect the imaging system from overload due to high radiation used in this test
by either:
D Covering the II input with at least 1/8I of lead which can be taped to the
bottom of the SFD or II input.
D Turning off the II power supply.
4. Measure the exposure rate as follows:

NOTE: If the kVp goes into the override condition during this procedure, then the kVp
override circuit will have to be disabled or select manual. Be sure to re-enable the
override circuits after finishing this job card.
Manual Mode
Set manual mA to maximum.
Make a fluoro exposure.
For each kVp (at minimum and maximum kVp) record the following:
Maximum exposure rate (if “R” meter is being used)
Maximum fluoro mA displayed at the console.
Specification: Maximum exposure rate is 9.5 R/min.
5. Vascular Systems
Move x–ray tube to the maximum SID and II to 30 cm above isocenter.
Repeat previous measurements of exposure and maximum mA.
Record under the columns “Max SID Max mA” and “Max SID Exp Rate.”
NOTE: Use actual isocenter, not table top at 0.
6. Data Check
If “R” meter was not used, verify that the Max mA data is within 10% of previous data
taken.
If there are any doubts about the data taken or the previous calibration data,
schedule the room for troubleshooting, repair or calibration.
7. For non–GE systems, refer to OEM service documentation.
4–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
I.I. ENTRANCE DOSE (50/60 Hz) Job Card XPM–440 1 of 6
job card: INPUT DOSE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR DOSE CALCULATOR
subassembly: IMAGE INTENSIFIER date: 10/99
purpose: Verification of Dose time: 20 min.
PREREQUISITES
NOTE: This procedure does not measure DRS Pediatric.
Tools Required: Radiation Meter (i.e., MDH 2025 meter with 180 cc probe)
Phantom (1/4 inch aluminum, 1/32 inch copper and 2–1/4 inches of acrylic
or 2 mm copper set, ref. 45438065)
NOTE: For non–GE systems, refer to OEM specific service documentation.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Establish the following operating conditions:
Grid installed — EXCEPT LU–C, R&F, LEGACY
Position image intensifier as follows:
D R&F systems to maximum SID
D Vascular/Cardiac systems to 100 cm SID and table top 30 cm below the
image intensifier
Place Flat Field phantom (2–1/4 inches of acrylic,1/4 inch aluminum, and 1/32 inch
copper) on the table top (acrylic on the bottom and copper on the top) or
2 mm copper.
Center radiation probe (do not hand–hold probe directly, use insulating holder)
against the bottom of the image intensifier surface (i.e. collision sensor, grid
holder, or bottom of spot film device).
FLUORO PROCEDURE
At the operator console select:
D 80 kVp
D Conventional Fluoro
D Dose 2 (Medium Detail)
D Normal (LFOV) Field of View
Measure the Conventional Fluoro dose and record the “Measured Dose” results on
Data Sheet located in Chapter 12 of this manual.
In addition:
Systems that have Progressive Fluoro (DX or Pulscan), select Digital Fluoro at
console; measure and record on Data Sheet in Chapter 12 of this manual.
4–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: INPUT DOSE STANDARD OPERATING

PROCEDURE FOR DOSE CALCULATOR
VASCULAR, DIGITAL RECORD or PHOTOSPOT ENTRANCE DOSE PROCEDURE

With “Establish Operating Conditions” completed, select the following parameters at
console:
D 80 kVp
D mA which produces an exposure 20 – 60 msec (Start with 50 mA).
D 9 inch field of view
D Dose
– “D” for Vascular system
– Dose “Medium” for Digital Record systems with and without
subtraction
D Program an acquisition rate of 1.0 or 1.1 images per second
for 10 exposures.
Measure the accumulation of ten consecutive exposures, divide the results by ten.
Record the ”Measured Dose” results on the Data Sheet used in Fluoro Procedure.
CARDIAC, CINE AND DYNAMIC ENTRANCE DOSE PROCEDURE

With “Establish Operating Conditions” completed, select the following parameters at
console:
D 80 kVp
D Small focal spot (.6)
D 9 inch field of view
D Dose C or Cine, if applicable
D 30 frames per second
Perform a Cine/Dynamic acquisition and measure the exposure.
Record the “Measured Dose” results on the Data Sheet used in Fluoro Procedure.
NOTE: Ensure the exposure is at least 1.5 msec. Increase SID and maintain 30 cm to
table top, if necessary.
Compare the result with the recommended values in the table of the system.
If the Measured Dose is not within the Min/Max of + 15%, a dose calibration is
recommended.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
INDEX OF TABLES
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Positioner Type
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table Number Positioner Type Table Number
LC/LP/CFM
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ TABLE 1 LU/A TABLE 7
LU/C TABLE 2 AFM TABLE 8
LC+
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ TABLE 3 Legacy D (Digital) TABLE 9
LCV+ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ TABLE 4 Legacy ISFD TABLE 10
LCA, Tilt– C TABLE 5 R&F –9”II TABLE 11
LCV TABLE 6 R&F –12” II TABLE 12
4–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: INPUT DOSE Job Card XPM–440 3 of 6
TABLE 1
LC/LP/CFM
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
FOR REFERENCE: CONVERSION FACTOR IS 0.55
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ + 15% Range
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Suggested System
Mode II Entrance Dose Dose Measurement Min Max
Conventional Fluoro * 0.216 R/h 0.393 R/h 0.334 R/h 0.451 R/h
Pulsed Progressive Fluoro ** 0.216 R/h 0.393 R/h 0.334 R/h 0.451 R/h
Vascular Dose D 1000 uR/exp 1818 uR/exp 1550 uR/exp 2090 uR/exp
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Cardiac Cine or Dig. Dose C
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr) 2.55 R/h 2.17 R/h 2.93 R/h
Dig. Cardiac film-less Dose C 0.86 R/h (8 ur/fr) 1.56 R/h 1.33 R/h 1.79 R/h
TABLE 2
LU–C
FOR REFERENCE: CONVERSION FACTOR IS 0.72 Grid Removed
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Suggested System + 15% Range
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Mode
II Entrance Dose Dose Measurement Min Max
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Conventional Fluoro *
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 0.216 R/h 0.300 R/h 0.255 R/h 0.345 R/h
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 0.216 R/h 0.300 R/h 0.255 R/h 0.345 R/h

Pulsed Progressive Fluoro **
Vascular Dose D uR/exp 1000 uR/exp 1389 uR/exp 1180 uR/exp 1600 uR/exp
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr) 1.94 R/h 1.65 R/h 2.23 R/h
Dig. Cardiac film–less Dose C
TABLE 3
0.86 R/h (8 ur/fr) 1.19 R/h 1.01R/h 1.37 R/h
LC+
Mode
ÁÁÁÁÁ 0.216 R/h 0.432 R/h 0.367 R/h 0.497 R/h
Vascular Dose D
1000 uR/exp 2000 uR/exp 1700 uR/exp 2300 uR/exp
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr) 2.80 R/h 2.38 R/h 3.22 R/h
Dig. Cardiac film–less Dose C 0.86 R/h (8 ur/fr) 1.72 R/h 1.5 R/h 1.98 R/h
* Conventional Fluoro is used in Conventional, IDF and DR/DRE/DRS Image hold mode.
** Pulsed Progressive Fluoro is used in Pulscan, Camtronics and DX–DLX mode.
4–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
TABLE 4
LCV+
Suggested System
DRS Photospot
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ100 uR/exp 182 uR/exp 155 uR/exp 209 uR/exp
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr) 2.80 R/h 2.38 R/h 3.22 R/h
0.86 R/h (8 ur/fr)
Dig. Cardiac film–less Dose C 1.72 R/h 1.5 R/h 1.98 R/h
TABLE 5
LCA, TILT– C
Mode
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
.162 R/h .324 R/h .275 R/h .373 R/h
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pulsed Progressive Fluoro ** .162 R/h .324 R/h .275 R/h .373 R/h
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr)
Dig. Cardiac film–less Dose C 0.86 R/h (8 ur/fr)
2.80 R/h
1.72 R/h
2.38 R/h
1.5 R/h
3.22 R/h
1.98 R/h
TABLE 6
LCV
Mode
Vascular Dose D
1000 uR/exp 1695 uR/exp 1441 uR/exp 1949 uR/exp
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr) 2.37 R/h 2.01 R/h 2.73 R/h
4–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
TABLE 7
LU/A
Suggested System
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr) 3.26 R/h 2.77 R/h 3.75 R/h
TABLE 8
AFM
Mode
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 0.162 R/h 0.405 R/h 0.344 R/h 0.465 R/h

DRS Photospot
ÁÁÁÁÁ 100 uR/exp 182 uR/exp 155 uR/exp 209 uR/exp
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.40 R/h (13 ur/fr)
Dig. Cardiac film–less Dose C 0.86 R/h (8 ur/fr)
3.50 R/h
2.15 R/h
2.98 R/h
1.83 R/h
4.03 R/h
2.47 R/h
TABLE 9
R&F 16” LEGACY D (DIGITAL ONLY)
FOR REFERENCE: CONVERSION FACTOR IS 0.70 GRID OUT OF FOV
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Mode
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
DRS Photospot
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ 100 uR/exp 143 uR/exp 122 uR/exp 164 uR/exp
DRS Dynamic
4–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
TABLE 10
R&F 16” LEGACY ISFD
Suggested System + 15% Range
DRS Photospot 100 uR/exp 153 uR/exp 130 uR/exp 176 uR/exp
DRS Dynamic
ÁÁÁÁÁ
TABLE 11
R&F 9”II
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁSuggested System + 15% Range
Mode
0.216 R/h 0.360 R/h 0.306 R/h 0.414 R/h
DRS Dynamic
TABLE 12
R&F 12” II
Suggested System + 15% Range
Mode
0.144 R/h 0.189 R/h 0.161 R/h 0.217 R/h
DRS Dynamic
ÁÁÁÁÁ
NOTE 1: For non–GE systems, refer to OEM specific service documentation.
NOTE 2: For Prestige VH/II and VH/AD systems, refer to CDROM 2249768–200.
4–13
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE MAXIMUM PULSE WIDTHS
subassembly: GENERATOR, IMAGE SYSTEM date: 05/01/95
purpose: To verify the maximum pulse width of the system time: 10 min.
at each frame rate
PREREQUISITES
Tool Required: Hand tools
Scope
Keithley/HV divider (optional)
Ion chamber (optional)
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
NOTE: The maximum pulse width for each frame rate is 40% of the frame rate in use or 10
msec, whichever is less.
Verify that the displayed pulse widths and the actual pulse widths are the same.
Verify that each frame rate is capable of its maximum.
CGR:
Verify the pulse width for each of eight console selections is the same as indicated.
Pulse width can be verified by using the Keithley, the HV divider, or ion chamber in
the x–ray field or by looking at a kVp or mA reference point with a scope in
your particular generator.
See the following illustration on where to measure pulse width.
4–14
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE MAXIMUM PULSE WIDTHS Job Card XPM–460 2 of 2
ADVANTX
Use Calibration Unit X220 Manual Cine/Fluoro Tool.
Frame rate can be selected and the pulse width MAX and ACTUAL can be
displayed.
P.W. can also be seen on kVp waveform
J9 kVp Out on LFX1A1A4 scope test point.
In the cal unit select each frame rate and verify P.W.’s.
Verify P.W.’s in the application mode that are displayed on the screen
90 frames/sec. 4.44 ms
MPX/L500
Pulse widths are the same as Advantx
Verify P.W.’s on console are correct.
During cine verify that Max P.W. for each frame rate is correct.
MSI/FL300
Phase 5
During cine verify that Max P.W. for each frame rate is correct
150 frames/sec 2.8 ms
Phase 4 and below
During cine verify that Max P.W. for each frame rate is correct.
NOTE: For non–GE systems, refer to specific OEM service documentation.
4–15
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE KVP AND MA
subassembly: IMAGE SYSTEM, GENERATOR date: 05/01/95
purpose: To verify the kVp and Max mA during the cine time: 15 min.
mode of operation
PREREQUISITES
Job Card XPM–460 Max Cine Pulse Widths should be done first.
Tool Required: DVM
Keithley or HV divider or equivalent (optional)
Hand tools
TASK DESCRIPTION
For All Cine Systems
If no–load kVp data has been acquired within the last 9 months, then place the
DVM on the volt–pac on terminal 3 of the A and B phase winding.
The Keithley can be used along with this to verify the voltage and kVp.
NOTE: Keithley will create pulses on the size and fall times of the waveform on pulse
systems. If in doubt, change the SID and if the pulses are created by the Keithley,
their amplitude will not change.
The no–load voltages must be within + 2 VAC.
If you do not have recent no–load kVp data for this system, then you must verify the
kVp with either the Keithley (see job card XPM–900) or you must use the HV
divider (see Tab 13). Record no–load voltages after using the HV divider.
CGR Systems
CPG 20 systems must use either the Keithley, the internal voltage divider or the
CGR external divider. The GE HV divider can be used but because of the
lack of frequency compensation, the CGR divider is preferred.
ADVANTX Refer to: Calibration Users Guide
Calibration Unit “X220 Manual Cine/Fluoro Tool.”
This calibration unit is a service function for checking the Cine and Fluoro function
of the image system.
Check both XL and XS at the minimum and maximum kVp’s for both kVp and mA
accuracy.
Select 60 frame rate and maximum pulse width.
Close the collimator blades if not using the Keithley.
NOTE: The Advantx internal bleeder may be used if the accuracy has been
determined. See the following illustration showing where to measure peak cine kVp
for Keithley and HV bleeder.
4–16
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE KVP AND MA Job Card XPM–470 2 of 3
Oscilloscope Trace of Cine kV Accuracy Test
DURING AFTER
INITIAL INITIAL
INTERVAL INTERVAL
B
C
MPX/L500
Check the maximum cine kVp and mA for both the large and small filament.
Select 60 frame rate and maximum pulse width.
Disable kVp override (pull MX1A11A5, 6, 7).
Remove II HV power supply board (MX1A1A1).
Close the collimator blades if not using the Keithley.
Use the console meter if possible or install mA meter in series with mA+ lead at the
transformer.
Select kVp and focal spot for your system.
Depress cine footswitch and record kVp and average mA.
CAUTION: The panel and external meter reads average mA. This is the result of
the peak mA values and the pulse width. If the average mA is incorrect, verify
the pulse width before any service is done to correct the mA settings.
MX100 .3g 6.5 deg. 60 kVp 60 mA 120 kVp 53 mA
MX100 1.0g 11.0 deg. 60 kVp 160 mA 120 kVp 80 mA
HTC/HTG tubes use the same kVp and mA as the MX100 .5–.9, 6.5 deg.
4–17
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE KVP AND MA Job Card XPM–470 3 of 3
MSI/FLUORICON 300
Check the maximum cine kVp and mA on both the large and small filament.
Select 60 frame rate.
Select maximum pulse width.
CAUTION: The panel and external meter reads average mA. This is the result of
the peak mA values and the pulse width. If the average mA is incorrect, verify
the pulse width before any service is done to correct the mA settings.
Disable KV override (if system goes into KV override – pull 32 card).
HTC tube uses the same kVp and mA calibration data.
NOTE: For non–GE systems, refer to specific OEM service documentation.
4–18
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
LEAKAGE CURRENT Job Card XPM–490 1 of 6
job card: ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE CURRENT AND GROUND RESISTANCE
purpose: Verify safety grounding time: 30 min.
PREREQUISITES
Dale 600 Safety Analyzer or Microguard or equivalent.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Use appropriate back and blood born pathogens protection when inspecting or repairing the
system.
TASK DESCRIPTION
These procedures may be used instead of more comprehensive tests. In some areas
(certain areas in the United States and Europe) local codes require that leakage and
ground impedance tests meet more comprehensive requirements. These usually
include meeting the requirements of UL Standard 544 and IEC 601. In these
circumstances, you must perform the tests in the following directions in addition to
the tests indicated here.
46–014546, Electrical Safety – Leakage Currents
46–014505, Electrical Safety – Equipment Grounding
This tests are extracted from direction 46–019763, Advantx LU–A Resistance Measurement
and Leakage Testing. This meets specifications of ANSI/NFPA 99.
Additional information can be obtained in the following documents:
46–019746 Advantx LU/A Power and Grounding
46–019668 Advantx System Facility Power and Grounding
46–019685 Advantx System Cable Routing
46–019676 Advantx system Power and Ground Troubleshooting
For additional information on external measurements, refer to the Dale 600 meter manual.
Verify that the hospital is completing leakage testing and note in the checklist
comments. If no testing has been done, complete the following procedures to
insure patient safety.
These tests are not absolute in finding grounding problems but are an indicator to additional
tests needed. Data sheets can be found in section 12 of this manual.
CAUTION: Disconnecting grounds can be dangerous. First verify that there is minimal current in
the ground wire prior to disconnecting. Use a clamp on ampmeter. High currents are the result of
large voltage differences. None of the tests in these procedures require the grounds to be
disconnected unless troubleshooting a problem. Use established safety procedures at all times.
4–19
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE CURRENT

AND GROUND RESISTANCE Job Card XPM–490 2 of 6
ILLUSTRATION 1
ADVANTX PATIENT VICINITY “STAR” GROUND SYSTEM
= CHASSIS GROUND
System = GROUND WIRE

Cabinet
LFX1
LFX2
GANTRY
TABLE
Positioner
Cabinet PATIENT VICINITY
2.3 METERS
7 FEET 6 INCHES
(FROM FLOOR)
1.8 METERS
6 FEET
1.8 METERS
6 FEET
1.8 METERS
6 FEET
As defined in NFPA 99 Standard

1.8 METERS for Health Facilities,
6 FEET
PATIENT VICINITY is 1.8m (6 ft.) beyond the
perimeter of the table and extending vertically
2.3m (7 ft. 6 in.) off the floor.
4–20
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV

Leakage Current Test Procedure:

See Illustration 2 for the usage of the Dale 600 meter to measure leakage current.
Connect the black lead to the plug and the red lead to the external plug of the Dale 600
meter. Set the function switch to external and display readings will be in microamps.
The black lead will be connected to the table base and the red lead is then
connected to the device under test.
Leakage current cannot exceed the following and is tested with power on:
Critical care areas (invasive) – 10ua
General care areas – 20ua
Not intended for patient area – 50ua
Testing must be completed between the system reference ground point (table base) to unit
reference ground points (i.e. gantry and cabinets, see illustration 1) in functional star
groupings. Test all cabinets, foot switch, and room ground bus bar. Test the auxiliary
items such as monitors, injector, changers, hi intensity lamps, overhead tube
suspensions, and lead glass shield. Test all exposed conductive metal surfaces in
patient vicinity (6 feet around table and 2.3m or 7.5 feet above). See illustration 1.
Record these results in the data sheet.
Hints:
Look for items that have abnormal measurements, high or low. These could indicate
mis–wiring, loose connections, or poor connections due to corrosion, painted
surfaces, etc. High leakage could indicate a wiring error such as a neutral connected
to the ground.
Fluctuating ground currents could indicate a short, poor connection, or facilities
ground problem causing leakage currents from other areas of the facility to flow
though our system grounds.
Ground Resistance Test Procedure:
See Illustration 3 for the usage of the Dale 600 meter to measure ground resistance.
Connect the 2 black leads to the external and chassis plugs of the Dale 600 meter. Set the
function switch to resistance and display readings will be in tenths of ohms. The black
chassis lead will be connected to the table base and the other black lead is then
connected to the device under test.
All ground resistance testing is done with power off. Ground current will cause errors in the
resistance readings. Use lockout/tagout procedures.
Maximum ground resistance is 0.1 ohms impedance.
This does not include cord connection devices. Cord connection devices must be checked
individually by measuring from ground terminal of the device power plug to the
chassis of the device. This must be less than 0.2 ohms.
4–21
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV

ILLUSTRATION 2
USING DALE 600 TO MEASURE LEAKAGE CURRENT
CONNECT METER
1. LEADS
BLACK RED
LEAD LEAD
LEAD
CHASSIS EXTERNAL BLK RED

20 mA TO TO
.15W .15mA CHASSIS EXTERNAL
TEST POINTS
UNIT A UNIT B
CHASSIS CHASSIS
GROUND POINT GROUND
OR POINT
TABLE SYSTEM
REFERENCE
SELECT GROUND POINT
2. FUNCTION
V – LINE VOLTS
A – CURRENT
W – RESISTANCE
L – EARTH
3.
READ
E LA DISPLAY
– CHASSIS RA LL
A RL
K – LEAD–GND C
A – LEAD–LEAD
G
E – LEAD–ISO
mA – EXTERNAL
ALL
RECORD
4. VALUE
4–22
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV

ILLUSTRATION 3
USING DALE 600 TO MEASURE GROUND RESISTANCE
CONNECT METER
1. LEADS
BLACK BLACK
LEAD LEAD
LEAD
CHASSIS EXTERNAL BLK BLK

20 mA TO TO
.15W .15mA CHASSIS EXTERNAL
TEST POINTS
UNIT A UNIT B
CHASSIS CHASSIS
GROUND GROUND
POINT POINT
SELECT
2. FUNCTION
V – LINE VOLTS
A – CURRENT
W – RESISTANCE
L – EARTH READ
E LA 3.
– CHASSIS RA LL DISPLAY
A RL
K – LEAD–GND C
A – LEAD–LEAD
G
E – LEAD–ISO
mA – EXTERNAL
ALL
RECORD
4. VALUE
NOTE: TO CORRECT FOR A POSSIBLE DC COMPONENT OF THE LEAKAGE CURRENT

FLOWING BETWEEN TWO POINTS, REVERSE THE METER LEAD CONNECTIONS
AND AVERAGE THE TWO READINGS.
4–23
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV

Using the table base ground as a reference, check the ground resistance to all of the system
components in functional star groups and record the measurements in the data
sheet. Test all cabinets, foot switch, and room ground bus bar. Test the auxiliary items
such as monitors, injector, changers, hi intensity lamps, overhead tube suspensions,
and lead glass shield. High resistance could be caused by no ground or a poor
connection. Test all conductive surfaces in the patient vicinity.
Hints:
Look for undersized ground wires and schedule time to replace with a wire that will
meet specifications.
Ground resistance readings should not fluctuate. If so this indicates an intermittent
short or a loose connection.
4–24
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
IMAGING PERFORMANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–500 IMAGE QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
XPM–510 RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
XPM–520 PHOTOSPOT FILM REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
XPM–522 PHOTOSPOT CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
XPM–524 DIGITAL PHOTOSPOT IMAGE REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
XPM–530 CINE FILM REVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
XPM–532 CINE CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
XPM–540 PROCESSOR QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
XPM–542 CINE PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
XPM–550 DF VASCULAR IMAGE QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–20
XPM–552 DF CARDIAC IMAGE QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–26
XPM–554 DG/DX/DLX VASCULAR IMAGE QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–28
XPM–556 DG/DX/DLX CARDIAC IMAGE QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–30
XPM–562 MI–10 FORMATTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–32
XPM–564 3M LASER CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–33
XPM–580 CINE PROJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–41
5–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
5–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
IMAGE SYSTEM Job Card XPM–500 1 of 6
job card: IMAGE QUALITY
subassembly: IMAGE SYSTEM date: 11/98
purpose: Evaluation of image quality and ABC response time: 30 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools Required: CV phantom (if plexiglas is not removable, 2 mm Cu can be used as
homogeneous phantom)
Low contrast phantom for non–GE systems use 2mm Cu
Oscilloscope with coax and T connector
TASK DESCRIPTION
80 kV fluoro
AUTO brightness mode
9I FOV (largest FOV if smaller than 9I)
Minimum SID
Table 12I from II if movable
Grid IN
Medium fluoro dose (if applicable)
Center 2–1/4I plexiglas, 1/4I Al, and 1/32I Cu from CV phantom in FOV (Cu towards II).
NOTE: 2mm of Cu or 2 sheets of Cu & 1 sheet Al from CV phantom may be used.
Collimate so that collimator blades are clearly visible on all sides (approximately 90% of area
for circular collimator).
NOTE: Collimator blades will be seen on video as a black level reference.
Connect scope to monitor video (use coax and “T” at back of monitor or wherever
convenient).
Verify amplitude of sync pulses. They should be approximately 300 mV. If not, check for
proper termination of video coax (75 ohms).
VIDEO LEVELS
Conventional Fluoro
Select Conventional Fluoro mode if more than one mode of fluoro is available.
During fluoro exposure, note video “black level” and fluoro video level observed on
scope.
Record these video levels on data sheet (see illustration)
Black level is typically 50mV above blanking (100 mV for TE series cameras)
5–1
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: IMAGE QUALITY Job Card XPM–500 2 of 6
Video level is typically 250–300mV above black level for systems using Average
Brightness Detection; or 500–650mv for systems using Peak detection.
ILLUSTRATION 1
VIDEO LEVEL
SCOPE SETTINGS VIDEO LEVEL

VERT AMPL
0.2 volt/div
TIME BASE
5 msec/div BLACK LEVEL - - -- - - ---
} 50 mV
BLANKING --- - - -- - -
SYNC TIPS ---
NOTE 1: Video levels are measured from center of collimator black to center of
white.
NOTE 2: For non–GE systems, refer to specific OEM service documentation.
Digital Fluoro (Image Hold)
Select Digital Fluoro mode if available (Image Hold mode for R&F systems)
During fluoro exposure, note fluoro video level observed on scope.
Record fluoro video level on data sheet.
Black level may be higher than conventional fluoro (70–90 mV)
Video level is typically 250 (+ 25) mV for digital fluoro.
NOTE: Digital system ROI (Region of Interest) tools may be used to verify video
levels. Refer to service manuals for specific procedures.
Other Fluoro Modes (IDF, Pulscan, etc.)
Select other fluoro modes if available (i.e. IDF or Pulscan)

Video level is typically within 25 mV of Conventional video level.
Stenoscop 2

Video level is typically 265 (+ 25) mV.
5–2
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Alternate Method using DSM:

Enter the IQ mode (GMA keys pressed simultaneously is password).
Select the ROI and draw a box in the center of the image.
Fluoro in auto mode.
Follow the ROI prompts to measure the video.
The density should be between 94–114.
Close the collimator and fluoro at manual minimum.
Repeat the ROI measurement.
Record results on data sheets.
For MDA:
Select system setup, permanent data, service menu, image quality, measure, ROI.
Place 2 mm of copper (3 sheets of copper or 2 sheets of copper and 1 aluminum).
Fluoro in auto mode.
Measure mean value – should be between 94–114.
Close the collimator blades and fluoro at manual minimum.
Repeat ROI measurement.
Accent
Same MDA IQ test as stenoscop 2.
Digital Record (EPS – DRS, DRE, DRI, etc.)
Same operating conditions as Fluoro with the following additions:

80 kV Record
80 mA / Small focal spot
2 images/sec frame rate
Select Digital Record mode if available
Select “Image Hold” fluoro mode if available
Record sequence of several images at each digital record dose available. Change
mA if necessary to obtain an exposure time of 10–100 ms.
Review one recorded image from each sequence and note video level observed on
scope.
Record video level on data sheet.
Digital video level is typically 250 (+ 25)mV.
NOTE: Digital system ROI (Region of Interest) tools may be used to verify video
levels. Refer to service manuals for specific procedures.
5–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
IMAGE CONTRAST
Replace homogeneous phantom with CV–1 phantom (no Cu or Al filters)

NOTE: CV–1 phantom used to increase radiographic contrast
Center CV–1 phantom in Field of View
Other operating conditions remain the same.
Monitor Brightness & Contrast

NOTE: If procedures using test patterns and/or light meters are available, they should be
used.
Adjust ambient light conditions to those used during exams.

Select Conventional Fluoro mode.
During fluoro exposure adjust monitor Brightness so that circular blanking,
collimator blade, and abdomen section of phantom are easily visible and
distinguishable.
Adjust Contrast so that lung section of phantom is not overly bright and
penetrometers are easily visible, and any alpha–numerics are not blurring
excessively. (Contrast will be readjusted during EDR evaluation if
necessary.)
EDR Evaluation (if applicable)
Select 6I FOV.
Select Digital Fluoro or Image Hold mode if available to verify that A/D converters in
digital system will not be saturated.
Position CV phantom as shown in Illustration 2.
ILLUSTRATION 2
CV PHANTOM
abdomen
5–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Readjust monitor Contrast if necessary to maximize visibility of lung area features

without being excessively bright.
Observe lung field, particularly visibility of penetrometers.
If penetrometers are not visible, record problem on data sheet.
NOTE: Inability to visualize penetrometers can be caused by EDR cal, Gain cal, max
Beam Current cal, monitor adjustments, etc.
GENERAL IMAGE QUALITY
Add aluminum sheet to CV–1 phantom to make it a CV–2 phantom

NOTE: CV–2 is generally used as standard phantom when observing video
waveforms.
Center CV–2 phantom in FOV.
Perform the following observations of the fluoro image in ALL fluoro modes:
Verify visibility of all 6 penetrometer holes in CV phantom
Verify visibility of collimator blade between circular blanking and abdomen section of
phantom.
Verify image roundness.
Verify image sizing and centering.
Verify image reversal operation and image centering.
Verify shutters are visible in all mag modes for US systems.
If any problems are observed, record problems on data sheet.
Digital Record (EPS – DRS, DRE, DRI, etc.)
Record several digital images.

Change mA if necessary to obtain an exposure time of 10–100 ms.
Review image for visibility of collimator blade in area of abdomen section of
phantom
If collimator blade is not visible, record problem on data sheet as a “digital black
level problem.”
NOTE: Inability to see collimator blade may indicate a light bias or black level offset
problem.
Photospot
Record several photospot images.

Change mA if necessary to obtain an exposure time of 10–100 ms.
Observe image flash on monitor during exposures.
If monitor image is too dark or too bright, record problem on data sheet.
Recorded images will be evaluated in XPM–520.
5–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Cine
NOTE: Digital cardiac (dynamic) functions, if available, will be checked in XPM–556.
Select 6” FOV
Select small focal spot
Verify that VCR is enabled if present.
During fluoro exposure, note amplitude of video waveform.
Record several seconds of cine at 30 fps (25 fps for 50 Hz systems)
Verify that pulse width is at least 1.5ms. Increase SID if necessary.
During cine record, observe video waveform.
If cine video level is not within 75 mV of fluoro video level, record problem on data
sheet.
Repeat for any other commonly used frame rates.
Recorded images will be evaluated in XPM–530.
ILLUSTRATION 3
PEAK VIDEO LEVEL
HEART LUNG LUNG
(CENTER OF NOISE) PEAK (CENTER OF NOISE)
MEDIA
ABDOMEN
COLLIMATOR
BLACK
PEAKDET LEVEL
LEAD SLUG BLANKING
NOTE: For non–GE systems, refer to specific OEM service documentation for
factors settings and test tools.
5–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RESOLUTION
purpose: Measuring high contrast resolution of image time: 10 min.

system
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Line Pair Phantom or Resolution Wedge (0.1 mm Pb resolution pattern)
1/4I Al
NOTE: Resolution measurements with mesh patterns cannot be converted directly to lead
bar pattern measurements because mesh patterns have lower radiographic contrast and line
widths are generally unequal to spacing of lines.
TASK DESCRIPTION
60 kV fluoro
Maximum SID
Conventional fluoro (if selectable)
No grid (if grid is easily removable) (otherwise leave in place)
1/4I Aluminum in FOV
Center resolution pattern at 45 degree angle in FOV as close to II entrance plane as
possible.
NOTE: If the grid is removable, resolution pattern may be oriented vertically in the FOV.
(Observed resolution will be greater than with pattern oriented at 45 degrees.)
Fluoro
Remove glare. This can done by dimming room lights.
Select fluoro Dose 3 (High Detail) if available.
Record resolution in all mag modes in the data sheet.
Verify that observations exceed minimums indicated in Table 1.
NOTE: Typical minimum resolution stated is for resolution pattern oriented at 45
degrees. For complete tables of minimum and typical resolutions see Image Quality
Handbook (46–019652). For non–GE systems, refer to OEM technical
specifications.
5–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RESOLUTION Job Card XPM–510 2 of 4
TABLE 1
MINIMUM CONVENTIONAL FLUORO RESOLUTION (LP/MM)
FOV 16” 12” 9” 6” 4.5”

525/625 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 2.0
1023/1249 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.2 2.6
NOTE: Resolution may be slightly less for pick–up tubes other than Primicons,
Saticons, and Czicons, and for older image intensifier types.
NOTE: It is not necessary to record resolution of other fluoro modes, but minimum
resolutions for digital fluoro modes are shown in Table 3 (use the line rate appropriate
for fluoro acquisition).
Recording Modes:
If Recording modes are available, select technic factors according to application
being tested (see Table 2).
TABLE 2
TECHNIC FACTORS
Photospot DR Cine DX/DLX

mA 50S 50S Small Spot 100S
kV 60 60 60 60
Frame Rate Single Single 30 fps 1/sec
Dose High D
Record at least one image at each Mag mode.

Images will be evaluated in job cards for specific record modes.
Repeat this section for all Recording modes (i.e., Photospot, Cine, DRS, DLX).
NOTE: Typical minimum digitial resolutions in Table 3 are with resolution pattern
oriented at 45 degrees. For complete tables of minimum and typical resolutions see
Image Quality Handbook (46–019652).
Digital System Resolutions
TABLE 3
TYPICAL MINIMUM DIGITAL RESOLUTIONS
FOV 16” 12” 9” 6” 4.5”

Dynamic/Cardiac/Vascular 512 0.45 0.8 1.3 1.6 2.0
Vascular 1024 0.7 1.0 1.5 1.9 2.3
5–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Cine Film Resolutions
TABLE 4
CINE LIMITING RESOLUTIONS
MINIMUM LIMITING TYPICAL RESOLUTION

II SIZE FIELD SIZE
RESOLUTION (Lp/mm) (Lp/mm)
NORM 2.2 2.4
9I
MAG 1 2.8 3.0
TH9440 – F1
MAG 2 3.4 3.7
NORM 2.0 2.3
12I MAG 1 2.6 2.9
TH9445 – F1 MAG 2 3.0 3.4
MAG 3 4.1 4.4

II SIZE FIELD SIZE
NORM 2.6 3.0
9I
MAG 1 3.4 3.8
TH9440 – HP
MAG 2 4.0 4.4
NORM 2.2 2.8
12I MAG 1 2.8 3.4
TH9445 – HP MAG 2 3.4 4.0
MAG 3 4.4 5.0

II SIZE FIELD SIZE
NORM 3.0 TBD
9I
MAG 1 3.6 TBD
TH9438 – HX
MAG 2 4.6 TBD
NORM 2.4 3.0
12I MAG 1 2.8 3.4
TH9436 – HX MAG 2 3.4 4.0
MAG 3 4.4 5.0
5–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Photospot Resolutions
TABLE 5
PHOTOSPOT LIMITING RESOLUTIONS
MINIMUM LIMITING TYPICAL

II SIZE FIELD SIZE
RESOLUTION (Lp/mm) RESOLUTION (Lp/mm)
NORM 3.2 3.4
9I
MAG 1 3.8 4.0
TH9440 – F1
MAG 2 4.4 4.7
NORM 3.0 3.3
12I MAG 1 3.6 3.9
TH9445– F1 MAG 2 4.0 4.4
MAG 3 5.1 5.4
NORM 3.0 3.4
16I MAG 1 3.4 3.7
TH9437 – F1 MAG 2 3.9 4.2
MAG 3 4.8 5.1

II SIZE FIELD SIZE
NORM 3.6 4.0
9I
MAG 1 4.4 4.8
TH9440 – HP
MAG 2 5.0 5.4
NORM 3.2 3.8
12I MAG 1 3.8 4.4
TH9445– HP MAG 2 4.4 5.0
MAG 3 5.4 6.0

II SIZE FIELD SIZE
NORM 4.0 TBD
9I
MAG 1 4.6 TBD
TH9438 – HX
MAG 2 5.6 TBD
NORM 3.4 4.0
12I MAG 1 3.8 4.4
TH9436 – HX MAG 2 4.4 5.0
MAG 3 5.4 6.0
5–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: PHOTOSPOT FILM REVIEW
purpose: Evaluating photospot image quality and resolution time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Densitometer
Exposed Photospot film from previous job cards if applicable.
TASK DESCRIPTION
Refer to Job Card XPM–540 to determine if sensitometry data will be needed, and for
directions to obtain data if needed.
For GE 105 mm cameras, advance film several frames to create a leader.
Remove take–up magazine from camera.
Process film which was exposed during image quality and resolution tests (XPM–500 & 510).
Review photospot images on a light box and observe the following:
Visibility of penetrometers in each area of the CV phantom
Check for evidence of scratches, water marks, etc.
Review the resolution images and record resolution observed on the data sheet (see
XPM–510 for minimum resolution specs).
Visually inspect the film for proper framing of exposed area.
Select one of the CV–2 phantom images, and measure the densities of all four sections of
the phantom near the apex of the phantom.
(typical density in Heart section of phantom is 1.4 + 0.1)
Record results on data sheet for possible future use as a benchmark.
Note any concerns or comments regarding photospot film quality on checklist and/or data
sheet.
NOTE: For non–GE systems, refer to OEM technical documentation.
5–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: PHOTOSPOT CAMERA
purpose: Cleaning and Functional Check of Photospot time: 20 min.

Camera
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Alcohol wipes
Soft bristles brush
Lens tissue
Compressed air or equivalent
TASK DESCRIPTION
Remove film from camera, or remove supply and receiver magazines.
CAUTION: Dim room lights to save unexposed film in GE 105 mm cameras while
unloading and reloading.
Remove any pieces of film or emulsion dust from inside camera and magazines.
Remove build–up of emulsion on film guides and other areas of film path.
Clean surfaces of any lenses or mirrors which are easily accessible.
Verify operation of film indicator.
Check magazine light seals, mounting of all magazines, and operation of film knife.
Reload film if it had been removed, or reinstall film magazines.
Perform a functional check of the camera at 4 fps or the highest frame rate available to
ensure smooth operation.
NOTE: Select phantom, generator technics, etc. to produce a 10–100 ms exposure.
Record any problems on the checklist and /or data sheets.
5–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DIGITAL PHOTOSPOT IMAGE REVIEW
subassembly: DR/DRE/DRI/DRS IMAGE SYSTEM date: 01/20/99
purpose: Digital image quality and resolution time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: None
TASK DESCRIPTION
Video levels, resolution, and other image quality parameters are evaluated in XPM–500 and
XPM–510. Some digital systems have Image Quality tools available which may be
useful to troubleshoot imaging problems. These tests are generally beyond the scope
of a PM inspection. Please refer to specific documentation for details.
Review recent “digital” films or interview customer about any problems with digital image
quality. Note any problems on data sheets.
Check the operation of all functions of the digital system and note any potential problems
with the operator controls such as keyboard, etc.
For future reference, film Installation Menu, User Menu, etc. if possible. The procedure to do
this will vary according to system type and software version, so refer to system
documentation if additional information is needed.
5–13
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE FILM REVIEW
purpose: Evaluating cine film processing, resolution, and time: 10 min.

image quality
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Sensitometer (preferably green light)
Densitometer
Exposed cine film from previous job cards
TASK DESCRIPTION
Before removing film magazine from system, advance film to create a “leader.”
Refer to XPM–542 to determine if a QC check of the cine processor will be necessary. If so,
use sensitometer to expose film leader at this time.
Process the cine film exposed in XPM–500 and XPM–510.
If necessary, determine Speed & Contrast Index of the cine film as outlined in XPM–542 and
record readings on data sheet. Also record Base Fog Density of film.
Select projector most often used by the cardiologists. Review the condition of cine film
projector. (Refer to Job Card XPM–580 for projector PM if necessary.)
Load cine film on projector.
Visually inspect the film for proper framing of exposed area (see Illustration 1) and evidence
of any scratches or water marks.
ILLUSTRATION 1
FILM FRAMING
FILM FRAMING
5–14
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE FILM REVIEW Job Card XPM–530 2 of 2
Review the resolution runs and record resolution observed on the data sheet (see XPM–510
for minimum resolution specs.
Select a frame near the middle of the CV–2 phantom run and measure the densities of all
four sections of the phantom near the apex of the phantom.
(typical density in heart section of phantom is 0.95 + 0.1)
Record results on data sheet for possible future use as a benchmark.
Note any concerns or comments regarding cine film quality on checklist and/or data sheets.
5–15
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE CAMERA
purpose: Cleaning and mechanical check of cine camera time: 15 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Alcohol wipes
Soft bristles brush
Lens tissue
TASK DESCRIPTION
Remove cine magazine from camera.
Remove any pieces of film or emulsion dust from inside camera and magazines.
CAUTION: Magazines may be loaded with exposed patient film or unexposed film (if in
doubt, open magazines in total darkness).
Remove any emulsion build–up from film guides and other areas of film path.
Check operation of film sensor on camera drive.
Clean surfaces of any lenses or mirrors which are easily accessible.
Verify operation film indicator in each magazine.
Check mounting of magazines.
Perform a functional check of cine camera.
Record any problems on checklist and/or data sheets.
5–16
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: PROCESSOR QC
subassembly: GENERATOR/IMAGE SYSTEM date: 11/98
purpose: Quality control procedure for sheet film time: 10 min.

processors
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Sensitometer
Densitometer
TASK DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Perform this job card only if user is not performing periodic processor quality
control. If problems with film densities or contrast arise, review customer’s processor QC
data sheets for changes in processing parameters; and then if necessary, repeat customer’s
procedures or the procedure outlined below.
Expose an unexposed film using the sensitometer.
NOTES: If film is single emulsion type, expose emulsion side of film. Expose both sides of
film along different edges if emulsion side can not be identified.
For mammography, select the same type of film that is normally used.
Process film.
Speed Index:
Measure the base fog of the film and record on data sheet.
Determine which sensitometer step has a density closest to base fog +1.0. This is the
SPEED step or INDEX.
Record the step number and density of the SPEED INDEX on the Mammography PM
Data Sheet.
Contrast Index:
Record the number and density of the step two steps above the SPEED step.
This is CONTRAST step #1.
NOTE: If you are using an eleven step densitometer, the CONTRAST steps are one
(1) step above and one (1) below the SPEED step.
Record the number and density of the step two steps below the SPEED step.
This is CONTRAST step #2 (one step for 11 step sensitometer).
Subtract the values of the CONTRAST steps to obtain the CONTRAST INDEX.
Record this value on the Mammography PM Data Sheet.
Record step numbers 12 and 15 and enter on the Mammography PM Data Sheet.
5–17
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: PROCESSOR QC Job Card XPM–540 2 of 2
Record film and screen type on Mammography PM Data Sheet.

If previous data is available, compare new data with previous data. Acceptable
tolerance is +.15 for the SPEED INDEX, and +.10 for the CONTRAST
INDEX.
For Mammography film, the SPEED INDEX is reduced to +.10.
5–18
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE PROCESSOR
purpose: Cine film processor QC time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Sensitometer (preferably green light)
Densitometer
TASK DESCRIPTION
NOTE: Perform this job card only if user is not performing periodic processor quality
control. If problems with film densities or contrast arise, review customer’s processor QC
data sheets for changes in processing parameters; and then if necessary repeat customer’s
procedures or the procedure outlined below.
Before removing film magazine from system, advance film to create a “leader.”
In total darkness, remove film from magazine and use GREEN light sensitometer to expose
emulsion side of film leader.
NOTES: If you’re not sure which is emulsion side of film, expose both sides of film in
different areas of film.
If film is orthochromatic, a safelight may be used in darkroom.
Process film.
Speed Index:
Measure density of film in unexposed area and record reading on data sheet as
BASE FOG.
Determine which sensitometer step has a density closest to 1.0. This is the SPEED
step or INDEX.
Record the step number and density of the SPEED INDEX on the data sheet.
Contrast Index:
Record the number and density of the step two steps above the SPEED step.
This is CONTRAST step #1.
NOTE: If you are using an eleven step densitometer, the CONTRAST steps are one
(1) step above and one (1) step below the SPEED step.
Record the number and density of the step two steps below the SPEED step.
This is CONTRAST step #2 (one step for 11 step sensitometer).
Subtract the values of the CONTRAST steps to obtain the CONTRAST INDEX.
Record this value on the data sheets.
5–19
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DF VASCULAR IMAGE QUALITY
subassembly: DF date: 05/01/95
purpose: Vascular vessel test time: 30 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: DF phantom
Technics: Status mode vessel test
60 kVp fluoro
Auto mA, Dose 1
Collimator fully open
Grid in place
Nine inch field size (9I on 12I intensifiers)
Normal TV sweeps
60 kVp RAD, 250 mA, 32 msec (nominal exposure time)
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
PHANTOM POSITIONING
Place DF step wedge with no block installed on the table top. The step wedge should be
centered in the FOV with thickest portion towards the patient’s left side (monitor right
side) of the table. No portion of the first or ninth step should be inside the trial
window. While taking trial images, horizontally center the wedge and adjust the image
intensifier height until the edge between the 1st, 2nd, 8th, and 9th steps are outside
the trial window by 1/8 + 1/16 inch on the 9 inch or in–room monitor. Vertically center
the wedge so the centering markers are equidistant from the circular blanking edge.
All nine steps of the wedge should be visible on the monitor and approximately equal
in width.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5–20
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DF VASCULAR IMAGE QUALITY Job Card XPM–550 2 of 6
TABLE REQUIREMENTS
LUA SYSTEMS: Table height 18 + 1/4 inches from the x–ray tube focal spot or 5 inches
from the top of the collimator.
L = –90 degrees
U + 0 degrees
LU–C SYSTEMS: Table height 18 + 1/4 inches from the x–ray tube focal spot or 5 inches
from the top of the collimator.
RFX SYSTEMS: Table top and x–ray tube are vertically fixed.
The static acquisition screen should have its cursor sitting on the 1st entry (PROTOCOL).
Use the NEXT ENTRY and PRIOR ENTRY keys to move the cursor to set up the
technique shown in the screen below:
Dose D
Frames/Image 1
Inj–Mask/Mask–Inj Delay N/N
Mask–Run Delay 2.0 (sec)
Group 1 Rate/Total 1/5
Group 1–Group2 Delay 1.0 (sec)
Group 2_Group3 Delay 1.0 (sec)
NOTE: Group 3 rate is 8.3 for 50 Hz systems.
1. Take a trial exposure. The variable aperture changes to achieve a peak video
level between 85 and 105%. The system should stabilize within 3 trials to that of
video level. On DF 3000 MARK 1 systems the aperture is manually controlled.
On MARK 0 systems without AEC, the mAs needs to be changed to achieve the
proper video level. On DF 5000 the aperture and exposure time is automatically
adjusted.
2. Take an image series.
Install the mask block in the center shelf of the DF phantom.
Repeat step 1.
3. Take an image series. After the mask image has appeared on the monitor and
during the mask–to–run delay, release the handswitch to the PREP position.
Remove the clear block from the step wedge and insert the artery block (with the
arteries perpendicular to the steps) DO NOT bump the step wedge or table
during this changeover.
4. Depress the handswitch to the EXPOSE position and take the rest of the image
run.
5. View the trailer frame (on the nine inch monitor). Verify that the following
conditions are met:
The maximum image rate is at least 7.5 images/sec.
The peak video is between 92–100% (inclusive).
The exposure time is between 20–60 msec (inclusive).
5–21
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
6. If the above conditions are not met, adjust the appropriate parameter to bring it
into specifications. After doing so, run another series.
8 mm 1%
4 mm 1%
2 mm 1%
1 mm 1%
0.6 mm 1%
0.6 mm 0.5%
1 mm 0.5%
1 mm 0.5%
2 mm 0.5%
4 mm 0.5%
8 mm 0.5%
7. View vessel images in reprocess mode.

8. Verify that the mask image has all 9 shades of gray visible.
9. Observe image sizing, centering, and circular mask alignments.
The subjective visualization procedure of the 1 mm, 1% contrast artery that follows, may be
used to compliment the above quantitative measurements.
1. Since step 1 is outside the trial window, it may either be over–ranged or the
artery may be clearly identifiable.
2. No saturation or saturation in step 2 indicates calibration problems in the A/D
converter or the camera. In steps 2, 3, and 4 the artery must be clearly
identifiable.
3. Steps 5 and 6 must display the artery such that it is recognizable by class. It
must be recognizable as a 1 mm line running horizontally through the step.
4. Verify that the step 7 artery is discernable as an object that is horizontally
oriented.
5. Verify that the step 8 artery is displayed as an object of any orientation which
may be classified as being detected in 5 of 10 observations. An observation is
defined as the third, eight, or thirteenth subtraction in a standard image
acquisition run.
6. Record vessel step visible, exposure time, and peak video on the data sheet.
5–22
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
FOR DF 5000
Exit application software and enter IMAGE ANALYSIS mode by typing “IMAGE.”
Enter the IMAGE ANALYSIS mode and review the required menus or screens by referring to
the following section in Chapter 6 of Direction 46–014988, Digital Fluoro 4000/5000:
Section 3, Image Analysis.
View the first acquisition run taken without the block by:
Pressing SEL R# and
Entering the desired run number followed by NEXT ENTRY.
Select the applicable run fro9m the image directory shown on the ACTIVE SCREEN.
Evaluate the acquisition using IMAGE SHADING as follows:
1. Using the FORW key, select the second image in the run.
2. Press ATTN to enter the IMAGE ANALYSIS menu selection screen.
3. Select Option 1, SHADING, followed by NEXT ENTRY.
4. Edit the SHADING screen to reflect an ANALYSIS AREA of 74% and a BOX
CURSOR SIZE OF 37 * 37.
5. Press E (execute) and the system calculates the following:
Average value of highest box (all black)
Average value of lowest box (all white)
Difference in highest and lowest box (delta within image).
6. Record the displayed difference in highest and lowest box value for this image in
the data record, static record mode image shading.
7. Press DONE twice to return to the Image Directory shown on the ACTIVE
SCREEN.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for images #3, 7, 9, and 13 for this run.
Verify that the recorded difference in highest and lowest box value for each image in each
run listed in the data table is less than 24 levels.
NOTE: Columns (a), (b), and (d) in the data sheets are not used for the DF–5000 testing.
Press DONE twice to return to the image directory shown on the ACTIVE SCREEN.
Evaluate the first acquisition run taken using REGION OF INTEREST MEAN VALUE as
follows:
1. Using the FORW key, select the second image in the run.
2. Press ATTN to enter the IMAGE ANALYSIS menu selection screen.
3. Select Option 4, REGION OF INTEREST MEAN VALUE, followed by NEXT
ENTRY.
4. Edit the REGION OF INTEREST MEAN VALUE screen to reflect a BOX
CURSOR POSITION OF 255, 238, and a BOX CURSOR POSITION OF
181 * 181.
5–23
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
5. Press E (execute) and the system calculates the following Region of Interest
Values:
Mean: This test
Average
Minimum
Maximum
6. Record the displayed “MEAN: THIS TEST” value for this image in the data
sheets, static record mode region of interest mean value.
7. Press DONE twice to return to the Image Directory shown on the ACTIVE
SCREEN.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for each image for the acquisition run.
Verify that the recorded “MEAN: THIS TEST” value for each image meets the following
criteria:
The recorded MEAN value tested the images within a run must not differ from 0 by
more than + 48 levels.
The recorded MEAN value FOR THE LAST FOUR IMAGES must not differ from one
another by more than 16 levels.
Return Alphanumeric Terminal, Generator, and Omega Table, and LU to normal operating
conditions. Record image shading and ROI mean values on data sheets.
FOR DF 3000 (BASIC)

1. On the screen of the 9 inch monitor use a grease pencil to inscribe a circle in the
area of the trial image window.
2. Adjust the collimator such that the blades are 3/4 + 1/4 inch outside the grease pencil
circle on the monitor.
3. On completion of the acquisition, enter reprocess mode.
4. Display the third subtracted image of the run.
5. Set the window width to 1 (adjust WINDOW up/down keys until displayed window is
0/1) and measure the average level of the area outside the circle drawn on the
screen (adjust LEVEL up/down keys until the area changes from white to black). The
lower level should be 100 + 4. Record this level in the data sheet, column “d.”
6. Adjust level until the area inside the circle just becomes all black. Record this level in
the data sheet, column “e.”
7. Adjust level until the area inside the circle just becomes all white. Record this level in
the data sheet, column “c.”
5–24
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
8. With the area ll white, adjust the LEVEL up until an area inside the circle just
becomes approximately equal black and white (“salt and pepper,” check for equal
distribution using the invert key). Record this level in the data sheet, column “a.”
9. Continue LEVEL up until the area is all black then LEVEL down until an area is
approximately equal white and black (“salt and pepper”). Record this level in the data
sheet, column “b.”
10. Repeat the above procedure for subtracted images 7, 9, and 13 of the run.
11. Observe that the average brightness of the background raster (outside the circle is
100 + 8 levels.
12. Observe that the average brightness of each test image does not differ from the
background by more than 24 levels.
13. Observe that the average brightness of each test image does not differ from any
other test image by more than 8 levels.
14. Observe that the image shading between two region/lines within the circle is less
than 12 levels.
NOTE: Columns “Difference in Highest and Lowest Box” and “ROI Mean Value” in the data
sheet are not used on the DF–3000 tests.
FOR DF 3000 (MARK 1)

1. Select reprocess, window of one, and the first subtraction, image #3.
2. Vary the level and identify the step in the wedge which has a mean brightness level
closest to 127. Record the level in the data sheet, column “d.” Using this step, vary
the level and record the boundaries of the brightness envelope in the data sheet,
upper in column “a” and lower in column “b.”
3. Select successive images #7, 9, and 13 in the run and record the average, upper,
and lower brightness levels for the same areas of the phantom identified in step 2.
4. The average brightness level of the test images shall not vary more than 8 levels
from the average brightness level of the first image.
5–25
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DF CARDIAC IMAGE QUALITY
subassembly: DF date: 05/01/95
purpose: DF Cardiac time: 30 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: CV phantom
Hand Tools
TASK DESCRIPTION
Procedure:
Set up the system as follows:
80 kVp
Auto mA
Dose 2
Small spot
6I FOV
Grid out
Collimator blades full open
CV–II phantom centered
Normal TV sweep
30 frames/sec
For LU systems
L= –90 degrees
U= 0 degrees
Table top 18I above focal spot or as close to 18I as possible.
SID 36I (90 cm).
Select Dose D
Pulse width max limit = 5 ms
Non–subtracted or non–difference
Cine camera record = No
Disk record = Yes
Initiate approximately 6 seconds of pulsed cardiac acquisition run.
Verify the screen displays “Brightness OK” status.
Move table top towards the head end so that the apex of the CVII is at the top of the
image and the lung area appears only in the upper right area of the monitor,
out of the AEC window area, illustrated as follows. Then, return to center.
5–26
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DF CARDIAC IMAGE QUALITY Job Card XPM–552 2 of 2
ABD
Select reprocess mode and view the run.

Observe image quality (i.e. image sizing, centering, circular mask and lung
field blooming.)
NOTE: If sizing, centering or roundness is off, turn up the monitor brightness to check
the raster. If the monitor raster is OK, further time must be scheduled for camera
recalibration.
Select 4–1/2I mode
Position CV phantom in beam as previously illustrated.
Observe lung field, particularly visibility of penetrometers. They should be easily
distinguished.
Look for abnormal brightness variations between images.
Record pulse width during run when phantom is centered. Record in data sheets.
5–27
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DG/DX/DLX VASCULAR IMAGE QUALITY
subassembly: DG/DX/DLX date: 01/22/99
purpose: Digital Vascular Image Quality time: 20 min.
PREREQUISITES
References:
Refer Advantx Operation Manuals for instructions on booting up Advantx Application
Software and selecting Digital Vascular screens on the Advantx console.
NOTE: Digital vascular resolution is checked in XPM–510.
TASK DESCRIPTION
It is not the intended that this procedure verify every digital vascular calibration parameter.
An interview with the customer will indicate any know image quality issues and
operational difficulties. If time does not allow correction of these problems, make
note of them on the data sheets. The following tasks will check common digital
system problem areas.
Verify Default Aperture Values (Quick Check)
Select Digital Vascular mode
Prepare digital for vascular acquisition
Select a frame rate of 1 image/second for the first segment.
Establish the following conditions on Advantx console:
75 kv Record
Small Focal Spot
100 mA
9” FOV
Dose D
Center CV–II Phantom in FOV (CV with 1/4” Al)
Take a TRIAL exposure and observe image as it is displayed on console monitor at
end of exposure.
The brightness of the displayed TRIAL image may change after the first fraction of a
second to indicate a correction of the TV camera aperture. A brightness shift
that is very noticeable is probably indicative of a Default Aperture value which
is incorrect.
Adjust Record mA to maintain a TRIAL exposure time between 5 and 50 ms.
5–28
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DG/DX/DLX VASCULAR IMAGE QUALITY Job Card XPM–554 2 of 2
Repeat TRIAL brightness shift test for each available dose rate and display mode
(512/1024).
The alternate method that follows is according to calibration procedure in service
manual and may be used to verify and/or correct any suspect aperture values.
Record any abnormalities on data sheets.
Alternate Method/Cal Procedure (refer to cal procedures for details)

Same conditions as listed above
Replace CV phantom with a homogeneous phantom (2 mm Cu or Al, Cu, and plexi
from CV phantom)
Access the Technical Menu
Prepare Technical Menu parameters to measure ROI
Acquire a MASK image
Adjust mA to achieve an exposure time between 10 – 100 ms.
Verify that Mean Value of acquired image is equal to the value specified for system
type. (i.e. 80 for DLX)
Acquire a MASK image for each available dose rate and display mode (512/1024).
Recal any Default Aperture values that are not correct, and/or make note of problems
on data sheets.
Miscellaneous Tasks
Verify all VDP card rack fans are working and turning at full speed. Any
non–functional fan or fans can lead to intermittent problems and/or board
failures.
Check for a current digital back–up floppy. Create a back–up if in doubt. Refer to
service manual for detailed directions.
5–29
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DG/DX/DLX CARDIAC IMAGE QUALITY
subassembly: DG/DX/DLX date: 01/21/99
purpose: Cardiac test time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
Digital Advantx system switched on.
Application program initialized.
Reference Operation Manuals if necessary for operation specifics.
NOTE: Digital Cardiac/Dynamic resolution is checked in XPM–510.
TOOLS REQUIRED
Oscilloscope
TASK DESCRIPTION
Connect scope to observe monitor video
Select Digital Cardiac mode (i.e. DX CARD)
Create a New Patient for Acquisition
Enable Acquisition
Establish the following conditions:
80 kVp Fluoro and RAD.
Small Focal Spot
Auto mA
CV–II centered in FOV
6I FOV
Grid IN
5–30
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: DG/DX/DLX CARDIAC IMAGE QUALITY Job Card XPM–556 2 of 2
Verify Cardiac (Dynamic) Video Levels:

– Select Record Medium: Disk + Film if available (disk only if not available)
– Select Record Dose: Cine (select dose A for non–cine systems)
– During fluoro exposure, note amplitude of video waveform.
– Record several seconds of images.
– During record acquisitions, observe video waveform.
– If video level is not within 75 mv of fluoro video level, record problem on data sheet.
– Verify video levels at all dose levels available. Change selection of Record Medium and
Record Dose on Advantx console as needed.
Verify EDR Calibration:
– Select the Cardiac (Dynamic) record dose most commonly used.
– During a cardiac sequence, move the table towards the head end so that the apex of the
CV–II phantom is at the top of the TV image and the lung section of the phantom
appears only in the upper right hand area of the monitor, outside the AEC window
area, as illustrated below.
ABD
– Verify that image exhibits no burn–out in the lung area, and that penetrometers in lung
area are clearly visible.
– Note any EDR problems on data sheet.
5–31
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: MI–10 FORMATTER
subassembly: date: 05/01/95
purpose: Mechanical & functional check of the MI–10 time: 10 min.

camera
PREREQUISITES
Hand tools
Vacuum
Cleaning materials
Sensitometer
Lense cleaning kit
TASK DESCRIPTION
Mechanical Tests
Check lamps and controls on camera and operator’s panels.
Open the rear door of the MI–10.
CAUTION: Remove new films prior to opening. Opening the rear door may expose new
films if the system has an auto loader.
Vacuum the inside of the cabinet and fan filter on the power supply drawer.
Look for indications of possible problems (i.e., loose connections, etc.)
Clean the CRT face of the monitor.
Check the power supply fan operation.
Check the magazine docking, operation, and condition.
For systems with auto loaders ONLY:
Clean the film feed suction cups and rollers.
Clean the film sensor.
For any additional cleaning or lubrication required, refer to Service Note #80001 in Section 10.
Performance Tests
Record density and contrast adjustment settings.
Run a test film from the systems stored images.
Observe the following parameters:
Image sizing and positioning for selected format.
Image focus, density and contrast scale for an acceptable reproduction of image
selected.
Check in all sweep reversals and video reversal if applicable.
Run a sensitometry test and record the speed and contrast index per job card XPM–540.
5–32
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: 3M LASER CAMERA
purpose: Mechanical and functional check of the 3M Laser time: 10 min.

Camera
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
Mechanical Tests
Check lamps and controls on camera and operator’s panels.
Open film supply and exit areas.
Clean the film suction cups and NIP (film exit) rollers with a dry lint free cloth.
Open film exposure area and clean the film transport plate surface with a lint free, alcohol
dampened cloth.
Look for indicators of possible problems (i.e., loose connectors, etc.).
Close up the camera.
Load a cleaning film in the supply magazine and run it through the camera.
NOTE: The customer should be running a cleaning film weekly.
Performance Tests
Record density and contrast settings.
Run a test film from the systems stored images.
Observe the following parameters:
Image sizing and positioning for selected format.
Image focus, density, and contrast scale for an acceptable reproduction of image
selected.
Check in all sweep reversals and video reversal if applicable.
Run a sensitometry test and record the speed and contrast index per job card XPM–540.
NOTE: Monitor camera performance. Cleaning may be done more often if problems
occur. 3M recommends cleaning bi–weekly.
5–33
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: 3M LASER CAMERA Job Card XPM–564 2 of 8
USING THE LASER IMAGER PLUS – CONTROLS AND INDICATORS (Refer to

Illustration)
A. Power Switch – Controls power to the Laser Imager – momentary not a reset.
B. Remote Keypad – Includes indicators and controls normally used during a print
sequence – 12 on 1 or 20 on 1 (optional).
C. Top Cover Release – Allows the top cover to be raised for access to the film
transport area. Electrical and mechanical laser bypasses use small drain plastic straw
(don’t use metallic screwdriver) to prevent mesh damage.
D. Local Panel – Includes status indicators and the control section. Control section
includes a status display, calibration controls, reset, and border selection.
E. Docking Lever – Position directs film to the receive magazine or to an externally
connected film processor. (Lever is on end of imager not visible in Illustration 1.)
F. Unload Button – Opens the receive magazine drawer.
G. Receive Magazine Drawer – Enables access to receive magazine.
H. Load Button – Opens the supply magazine drawer.
I. Supply Magazine Drawer – Enables access to the supply magazine.
ILLUSTRATION 2
LASER IMAGER PLUS
5–34
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
LOCAL PANEL OPERATOR CONTROLS

(Refer to Illustration 2)
1. POWER Light – Indicates power to the Laser Imager Plus.
2. READY Light – Lights when the Laser Imager Plus is ready to begin its next
operation. Status code “1” without ready —> in diags.
3. FILM LOW Light – Indicates that the film supply is low in the supply magazine; less
than 20 sheets of film remain.
4. ALARM Light – Indicates an error in Laser Imager Plus operation.
ILLUSTRATION 3
LOCAL PANEL CONTROLS
Press density and contrast test

simultaneously to open magaĆ
zine drawer with open cassette
(flashing error code).
5–35
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
5. RESET Button – Restarts the Laser Imager Plus after “certain” alarm situations have
occurred, or once they have been corrected. “Soft” reset prevents accidental resets in
MMU systems.
6. STATUS Display – Indicates current Laser Imager Plus operation and alarm
condition. (The status code label on the control door gives an explanation of the
status display codes.)
NOTE: If status display light is blinking, one or both of the magazines may be
partially open, leaving the film vulnerable to exposure.
7. DENSITY TEST Button – Indicates printing of a density test pattern on film. This test
pattern helps determine correct Imager operation, independent of input video.
8. DENSITY ADJUST Knob – Select the density range. (Higher numbers mean more
image density. Lower numbers mean less image density.)
9. CONTRAST TEST Button – Indicates exposure of the same image with 15 different
contrast values on one (or two) sheets of film, depending on the format selected.
(The number that appears below each image corresponds to the adjustment setting
on the CONTRAST ADJUST knob.)
10. CONTRAST ADJUST Knob – Selects the contrast setting. (The numbers correspond
to test film images obtained by pressing the CONTRAST TEST button.) Must store an
image.
11. USER SET Button – Stores the values selected by the DENSITY and CONTRAST
ADJUST Knobs and the BORDER selection switch into microprocessor memory.
(This status must be “1” and the Ready light must be on.)
12. USER CHANNEL Knob – Select the user (modality) for which density, contrast, and
border settings may be stored.
13. BORDER Selection Switch – Enables the selection of a CLEAR or a BLACK border
between the images on the film.
5–36
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 4
STAGE 1: FILM PICKUP
Pickup Assemblies
125 Sheets
of Film
5–37
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 5
STAGE 2: FILM STAGING
5–38
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
A Cleaning Kit available from 3M provides the materials for operators to perform routine
maintenance. Use of this kit will minimize possible film jams and the effects dust and
debris can have on image quality.
The cleaning kit contains the following items.
1. 30 cleaning film sheets
2. 30 alcohol pads
3. 30 dry, lint–free cloths
3M recommends the following cleaning activities be performed every two weeks in the order
shown.
Item (See Illustration 5) Cleaning Procedure
1. Suction Cups Raise the Optics Module and wire the four cups with the lint–free
cloth.
NOTE: Do not use alcohol pads on suction cups or rollers.
2. Transport Plate Wipe with alcohol pad. Allow plate to air dry.
3. Docking Unit Plate Remove the Docking Unit top cover to access. Wipe with alcohol
pad. Allow plate to air dry.
4. Drive and Nip Rollers Close the optics module and position the Docking Unit lever to use
the Receive Magazine. In darkroom conditions, peel the protective
paper from a cleaning film sheet. Place the sheet (sticky side up)
on top of any existing film in the supply magazine.
Load the Supply Magazine into the Imager and press the Density
Test Button to transport the cleaning film through the machine.
Discard the used cleaning film from the receive magazine.
5. Exterior Panels Use the pad and cloth from Steps 1 and 2 to clean any dirt on
these panels.
5–39
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 6
MAINTENANCE LOCATIONS
5–40
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CINE PROJECTORS
subassembly: IMAGE SYSTEM date: 05/01/95
purpose: Clean and check operation of cine projector time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Soft bristle brush
Lens tissue
TASK DESCRIPTION
Clean & Functional Check:
Clean film paths and lens areas of any film pieces and dust by using a soft bristle
brush or compressed air.
Note cleanliness of lenses and clean easily accessible surfaces. If additional cleaning
is needed, schedule for additional service time.
View illuminated screen straight on and note uniformity of brightness. If a hot spot is
visible, is it centered. This is an indication of proper lamp alignment.
Load film and run at high, low speeds and reverse, while being observant of transport
problems.
Trailing or streaking of images at top and/or bottom while transporting film are normal
for a projector without a shutter. For projectors with a shutter (i.e. Vanguard)
this is an indication of timing problems and service on the unit must be
scheduled with the customer.
5–41
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
5–42
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
MAMMOGRAPHY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–700 MAMMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
XPM–702 “R” OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
XPM–704 FOCAL SPOT RESOLUTION LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
XPM–705 CALCULATION OF AVERAGE GLANDULAR DOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
XPM–706 GENERATOR CALIBRATION – MAMMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
XPM–750 RAD MOBILES – PLANNED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
Preventive Maintenance inspections are not a substitute for MQSA, State, or ACR
inspections or accreditations. However, by routine testing, it is intended to keep the
equipment at a level of performance that will meet or pass an inspection or provide
an indication that service repair should be performed prior to a certified inspection.
7–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
7–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
MAMMOGRAPHY Job Card XPM–700 1 of 9
job card: MAMMO
subassembly: MAMMOGRAPHY date: 11/98
purpose: To check out the mammography unit following the time: 1 hour and 30 min.
guidelines found within this procedure.
PREREQUISITES
Hand tools Vacuum
Rags RMI–156 phantom
LPS or STP (lubricant) Cassette
Formula 409 (cleaning solution) etc. Light field edge markers
20 lp/mm Phantom 12 sheets of .5 cm Plexiglas
Bathroom weight scale
TASK DESCRIPTION
Safety/Functional
1.0 500T/600T Senix
For counterweight cable inspection reference Illustrations 1, 2, and 3.
700T/800T
For counterweight belt inspection reference Illustration 4.
DMR
For gas piston inspection reference Illustration 5.
2.0 Counterweight Cable Safety Latches 500T/600T/Senix

Check safety dog rails for any signs of engagement. Check teeth of the safety dogs
for metal chips. See Item 2 on Illustration 1 which details the Sengograph
safety dogs.
3.0 Safety and Interlock Switches
500T/600T/Senix
Verify the safety switch operation that is on the bottom of the movable column.
All Units
Verify operation of the movable column end of travel switches, for both “UP” and
“DOWN” movements.
Verify emergency “OFF” switch operation, some units have more than one switch.
Verify column movements are disabled with compression applied.
7–1
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: MAMMO Job Card XPM–700 2 of 9
4.0 Electrical Cables and Harnesses

Check all exposed cables and harnesses for strain relief, cuts and proper routing.
NOTE: On Senovision pay specific attention to the detector cable for bends, kinks
and coupling.
5.0 Lead Glass Shield Condition
Check for cracks and verify secure mounting.
6.0 Transport Modification “MOBILE VANS ONLY”

Verify that all parts are present and functional.
Verify the truck isolation instructions are clearly displayed.
7.0 Lock Operation

Verify all switches and locks are functional.
Verify proper operation of the DMR gantry arm for the Stereotx angle movements.
On the DMR verify proper operation of the grid locking lever.
On the 700T/800T/DMR verify proper operation of the Mag platform latch.
8.0 Column Drive Operation

Verify smooth movement of the column drive. Ascent and descent total travel times
should be equal within 2 seconds.
9.0 Compression Paddle Condition

Check the paddles for any signs of cracks or fractures. Check each paddle for
mechanical tightness on its mounting bracket.
10.0 Compression Operation

500T/600T/Senix
Verify with maximum compression applied, the gauge reads 2 bars or customer’s
setting.
Verify pneumatic compression gauge contains fluid and there are no signs of
leakage.
500T/TS (manual compression)

Verify ease of movement fully up and fully down.
Verify the ability to hold a minimum force of compression of 25 lbs.
7–2
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
700T/800T/DMR
Verify accuracy of the force of compression display utilizing bathroom weight scale.
NOTE: 1 decanewton = 2.2 lbs
All Units
Verify breast thickness scale or indicator for accuracy.
Verify maximum force of compression does not exceed the MQSA or local limits.
11.0 Operator Controls, Lamps and Indicators

All Senographe Units
Inspect all visual displays and indicators for burnt lamps and for defective display
segments.
Verify operator warning label is present.
Verify proper operation of the prep and exposure switches.
Dataflash
Verify proper operation by flashing a film and checking for legible characters.
Stereotx
Inspect lamps and indicators.
Inspect control knobs to ensure there is no mechanical slippage.
Senovision
Verify UPS indicators are functional.
Inspect detector water circulation systems reservoir for proper water level.
12.0 Bucky Operation

Verify grid movement during an exposure for all buckys.
Verify cassette in place, stops are secured and functional for every bucky and
cassette holder.
Check all buckys for any signs of cracked, broken, loose or missing parts.
Check for absence of grid line artifacts by exposing a film utilizing 3 cm of Plexiglas
and a technique of 26 kVp in AEC mode of operation. Repeat for 2nd bucky.
13.0 Collimation
Verify that an exposure is inhibited when the collimation diaphragm is removed.
On 500T/600T/Senix, verify that MO and AL indicators are lit when MO and AL filters
are selected, respectively.
Verify exposure is inhibited when the MO filter is in the beam and 37 kVp or above is
selected. On the DMR verify that the MO filter cannot be selected with
36 kVp or higher displayed on the console.
7–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Verify x–ray field coincidence with the light field using a RAT pattern or as an
alternate method strips of solder or Allen wrenches to mark the edges of the
light field on top of a cassette. Taking an exposure of the cassette and
processing the film will show any errors.
Verify x–ray beam centering to the bucky by observing the light field. This should be
done for each bucky and cassette holder.
14.0 AEC Performance (Benchmark Test)

Make an AEC exposure of the RMI–156 phantom with the phototimer sensor cell in
the middle position, which should center it under the center of the phantom.
Use the technique factors that the customer would normally use for a 4.2 cm
breast. If unable to determine what technique factors the customer normally
uses, select 26 kVp. Record the technique factors: kVp and mAs on the Data
Record.
Determine the number of visualized Specks, Fibrils and masses and record the
results on the Mammography Data Record. Minimum visualization
requirements are noted on the Data Record.
Measure the optical density of the RMI–156 phantom by measuring 50 mm in from
the chest–wall edge of the film. Record this data on the Mammography Data
Record.
Take 5 AEC exposures utilizing the same cassette each time, at the following
techniques to determine proper calibration of the Reciprocity Law of Failure
and kVp compensation circuitry. Record the results on the Mammography
Data Record.
25 kVp with 4cm of Plexiglas

The total variation of optical density on the above 5 films should not exceed .2
optical density.
NOTE 1: For 500T/600T three phase systems 5.0 cm or 5.5 cm of Plexiglas may be
used in place of the 6 cm exposure due to the 250 mAs backup time limitation.
NOTE 2: For non–GE systems, refer to OEM technical documentation.
7–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 1
SENOGRAPHE SENIX HF
7–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 2
SENOGRAPHE SENIX HF
7–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 3
SENOGRAPHE SENIX HF
7–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 4
COUNTERWEIGHT BELT
Y
X Y
X Y
7–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 5
GAS PISTON
7–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: “R” OUTPUT
purpose: Check tube condition and the “R” output time: 10 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: “R” meter
1/8I lead
TASK DESCRIPTION
Setup:
Select non–phototime
30 kVp
100 mAs
Moly filter
Install 13 by 18 cm diaphragm
Place 1/8I lead over photo detector area
Place the RAD probe on film holder laterally centered and 5 cm from the front
Compression paddle removed
NOTE: Perform the calibration section XPM 706 before testing the “R” output.
Procedure:
Take an exposure and take note of the “R” output. Wait one minute between exposures.
Take a second exposure. Take note of the “R” output. The output should be within
+.1R between exposures. Compare the “R” output with the original value at the time
the tube was installed, or from the first PM Data Record sheet after the tube was
installed. Calculated the % tube output drop off:
% tube output drop off =
(original tube output – actual tube output) / original tube output
If the % tube output drop off is greater than 20% the X–ray tube should be replaced.
Record the output value in the data sheet.
NOTE: For non–GE systems, refer to OEM technical documentation.
7–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FOCAL SPOT RESOLUTION LIMIT
subassembly: SENOGRAPHE 500T AND 600T date: 11/98
purpose: Measure the resolution limit of the focal spots and time: 15 –30 min.
compare values obtained with the rated values
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Densitometer
Test cassette
Test diaphragm
500T/600T/Senix for 0.3 mm focal spot CG 45203497
700T/800T for 0.3 mm focal spot 2149719
Test diaphragm
500T/600T/Senix for 0.1 mm focal spot CG 45203500
700T/800T for 0.1 mm focal spot 2149718
Test diaphragm for the DMR 0.1 mm and 0.3 mm 36003565
Star pattern for 0.3 mm focal spot (1.5) 46–193546P3
Star pattern for 0.1 mm focal spot (0.5) 46–194427P266
30 cm rule
Calculator
1/2 cm Plexiglas block (up to 9 required) 46–286893P1
20 lp/mm test pattern 2201612
NOTE: As per MQSA recommendations, until 10/28/2002, star pattern resolution

measurement methods can be utilized; after 10/28/2002 the lp/mm test pattern testing
method should be used although star pattern measurements can be utilized to isolate cause
of poor lp/mm resolution.
TASK DESCRIPTION lp/mm TEST PATTERN
Description of Operations
Focal Spot Width
Place the lp/mm test pattern 4.5 cm above the image receptor either by placing the pattern
on 4.5 cm of Plexiglas, or by placing the pattern on the compression plate and
positioning the compression plate in order to achieve a 4.5 cm distance. Position the
line pair pattern within 1 cm of the chest wall edge of the image receptor and
centered laterally. With the line pairs running parallel to the anode cathode axis,
expose a film to produce a background density of between 1.2 and 1.6. This will
represent the limiting spatial resolution for the width of the focal spot and should be
greater than 13 lp/mm. Measure and record the results in the Mammography Data
Record sheet for all large focal spot and target material combinations. Repeat the
above test on a magnification stand of 1.5 mag for all target and small focal spot
combinations.
7–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FOCAL SPOT RESOLUTION LIMIT Job Card XPM–704 2 of 5
Focal Spot Length

Observe the setup procedure for the focal spot width with the exception of positioning the
pattern lines running perpendicular to the anode cathode axis. Expose a film to
produce a background density of between 1.2 and 1.6. This will represent the limiting
spatial resolution for the length of the large focal spot and should be greater than 11
lp/mm. Measure and record the Results in the Mammography Data Record sheet for
all large focal spot and target material combinations. Repeat the above test on a
magnification stand of 1.5 mag for all target and small focal spot combinations.
NOTE: On the DMR repeat the above procedures for the Rhodium track and record the
results in the Mammography Data Record sheet.
TASK DESCRIPTION STAR PATTERN

Description Of Operations
1. If this is the first maintenance inspection (reference test) or if the tube has just been
changed, go to the next paragraph (2).
If this is a periodic maintenance check, go to paragraph 11.

Determining Constants
2. Insert the test diaphragm for the 0.3 mm focal spot (without the test pattern) and
select the 0.3 focal spot.
3. Remove the bucky.
4. Place the test cassette equipped with a film on top of the film holder assembly (and
not in the Bucky) and center it with respect to the light image from the diaphragm
opening.
5. Display a high voltage value of 26 kV and 4 mAs, then make an exposure. Adjust the
mAs or kVp for an acceptable density in order to visualize the blurring area.
6. Position the test diaphragm for a 0.1 mm focal spot (without the test pattern), and
select the 0.1 focal spot.
7. Place the test cassette equipped with a film on top of the film holder assembly and
center it with respect to the light image from the diaphragm opening.
8. Display a high voltage of 26 kV and 4 mAs, then make an exposure. Adjust the mAs
or kVp for an acceptable density in order to visualize the blurring area.
7–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Magnification Measurement
9. Carefully measure the diameter of the image of the circular opening of each test
cassette on the exposures obtained.
10. Calculate magnification M:
image diameter
M=
opening diameter
Star Pattern Exposures
11. Position the test diaphragm for a 0.3 mm focal spot equipped with the corresponding
star pattern (1.5) in such a way that the beam axes are parallel to the sides of the
image receptor support.
NOTE: If the support and pattern assembly does not fit through the opening in
the housing, it will be necessary to remove the spacer, move the diaphragm to
the half–way travel point under the pattern, insert the pattern through the now
unobstructed opening under the mirror and slide the pattern along the top of
the diaphragm to its insertion point.
WARNING: Be careful not to touch the mirror.
12. Make an exposure in the same conditions as before and with the same technique
factors as in the reference test.
13. Position the test diaphragm for a 0.1 mm focal spot equipped with the corresponding
star pattern (0.5) and make an exposure in the same conditions as before and with
the same technique factors as in the reference test.
Focal Spot Measurement
14. Measure diameter D in the middle of distortion area on each of the two exposures.
NOTE: The distortion (or blurring) area on the pattern image is the area where
the pattern sector contrasts are reversed.
If several areas of this type exist on the same axis, the diameter to be
measured corresponds to the area furthest from the center.
As the effective focal spot is not a perfect square, the diameter value is not
the same on both axes. The higher value should be retained.
15. Note the D values to be applied to the following formulas (steps 16 through 18).
7–13
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Calculating Focal Spot Dimensions

16. Use the formula below to calculate the dimension of the 0.3 mm focal spot (1.5
pattern)
D
F(1.5) =
38.20 x (M–1)
and record the result obtained in Mammo Data Sheet.
17. Calculate the dimensions of the 0.1 mm focal spot in the same way (0.5 pattern)
D
F(0.5) =
114.59 x (M–1)
18. In 1_ Star Pattern use the following formula:
D
F(1.0) =
57.30 x (M–1)
The generic formula where:
F = focal spot size
D = blurring diameter
M = magnification from pattern to film
0 = star pattern angle in degrees
D
F=
180 0 X M–1
p
7–14
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Decisions (All Systems)

19. Large focal spot (0.3 mm): if the effective focal spot dimension measured exceeds
.45 mm, consult with customer about replacement of X–ray tube.
20. Small focal spot (0.1 mm): if the effective focal spot dimension measured exceeds
.15 mm, consult with customer about replacement of X–ray tube.
21. Below is a chart referencing focal spot length corrections needed when measuring
the focal spot with the testing apparatus placed at the chest wall (i.e., pinhole
camera, slit camera, or star pattern placed at the chest wall when not utilizing the star
pattern holder). These correction factors do not apply to the focal spot width
measurement.
System Focal Spot A B T Correct Factor

DMR Large 0 20 22.5 0.894
DMR Small 0 6 13.5 0.448
500/600/700/800 Large 0 12 22.5 0.543
500/600/700/800 Small –9 7.5 22.5 0.559
A = target angle
B = reference axis angle
T = tilt angle
Note: For non–GE systems, refer to OEM specifications and tolerances.
7–15
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CALCULATION OF AVERAGE GLANDULAR DOSE
purpose: Perform only if required by state regulations time: 15 min.
TOOLS REQUIRED
RMI 156 Phantom
Radiation meter with mammo probe
mAs meter
Aluminum filter kit 46–303879G1
TASK DESCRIPTION
CALCULATION OF AVERAGE GLANDULAR DOSE
The following table (Table 1) taken from the ACR Mammography Quality Control Manual,
page 163, shall be used to calculate the estimated average glandular dose for the
cranid- caudad projection in your facility after the free–in–air exposure measurements
have been made:
7–16
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CALCULATION OF AVERAGE

GLANDULAR DOSE Job Card XPM–705 2 of 3
TABLE 1
GLANDULAR DOSE (IN MRAD) FOR 1 ROENTGEN ENTRANCE EXPOSURE
4.2 CM BREAST THICKNESS – 50% ADIPOSE/50% GLANDULAR BREAST TISSUE
Mo/Mo Target–Filter X–Ray Tube Voltage (kVp) W/Al Target-
g
Filt
Filter
HVL 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Combination
0.23 116
0.24 121 124
0.25 126 129 131
0.26 130 133 135 138
0.27 135 138 140 142 143
0.28 140 142 144 146 147 149
0.29 144 146 148 150 151 153 154
0.30 149 151 153 155 156 157 158 159 170
0.31 154 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 164 175
0.32 158 160 162 163 164 166 167 168 168 170 171 180
0.33 163 165 166 168 169 170 171 173 173 174 175 185
0.34 168 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 190
0.35 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 194
0.36 179 181 182 183 184 185 185 186 187 199
0.37 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 191 204
0.38 190 191 192 193 194 195 195 208
0.39 196 197 198 198 199 200 213
0.40 201 202 203 204 204 217
0.41 206 207 208 208 221
0.42 211 212 212 225
0.43 215 216 230
0.44 220 234
0.45 238
Example:
1. The free–in–air exposure measurement at 4.2 cm was measured to be 500 mR at
26 kVp.
2. The system has a molybdenum target and an HVL equivalency of .31 mm Al.
3. The compressed breast thickness is 4.2 cm.
4. Table 3.3 shows the relationship between average glandular dose per unit exposure
in air (rad/Roentgen). Therefore:
1R .159 rad 79.5 mRad/projection is the average
500 mR X X =
1,000 mR R glandular dose received by the patient
7–17
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: CALCULATION OF AVERAGE

GLANDULAR DOSE Job Card XPM–705 3 of 3
DETERMINING AVERAGE GLANDULAR DOSE ON AEC EQUIPPED SYSTEMS

Equipment set–up:
Install the 18 x 24 bucky (with the 18 x 24 diaphragm if applicable).
For the DMR and 700T/800T disable auto decompression.
Place the image receptor at maximum SID.
Position the photocell under the center of the RMI phantom with the phantom shifted slightly
to the left of the image receptor to allow proper placement of the radiation probe.
Ensure that the phantom is covering the AEC sensor (see Illustration 1).
Place the mammo radiation probe 4 cm in from the chest wall edge of the image receptor
with the red line of the probe centered to the top of wax insert (a piece of foam can
be used to place under the probe for ease of setup). Bring paddle into contact with
the probe (see Illustration 1).
Turn collimator lamp on to ensure the light field is covering the entire phantom and probe.
For systems not equipped with a mAs meter, install a meter in order to record the mAs.
Calculate the half layer of the x–ray beam utilizing the aluminum filter kit and with 30 kVp
and MO/MO target filter combination. This is determined by the amount of additional
aluminum filtration placed in the x–ray beam to reduce the output exposure rate by
50%. Record the results in the Mammography Data Record sheet.
Command an exposure at the nominal kVp to determine the exposure rate value of a
average compressed 4.2 cm breast (RMI 156 phantom).
Use Table 1 and the formula in the Example above to calculate the average glandular dose.
Record the results in the Mammography Data Record sheet.
ILLUSTRATION 1
BREAST ENTRANCE EXPOSURE
7–18
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
GENERATOR CALIBRATION Job Card XPM–706 1 of 8
job card: GENERATOR CALIBRATION – MAMMO
subassembly: MAMMO date: 11/98
purpose: Generator calibration time: 1 hour
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Storage scope
Fluke 87 DVM
mAs meter
Keithley 35080 Divider or equivalent non–invasive kVp device
RMI 232 Mammo Divider or equivalent non–invasive kVp device
Coaxial cable
BNC to banana jack adapter (for Fluke 87)
TASK DESCRIPTION
KVP
Verify KVP’s utilizing either Procedure # 1 RMI 232 Mammo Divider or Procedure # 2 per
Keithley application note #K–104.
NOTE: If any problems are encountered or the results are questioned, refer to the
appropriate service manual, using the HV bleeder.
MA/MAS
On the Senix / DMR, connect the mAs meter in place of the mA jumper located on the HV
Transformer PC Board.
On the 700T / 800T, connect the mAs meter to TP40 and TP39 ensuring to remove strap
SK1 on PC Board. 300PL8.
On the 500T / 600T 3 phase systems, connect the mAs meter in the mA make/break jacks
located in the chassis on the front of the unit.
Select 30 kVp and perform exposures at 20 mAs, 40 mAs, 80 mAs, 100 mAs and 160 mAs.
Record the results in the Mammography Data Record Sheet.
Specifications:
SENOGRAPH 3 PHASE
22–49 kVP + 10% kVp
4–800 mAs + 5% mAs
SENIX HF / 700T / 800T / DMR
22–49 kVp + 2% kVp
4–600 mAs + 5% + 1 mAs
7–19
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: GENERATOR CALIBRATION – MAMMO Job Card XPM–706 2 of 8
PROCEDURE # 1
KVP MEASUREMENTS WITH RMI 232
RMI 232 Setup:
1. Install meter as per Illustration 1.

2. Perform exposures at 25/26, 28, 30 and 35/36 kVp, 50 mAs and record the results in the
PM Data Record Sheet.
PROCEDURE # 2
Application Note
KVP MEASUREMENTS WITH THE KEITHLEY MODEL 35080
No. K–104 REV 21/89
The following procedure is detailed so the first–time user can achieve good results. An
experienced user will be able to take many shortcuts. The 35080 with the mammo
kVp option is for use on molybdenum anode, beryllium window tubes only.
ILLUSTRATION 1 ILLUSTRATION 2
SETUP 35080 REPOSITION 35080
7–20
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
K–EDGE MEASUREMENT
35080 Divider Setup
1. Remove the cone.

2. Remove the compression paddle, turn it upside down and re–install.
3. On the 700T/ 800T and DMR disable the auto decompression in the maintenance menu.
4. Place the 35080 (with K–edge filter pack) on top of the compression paddle as close as
possible to the X–ray tube.
5. Level the 35080. (The 35080 must be at right angles to the tube axis. See Illustration 1.)
Oscilloscope Setup
1. Connect the 35080 to the scope using a shielded cable.

2. Set the vertical sensitivity to 0.5 volts per division.
3. With the input in the GROUND position, adjust the vertical position control to place the
trace on the bottom graticule line.
4. Set the scope up in the single trace, storage mode.
5. Place the input selector switch in the DC position.
Fluke 87 DVM Setup

1. Connect the 35080 to the Fluke voltage input, using a BNC to banana jack adapter and a
shielded cable.
2. Select the 4 volt range on the Fluke DVM (do not use the auto range function).
3. Set the Fluke into 100 ms record mode (push and hold the min–max button until a tone is
heard).
4. Press the min–max button in order to display the max function on the DVM display.
NOTE: When using the Fluke 87 DVM in the min–max function, each progressive
reading must be greater than the prior in order for the meter to capture a higher max
input. Therefore if an exposure is repeated at the same KVP, or the next exposure is at a
lower KVP than the prior exposure, the 100ms record mode must be exited then
reentered on the Fluke meter, again ensure the meter is not in the auto range mode.
K–Edge Measurement Procedure
Part A
1. Set the X–ray generator for 25 kVp, and 40 – 60 mAs.

2. Select the Mo (molybdenum) filter.
3. Make an exposure.
4. Measure the peak voltage and record in box A on the accompanying data sheet.
7–21
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Part B
1. Set the generator for 26 kVp and make an exposure.

2. Record this voltage value in box B on the data sheet. (The voltage values, A and B,
should be equal to within + 0.020V; if so, this will be your “BASE VOLTAGE”; if not, then
repeat the above steps, at one kVp lower.)
Part C
1. Set the generator for 29 kVp; make an exposure.

2. Measure the peak voltage. (If this voltage is greater than the “BASE VOLTAGE” by 0.1V
but not greater than 0.25V above the “BASE VOLTAGE,” record in box C. If the voltage
is greater than 0.25 volts above the “BASE VOLTAGE,” repeat this step at one kVp low-
er. If the voltage is not greater than the “BASE VOLTAGE” by 0.1 volts, repeat this step
at one kVp higher.)
Part D
Repeat the last measurement to verify that the generator is repeatable. The voltage reading
should repeat to within 0.020V. If the reading is not repeatable, the generator needs
service.
Part E
1. Subtract the “BASELINE” voltage from the voltage measured in Part C, step 2 (box C).
2. Multiply this voltage by 10, add to 27.0, and record in box D. (This is true kVp for this sta-
tion.)
PROCEED TO LINEAR MEASUREMENT –
DO NOT CHANGE THE GENERATOR SETTINGS
LINEAR MEASUREMENT
35080 Divider Setup
1. Replace the K–EDGE filter pack with the LINEAR filter pack.
2. Reposition the 35080 to approximately 15 inches from the focal spot (see Illustration 2).
Oscilloscope Setup
1. Set the vertical sensitivity to 0.05 volts per division.

2. With the input switch in the GROUND position use the vertical position control to place
the trace on the bottom graticule line.
3. Set scope for single sweep, storage mode,
and in the DC input mode. (Illustrations 3, 4, 5, and 6 show how to read the waveforms.)
7–22
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
7–23
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Fluke 87 DVM Setup
1. Connect the 35080 to the Fluke voltage input, using a BNC to banana jack adapter and a
shielded cable.
2. Select the 4 volt range on the Fluke DVM (Do not use the auto range function).
3. Set the Fluke into 100ms record mode (push and hold the min–max button until a tone is
heard).
4. Press the min–max button in order to display the max function on the DVM display.
NOTE: When using the Fluke 87 DVM in the min–max function, each progressive read-
ing must be greater than the prior in order for the meter to capture a higher max input.
Therefore, if an exposure is repeated at the same kVp, or the next exposure is at a lower
kVp than the prior exposure, the 100ms record mode must be exited then re-entered on
the Fluke meter. Again, ensure the meter is not in the auto range mode.
Linear Measurement Procedure

Part A
1. With the generator settings used for K–EDGE measurement above make an exposure.
2. Record the voltage in box E, then multiply the voltage in box E by 100 and record as
KVP in box F.
Part B
1. Subtract the kVP in box F from the KVP in box D. (This will be the “CORRECTION
VALUE” applied to all KVP measurements made with the LINEAR FILTER pack.)
2. Insert this value in all spaces in the column labeled “CORRECTION VALUE.”
NOTE: This value may be either positive or negative.
Part C
1. Measure other KVP values as desired.

2. Enter the voltage in the “LINEAR VOLTAGE” column on the data sheet; multiply by 100.
3. Enter the KVP value in the “LINEAR KVP” column.
4. Apply the CORRECTION VALUE to all kVp’s by either adding to or subtracting from the
“LINEAR KVP” column, and record the results in the “CORRECTED KVP” column. (This
column now has the true kVp value for all kVp’s measured.)
Part D
If the position of the 35080 changes during the linear kVp measurement, you must repeat
the measurement starting with Part C: some of the correction value is positional depen-
dent.
7–24
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Model 35080 Mammographic Worksheet

(Example)
Set K Edge
K–Edge True Linear Linear Correction Corrected
kVp Voltage kVp Voltage kVp Value kVp
22 — — 0.213 21.3 +0.8 22.1
23 — — 0.221 22.1 +0.8 22.9
24 — — 0.230 23.0 +0.8 23.8
25 (A) 3.10 0.237 23.7 +0.8 24.5
26 (B) 3.10 — 0.249 24.9 +0.8 25.7
27 — — 0.255 25.5 +0.8 26.3
28 — — 0.267 26.7 +0.8 27.5
29 (C) 3.26 (D) 28.6 (E) 0.278 (F) 27.8 +0.8 28.6
30 — — 0.287 28.7 +0.8 29.5
31 — — 0.299 29.9 +0.8 30.7
32 — — 0.308 30.8 +0.8 31.6
33 — — 0.319 31.9 +0.8 32.7
34 — — 0.33 33.0 +0.8 33.8
35 — — 0.342 34.2 +0.8 35.0
36 — — 0.351 35.1 +0.8 35.9
NOTE: For non–GE systems, use OEM specific documentation if required.
7–25
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Model 35080 Mammographic Worksheet
Set K Edge
K–Edge True Linear Linear Correction Corrected
kVp Voltage kVp Voltage kVp Value kVp
22 — —
23 — —
24 — —
25 (A) —
26 (B) —
27 — —
28 — —
29 (C) (D) (E) (F)
30 — —
31 — —
32 — —
33 — —
34 — —
35 — —
36 — —
NOTE: For non–GE systems, use OEM specific documentation if required.
7–26
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
RAD MOBILES Job Card XPM–750 1 of 6
job card: RAD MOBILES – PLANNED MAINTENANCE
purpose: To perform a Planned Maintenance on a time:

radiographic portable x–ray unit.
Applies to:
RAD MOBILES (PORTABLES)
Special Tools / Supplies:
Hand tools, Vacuum, Rags, DVM, LPS or STP (lubricant), Scope, Formula
409 (cleaning solution), HV Bleeder or Keithley, mAs meter, oscilloscope,
refer to XPM–364.
PREREQUISITES
None.
TASK DESCRIPTION
1.0 Brakes
Verify that the brakes operate correctly and that they do not grab or pull the unit to one side
when they engage.
2.0 Bumpers
Verify that the rubber bumper material is in place and that it is in good condition around the
unit.
Verify that the collision interlock is operational.
3.0 Safety
Care must be taken when working inside the column or with counterweight
CAUTION cables.
Counterweight cable inspection:

1. Remove the cable inspection port cover at the base of the column, if applicable.
2. Remove the trim cover at the top of the column, if applicable.
3. Move the horizontal member carriage from one end of the column to the other. Check
with a rag of soft cloth for flaws in the cable. After verifying the condition of the
cables, lubricate. If there are any questions concerning counterweight cables, refer to
Service Note 1625 in Tab 10 of this manual.
4. Verify cable replacement if specified in service manual.
5. Check the mounting bolts for security that holds the vertical column in place.
6. Check all assembly hardware and bolts.
7. Check safety mechanism or secondary unloaded cable, as applicable.
8. Check column parking latch assembly and any drive or exposure interlocks.
7–27
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RAD MOBILES – PLANNED MAINTENANCE Job Card XPM–750 2 of 6
4.0 Check drawer mounting

Verify that the mounting hardware that holds the drawer in place is secure and adjusted
correctly so that the door opens and closes easily and will not inadvertently fall out.
5.0 Verify motor drive
Verify that the unit drives properly in all directions, forward–reverse and that it turns freely to
the right or the left.
6.0 Inspection of the wheels and castors
Check for nicks and/or flat spots on the wheels and casters that are excessive. Also check
the wheels for any string, cloth or other material that may have become wrapped
around them.
Check all mounting hardware that holds the wheels in place for tightness.
Lubricate if necessary.
7.0 Inspect handswitch
Verify that all exposure switches are functional.
Verify that releasing the exposure switch terminates the exposure.
8.0 Batteries
Ni–Cad Batteries
Check that the batteries have had an annual equalization, and check the fluid level
semi–annually. Verify that the battery charger turns off at the correct voltage stated in
the service manual.
Lead–Acid and Gel Cell Batteries
Gel Cell batteries do not require annual equalization and charger shut off voltage is
established in firmware or should be checked according to the service manual. Some
chargers work continuously when plugged in.
1. Check battery terminals and wires. Clean any corrosion, tighten any loose
connections.
2. Check voltage of each battery, all voltages should be nearly the same, a battery with
lower voltage may indicate a shorted cell or failing battery.
3. Perform a charger calibration sequence as directed in the service manual. Check for
the operation of the exhaust fan during a battery recharge is the unit has a fan.
4. If the batteries are in question, perform a load test as directed in the service manual.
5. Keep unit plugged in when not in use.
7–28
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
9.0 kVp and mAs
1. Install the HV bleeder (or Keithley) and verify the kVp at 60, 80, 100 and 120 or highest
selectable kVp.
2. Verify the mA/mAs by installing a mA meter (or mAs meter) in the unit and reading the
mA )or mAs) as applicable.
3. Check the exposure time with a scope and verify it is within the acceptable limits. If there
are any questions, refer to the service manual.
4. Verify that the filament voltage is optimized as shown in Illustration.
MA WAVEFORM
Upper Trace: Filament voltage too high
and regulator pulling down or filament
voltage normal but regulator pulling
down improperly.
Center Trace: Filament voltage correct
and mA regulator adjusted correctly.
Lower Trace: Filament voltage too low

and mA regulator pulling up or
filament voltage normal but regulator
pulling up improperly.
NOTE: On some systems, mA and time are not meaningful to measure. Verify the mAs
meter (mAs timer) calibration as directed in the service manual.
10.0 Phototimer
1. Position the x–ray tube 40 inches above the floor.

2. Place the cassette on the floor centered in the exposure area with one sheet of copper
and one sheet of aluminum (alternately either 9 inches of water or 8 inches of acrylic)
above the probe on top of the cassette.
3. Select 80 kVp and 100 mAs as a backup.
4. Expose the cassette and process the film.
5. Record the density in the data sheets.
7–29
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
OEM additional procedures:
1. Siemens products: Mobilett, Mobilett II, Plus, XT (1.0v = 15 kV).

2. Verify the rubber bumper material is intact which holds the x–ray tube assembly in park
position.
3. Check exposure time at 75% of high tension measured on D11 board test point “KV”.
Check the following settings:
KV mAs T (ms)
40 10.0 27
85 8.0 28
90 100.0 640
133 3.2 19
4. Check and tighten all terminal strip connections.
5. Check swivel lock mechanism at the x–ray tube assembly for proper operation.
6. CAUTION: When within proximity of capacitor discharge banks – contained within
the main body – use the discharge switch S10 to discharge these capacitors. The
capacitors will hold a charge indefinitely. Turn S10 discharge to normal position
(OFF) after service, otherwise error #16.
Unit Capacitor banks discharge in 12 minutes. Measure at TP.D7 + and –.
7. After capacitors are discharged, pull out the modules and check for blown capacitor fuses.
CAUTION: If a capacitor fuse is blown, the capacitor section is fully charged.
8. Calibration of generator is performed according to Installation and Adjustment instruc-
tions R81–060.033.03.01.05 and Service instructions R81–060.061.03.02.02.
7–30
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Notes:
i16 service switch assembly under CPU cover on D11 board.

Normal configuration:
On Off
1 16
service switch 1 normally off
switch 2 on
switch 3 on
tryout switch 4 normally off
i16 switch 5 on
switch 6 off
switch 7 off
switch 8 off
8 9
Service switch #4: Tryout programs Most useful

program 1 is filament circuit. checks CPU function
program 2 is A–D converter and MUX decimal.
program 3 is A–D converter and MUX hexadecimal.
program 4 is capacitor charging and measuring circuit. checks ca.p charging
program 5 is display circuit. checks displays
program 6 is monitoring circuit for display checks displays
program 7 is readout of RAM data.
program 8 is memory for error and symbol codes. error codes for service
program 9 is erasing the error memory contents. error erase after
service
program 10 is capacitor formation. CAUTION – see below
do not use program 10 unless unit has been out of service for a long time
NOTE: Ensure service .1 and .4 are switched back to normal after service.
7–31
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
This page intentionally left blank.
7–32
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
RADIOGRAPHIC PORTABLES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–800 RAD MOBILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
XPM–850 FLUORO MOBILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10
8–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
8–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
RADIOGRAPHIC PORTABLES Job Card XPM–800 1 of 9
job card: RAD MOBILES
subassembly: RAD MOBILES date: 11/98
purpose: To perform a PM on a radiographic portable. time: 2 hours
PREREQUISITES
Hand tools Vacuum
Rags DVM
LPS or STP (lubricant) Scope
Formula 409 (cleaning solution) HV Bleeder
TASK DESCRIPTION
1.0 Brakes
Verify that the brakes operate correctly and that they do not grab or pull the unit to
one side when they engage.
2.0 Bumpers
Verify that the rubber bumper material is in place and that it is in good condition
around the unit.
Verify that the collision interlock is operational where applicable.
3.0 Safety
CAUTION: Care must be taken when working inside the column or with
counterweight cables. For non–GE systems, refer to XPM–750 para 3.0.
Counterweight cable inspection AMX–110, II & III, Steps 1, 2, 3, 4, & 7; AMX–4 &
AMX–4+, Steps 2, 3, 5 & 8.
1. Remove the cable inspection port cover at the base of the column.
2. Remove the trim cover at the top of the column, if applicable.
3. Move the horizontal member carriage from one end of the column to the other.
Check with a rag or soft cloth for flaws in the cable. After verifying the
condition of the cables, lubricate. If there are any questions concerning
counterweight cables, refer to Service Note 1625 in Section 10.
4. Verify cable replacement 3 year interval for AMX–110, II, III.
5. Verify cable replacement 5 year interval for AMX–4 & AMX–4+.
6. Check the mounting bolts for security that holds the vertical column in place.
On the AMX–110, II, and III there are six bolts underneath the unit that help
hold the vertical column in place that must be checked.
7. Check safety mechanism on AMX–110, II, & III.
8. Check secondary unloaded cable on AMX–4 & AMX–4+.
8–1
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: RAD MOBILES Job Card XPM–800 2 of 9
4.0 Check drawer mounting (where applicable)

Verify that the mounting hardware that holds the drawer in place is secure and
adjusted correctly so the door opens and closes easily and will not
inadvertently fall out.
5.0 Verify motor drive
Verify that the unit drives properly in all directions, forward–reverse and that it turns
freely to the right or the left.
Not applicable to VMX and other manually propelled mobile units.
6.0 Inspection of the wheels and casters

Check for nicks and/or flat spots on the wheels and casters that are excessive. Also
check the wheels for any string, cloth, or other material that may have
become wrapped around them.
Check all mounting hardware that holds the wheels in place for tightness; lubricate if
necessary.
Verify the front casters of the AMX–4 are lubricated.
7.0 Inspect handswitch

Verify that all exposure switches are functional.
Verify that releasing the exposure switch terminates the exposure.
Inspect handswitch cable for condition, schedule replacement as necessary.
8.0 Batteries
NOTE: For non–GE systems, refer to XPM–750 para 8.0.
Not applicable to VMX and other mains powered mobile units.
AMX–110, II, and III with Ni–Cad Batteries
Check that they have had an annual equalization, and check the fluid level
semi–annually. Verify that the battery charger turns off at 130 VDC.
AMX–4 & AMX–4+
Gel cell batteries do not require annual equalization and charger shut off voltage is
established in firmware.
Perform a charger calibration sequence in the service mode.
Enter service mode via the service switch and cycling power.
END SERVC MODE should be displayed.
Press KVP up until calibrate system is displayed.
Press MAS down then KVP up until cal bat charger is displayed.
Follow the AMX–4 calibration direction for charger calibration procedure #3–4 on the
following page.
Check for the operation of the exhaust fan during a battery recharge if the unit has a
fan.
If the batteries are in question, perform a load test as follows.
8–2
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
AMX–110, II & III with GE Gel Cell Kits

Gel cell batteries do not require annual equalization.
Refer to upgrade directions for verification of proper charger shut–off.
Keep unit plugged in when not in use.
Check battery capacity using the AMX–4 battery capacity test on following pages.
Calibrate Charger (AMX–4 & AMX–4+)

DO NOT calibrate charger when batteries are fully charge.
This procedure sets the battery charging rate. Charge rate is set at two voltages measured
across resistor AMX1 A3 R1. Reference Appendix 2 of Direction 46–017206 for side
cover removal.
1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the prompt CAL BATT CHARGER
displays, then press mAs B.
The prompt changes to PLUG IN CHARGER indicating that the battery charge
must be plugged into a convenience outlet.
To exit CAL BATT CHARGER without changing any values, press mAs Y.
The prompt changes to EXITING------ then to CAL BATT
CHARGER indicating charger calibration is not active and another selection
may be made from the main calibration menu.
2. See Illustration 1. Connect a digital volt meter across resistor AMX1 A3 R1. Select a
range that displays 5.00 volts DC.
ILLUSTRATION 1
AMX1A3
J8J9 J2
9
TS1
J11
J5 J6
J3 J7J6
1
AMX1
A3R1 T2
T3 T1
L2
L1
R1
8–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
3. Plug charger cord into a convenience outlet. The prompt changes to

CONVERTING, then to ENTER VALUE, indicating that the battery charge rate
may be set.
4. Match the voltage displayed on the kVp and mAs display with the reading on the
meter.
S Pressing kVp Y increases meter voltage reading.
S Pressing kVp B decreases meter voltage reading.
5. Press mAs B when the displayed voltage is the same as voltmeter voltage.
Display changes to CONVERTING, then changes to ENTER VALUE. The volt
meter reading will change several times during the converting cycle.
6. Repeat step 4 and 5 for the second set point. Display changes to CONVERTING,
then changes to REMOVE CHRG CORD. The volt meter reading will change
several times during the converting cycle. Remove charger cord. The prompt
changes to CAL BATT CHARGER indicating that charger calibration is complete
and another selection may be made from the main calibration menu.
NOTE: If an error message is displayed during CAL BATT CHARGER, record the message
for your reference and press mAs Y to continue.
AMX–4 & AMX4+ BATTERY CAPACITY TEST

To verify the batteries store enough energy to operate within specifications.
Items required: Oscilloscope or a Fluke type DVM with min/max storage capability.
NOTE: Battery voltage must be 113 volts or less to do load test!
Set–up:
Connect an oscilloscope from the circuit breaker to ground.
A Fluke 87 with the min/max setting may also be used in place of the scope.
Procedure:
1. Make exposure at 80 and 100 kVp at about 10 mAs.
2. Read battery voltage and average the ripple at the bottom.
3. Battery voltage should drop about 13 VDC + 10% at 80 kVp.
4. Battery voltage should drop about 16 VDC + 10% at 100 kVp.
5. If voltage drop is too high, replace the batteries.
BATTERY CAPACITY CHECK (AMX–I, II & III)

Not necessary to perform at installation.
Turn main power circuit breaker – ON.
Turn X–ray generator keyswitch – CHARGE.
Connect charger board.
8–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Operation Results Expected Service Reference

1a. Charge battery until charge complete
lamp lights.
1b. Allow battery to rest 30 minutes before
test.
1c. Correct digital voltmeter, 3TB1–27 (+)
and 3TB1–5 (–). Record battery voltage
1d. Select 100 kVp, 100 mAs. Close colli-
mator blades and shield with lead
1e. Take one exposure every minute for 10 Battery voltage should be at If battery voltage is less than
minutes. Do not run rotor more than6 least 112VDC after 10 expo- 112VDC, the battery should
seconds per exposure. Record battery sures with a 1–minute test. be reconditioned as de-
voltage after each exposure, and after scribed in Ch. 6, Sec. 17.
the Wait light turns off.
2a. Select 80 kVp, 200 mAs. Record bat- If voltage drop is excessive,
tery voltage. battery may require recondi-
tioning or may have high re-
sistance terminal connection.
2b. Take an exposure and note battery volt- Battery voltage drop during
age during the exposure. the exposure should be ap-
proximately 22 to 24 volts.
9.0 KVp and mA/mAs for CMX, AMX I, II, III

Install the HV bleeder and verify the kVp at 60, 80, and 100 kVp. Refer to Illustration
3 for the appropriate tolerances.
Keithley with mobile filter pack may also be used, placed as close as possible to the
bottom of the collimator.
Verify the mA/mAs by installing a mA meter in the unit and reading the mA.
Check the exposure time with a scope and verify if it is within the acceptable limits. If
there are any questions, refer to Illustration 3 for tolerances.
Verify that the filament voltage is optimized by referring to Illustration 2 for AMX110
and AMXII.
To verify that filament voltage and mA regulator is optimum, refer to Illustration 2.
Adjustments of 3A2R30 and 3A2R34 are correct if the center scope trace is
obtained when the temporarily installed mA meter reads 100 mA during an
exposure. If more or less than 100 mA is obtained with the trace as shown at
the center of Illustration 2, re–adjust 3A2R34, then re–adjust 3A2R30 to
obtain the center trace. Repeat this procedure until the center trace is
obtained when the x–ray tube current is 100 mA +5%. Record in F3382, Test
22 and F3316.
8–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
ILLUSTRATION 2
PROBE: Top of 3A2C55

GND: Bottom of 3A2C55
H: 20 ms/div
V: 0.2v/div x 10 (Probe)
TRIG: INT, DC, +, Set Point
Upper Trace: Filament voltage too high and
regulator pulling down or filament voltage
normal but regulator pulling down improperly.
Center Trace: Filament voltage correct and
mA regulator adjusted correctly.
Lower Trace: Filament voltage too low and
mA regulator pulling up or filament voltage
normal but regulator pulling up improperly.
When using a Keithley to measure kVp and time, you must install the mobile filter
pack as close as possible to the bottom of the collimator for accurate results.
VMX
Disconnect strap across tpc 90 and tcp 91.

Connect meter across tcp 90 and tcp 91.
Verify mA values.
mAs kVp w/fluke min max
5 125 4.5 6
80 45 72 89
20 125 18 23
10 80 9 11.5
Restore strap when finished.
9.1 KVp and mA/mAs for AMX–4 & AMX–4+

Install the HV bleeder (w/17.5’ Belden cable) to verify the kVp at 60, 80, 100 kVp.
Refer to the Accuracy Tables at the end of XPM–800.
Keithley with mobile filter pack may also be used instead of the HV bleeder. When
using a Keithley to measure kVp, you must install the mobile filter pack as
close as possible to bottom of collimator for accurate results.
MA and time are not meaningful to measure on the AMX–4 or AMX–4+. Instead
perform the mAs calibration.
8–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Calibrate mAs (AMX–4 & AMX–4+)
ILLUSTRATION 3
C6 L3 R5 1 3
R4 R6 R1 K1 5
+
6 2 4
K7 Q3 1 3
T1 K2 5
T2
C4 6 2 4
R3
K3
J2 C3 R2 5 1 3
4 2 6
TP 3 L1 8 6 2 4
Q1 3 1 5 5 1 3
Q2 K6 K4 7
8
6 2 4
TP 4
R7 5 1 3
R8
CR4 8
6 2 4
AMX1A4 K5
1. Press either kVp Y or kVp B until the prompt CALIBRATE MAS

displays, then press mAs B. The prompt changes to INSTALL METER
indicating that mAs may be calibrated.
CAUTION: When installing meter in step 2, make the connection to TP–4
first to prevent shorting TP–3 to ground and tripping the circuit breaker.
2. See Illustration 3. Inject approximately 100 mA into the voltage to frequency
converter by installing an mA meter between AMX1 A4 A2 TP–4 and TP–3.
Select range to display 100 mA DC. Your meter should read between 95 and
105 mA.
Press mAs Y, The prompt changes to CALIBRATING, then to ENTER
VALUE.
3. Match the displayed mAs value with the mA reading on the meter installed in
step 2.
Pressing kVp Y increases display in 0.1 mAs increments.
Pressing kVp B decreases display in 0.1 mAs increments.
4. When displayed mAs and measured mA agree, press mAs B. The prompt
changes to REMOVE METER indicating mAs is set.
5. Confirm mAs metering accuracy by repeating this procedure. Readings in
step 3 should agree within 0.1 mA.
8–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
6. Remove mA meter by removing TP–3 connection first to prevent shorting

TP–4 to ground and tripping the circuit breaker. Press mAs Y. The prompt
changes to CALIBRATE MAS indicating that another selection may be made
from the generator calibration menu.
10.0 Phototimer
Position the x–ray tube 40I above the floor.
Place the cassette on the floor centered in the exposure area with one sheet of
copper and one sheet of aluminum above the probe on top of the cassette.
Select 80 kVp and 100 mAs as a backup.
Expose the cassette and process the film.
Record the density in the data sheets.
8–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
Accuracy Tables
CMX, AMX110, AMX2
mAs Tolerances
1 (+ 40%+ .35 mAs) + .27 mAs
1.5 (+ 33%+ .30 mAs) + .27 mAs
2 (+ 21%+ .32 mAs) + .28 mAs
2.5 to 4 (+ 14%+ .39 mAs) + .30 mAs
5 to 8 (+ 8% + .40 mAs) + .32 mAs
10 (+ 7% + .40 mAs) + .32 mAs
12 to 300 –7% to 10%
kVp
50 to 100 (+(10 kVP +7%))
(–(5 kVp + 7%)) of dial reading after first 20 milliseconds of exposure
50 to 95 (+(20 kVp +7%))
(–(5 kVp + 7%)) of dial reading during first 20 milliseconds of exposure
100 to 110 (+(25 kVp +7%))
(–(5 kVp + 7%)) of dial reading during first 20 milliseconds of exposure
AMX3
mAs
.64 to 1.25 = + 30%
1.6 to 10 = + 20%
.12.5 to 320 = + 12%
kVp
50 to 74 kVp = + (9% + 1 kV)
76 to 125 kVp = + 12% + 2 kV)
AMX–4 & AMX–4+
kVp
+ 8% for first 20 ms of value displayed + + 5% after
mAs
+ 10% of selected
VMX
kVp
+ 5% of the selected value plus 7% meter tolerance (12% globally)
mAs
10% see table in Section 9.0 of this XPM
8–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
FLUORO Job Card XPM–850 1 of 2
job card: FLUORO MOBILES
subassembly: FLUORO MOBILES date: 11/98
purpose: To perform a complete PM on mobile fluoro units. time: 2 hours 30 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tool kit 150 W resistor and 100 W resistor
Rags Keithley kVp meter
Cleaning materials Scope
TASK DESCRIPTION
1.0 Safety/Functional
Check the brakes making sure that they lock and release correctly. Check that the
steering linkage works correctly and does not have excessive play in it.
Check the condition of the wheels, looking for flat spots or chips on the rolling
surfaces that could cause the unit to be hard to move. Also check the wheels
for any string, cloth, or other material that may have become wrapped around
them.
Verify that the unit and the monitor cart both move easily.
Verify that the vertical support motor drive drives the support column “up” and “down”
smoothly and uniformly. While driving the support, listen for any sounds that
could indicate that a bearing or cover is dragging.
Verify that all the locks on the positioning arm work properly. Also check all of the
movements: wigwag, in–out, rotation of horizontal axis, and orbital axis.
2.0 Skin Guard

Verify that is is secured to the unit and note its condition.
Performance
3.0 Ground Fault (if equipped)
Polarix
Verify ground fault detector by connecting the ground fault lead to the unit through a
100 ohm resistor. The detector should not trip.
Connect the fault lead to the unit through a 150 ohm resistor. The fault detector
should trip.
Reset the detector.
8–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: FLUORO MOBILES Job Card XPM–850 2 of 2
Stenoscop
No ground fault check
Accent
No ground fault
4.0 Collimator
Remove the cover on top of the tube assembly. Clean and inspect the collimator and
spot–film mechanics.
Attach the spot–film tray to the intensifier but do not connect the interlock cable.
Insert a cassette and fluoro. As soon as an image is visible on the TV monitor,
release the foot switch.
Process the film and measure the diameter of the exposed area at the curved edged
area. The diameter must be less than the diameter of the image tube.
5.0 Generator Calibration
Verify and record the fluoro kVp, spot–film kVp and spot–film mA for each mA station
at 80 kVp (for Stenoscop and Accent, verify mAs). Position the Keithley on the
top of the tube skin guard and fluoro to verify that the filter pack is centered in
the exposure area. Refer to the Keithley setup section XPM–900 for
reference.
Record the data in the data sheets.
6.0 Spot–Film
Verify the spot–film operation.
Check that spot–films are not made when the spot–film interlock cable is
disconnected and the system returns to fluoro (check Stenoscop and Accent
only if optional cassette holder is present).
7.0 Video Storage

Verify the storage operation by recording an image and viewing the image.
Observe that the image displays properly without tearing.
8–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
8–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
MISCELLANEOUS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
JOB CARD TITLE PAGE
XPM–900 KEITHLEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
XPM–910 STAR PATTERN MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
XPM–930 SERVICE SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8
XPM–940 TOOLS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–11
9–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
9–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
KEITHLEY Job Card XPM–900 1 of 3
job card: KEITHLEY
subassembly: NON–INVASIVE METER/KEITHLEY date: 11/98
purpose: Set–up time: 5 min.
PREREQUISITES
Tools required: Keithley kVp meter 35080, 35080–1, or 35080A
Scope
Coax cable
TASK DESCRIPTION
Battery Check
Turn Keithley knob to “BAT CHECK” position.
The output to the scope should read no less than 7.0 volts. If so, replace the battery.
Cal Check
Install the “test pack” and turn the meter to the “CAL” position.
The output to the scope should read .750 plus or minus 1 percent. A one percent error will
cause a maximum kVp reading error of 0.6 percent. This is a check of the Keithley
calibration.
Set–up
Be sure to use a coax cable to eliminate noise. This will make it much easier to read the kVp
on the scope.
Leave the “test pack” in the Keithley.
Position Keithley perpendicular to the axis of the x–ray tube with the filter pack facing the
x–ray tube. See Set–Up diagram.
Center the filter pack in the exposure area and collimate to an area 1 inch greater than
the filter pack.
Set the SID to approximately 22 inches (no less than 12 inches).
Switch the Keithley to “RUN” mode.
Take an exposure at 200 mA, 100 kVp.
The output should be approximately 3 volts with the “test pack.” This three volts is
independent of the technic used and is used to check the calibration of the scope.
9–1
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: KEITHLEY Job Card XPM–900 2 of 3
Measure kVp
Install a filter pack with a range applicable for the kVp you are testing.
35080 & 35080–1
<70 kV (60 kVp) 50–90 kV pack Zero = 42 kVp

80–125 kV (80 & 120 kVp) 65–135 kV pack Zero = 55 kVp
>130 kV (130 kVp) 75–150 kV pack Zero = 65 kVp
35080A
50 to 150 kVp 50 to 150 kVp pack Zero = 40 kVp

Scope Setting: 05 V/div — 5 kV/div
10 V/div — 10 kV/div
20 V/div — 20 kV/div
Properly position the Keithley each time the filter pack is changed.
Find your base line on the scope. This will be the base kVp or zero kVp that all readings are
added to. Either ground the scope input or turn off the Keithley when setting this
value on the scope. For the new 35080A the zero value is 40 kVp.
Each filter pack has a “CAL” voltage that it will output when the Keithley is switch to the
“CAL” mode. The voltage for the 35080A is .4 volts which represents 80 kVp. You
can use this to check calibration of the scope gain. This can also be used to set a
known base line on the scope to make reading kVps easier at the higher end (i.e.
Baseline = 80 kVp).
Take an exposure and add the “ZERO” value printed on the filter pack to the scope reading
to get the actual kVp value. This is the base level on the scope following the
exposure.
Using the cursors on the storage function of the scope makes reading the kVp easy.
For maximum accuracy you should use the linearity correction curves as printed in the
manual. Each pack has its own correction curve. Add or subtract this value from the
scope reading.
NOTE: On the CMX & AMX, the Keithley must be used with a special Mobile Filter Pack and
placed as close as possible to the bottom of the collimator for accurate results.
9–2
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: KEITHLEY Job Card XPM–900 3 of 3
DO’S AND DON’TS
1. Don’t forget to add the baseline!! Each filter pack has a base kVp that must be
added to the measured value. For the 35080 this is different for each pack. For the
35080A the base value is always 40 kVp.
2. Do place the 35080 at right angles or perpendicular to the tube axis (anode to
cathode). This is to minimize or eliminate the heel effect.
3. Don’t forget to set the “scope input to GND,” or turn OFF the 35080 when you set the
base line or zero point.
4. Do use the linearity correction curves when maximum accuracy is desired. Each filter
pack has its own correction curve.
5. Don’t be alarmed if you see a spike on the leading or training edge of a cine pulse as
it may be an artifact. To test for artifacts, change the source–to–detector distance. If
the spike height changes, it’s not real.
6. Don’t use the ends of the filter pack ranges if it can be avoided as the greatest
linearity correction is required at the ends of the ranges. Select another filter pack
and use the center of its range. If waveform details are important, then use the lowest
range filter pack available.
7. Don’t use the mammo filter pack on a Xerography machine as it has a tungsten
target (and the mammo filter pack is designed for molybdenum targets).
8. Do check the 35080 battery voltage occasionally; the battery voltage should be
greater than 7 volts. Replace the battery if the voltage falls below 7 volts.
9. Do use a shielded cable to connect the 35080 to the scope to minimize noise. This is
especially important with mammo.
10. Do be sure that you have at least 50 mA tube current when you measure mammo
kVp.
11. Don’t forget to check the scope’s calibration using the 35080’s cal voltage.
12. Don’t forget to turn off the 35080 when you are finished to conserve the battery.
9–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
X–RAY STAR PATTERNS Job Card XPM–910 1 of 4
job card: STAR PATTERN MANUAL
purpose: Focal spot measurement time: 30 min.
PREREQUISITES
TASK DESCRIPTION
Physical Description
The Model 07–503 consists of 60 spoke pairs divided into four 15_ sectors. Each spoke
diverges at an angle of 1/2_.
The Model 07–509 consists of 44 spoke pairs divided into four 45_ sectors and diverging at
an angle of 2_ for each spoke.
The Model 07–510 is divided into 90 spoke pairs; each spoke diverges at an angle of 2_.
The Model 07–542 consists of 56 spoke pairs divided into four 28_ sectors and diverging at
an angle of 1_ per spoke.
The Model 07–543 consists of 58 spoke pairs divided into four 35_ sectors. Each spoke
diverges at an angle of 1–1/2_.
Instructions for Use
Focal spot size can be determined with the 07–503, 07–509, 07–510, 07–542, and 07–543
test plates by observing the regions of blurring which occur when the star pattern is
radiographed by an X–ray source of finite dimensions. Radiation from different areas
of the focal spot will cause a periodic blurring of the pattern due to penumbra effects.
Knowledge of the geometric factors and the distance from the center of the pattern to
the region where blurring occurs will permit the calculation of the focal spot size with
the same accuracy as measurements made with a pin hole camera.
NOTE: The minimum focal spot size measurable with the 2_ star is 0.05 cm. For
similar focal spots, a 1.5_ star (07–543), a 1_ star (07–542) or a 0.5_ star (07–503)
should be used
Procedure
1. Mount the star test plate so that the radiographic central ray is perpendicular to the
star pattern and passes through the center of the star. It is usually convenient to tape
the plate directly to the face of the collimator. If an under–the–table tube is being
checked, the test plate can be placed on the table and a test film taken.
9–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: STAR PATTERN MANUAL Job Card XPM–910 2 of 4
2. Place a radiographic file (Direct Film Exposure) at about the same distance from the
test plate as the plate is from the focal spot (this will give a magnification of two) and
align it so that the central ray strikes the center of the film. The film should be parallel
to the test plate. If the blur pattern is too small, magnification can be increased by
moving the film farther from the test plate. If the blur pattern is too large,
magnification can be decreased by moving the film closer to the tube. The film can be
used with a screen or in a cardboard holder. The kV and mA should be comparable
to that used clinically, to get the true focal spot size which is somewhat dependent
upon the electrical factors employed. Recommended technique should be one–half
the maximum mA at 75 kVp. Exposure time will vary according to the film speed
used. The density of the image should be about 1.5.
3. Develop the film. Standard film processing procedures should be followed.
4. Determine the magnification (M) by dividing the diameter of the radiographic image of
the star pattern by the true diameter (45 mm).
5. Scan the star pattern on the radiograph inward from the periphery to find the
outer–most region in which the image of the sectors disappears. This is the region of
zero contrast. Measure the diameter of this region across its greatest extent and also
in perpendicular dimension. Let these diameters be called D1 and D2.
TYPICAL RADIOGRAPHIC OF ZERO CONTRAST AREAS

FOCAL SPOT MEASUREMENT
ANODE
AXIS
FS
9–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
6. The focal spot size corresponding to the individual diameter dimensions can be
determined by formula:
N D
F = ——— ———
57.3 (M–1)
Where:F is the focal spot size in mm.
N is the angle of the star pattern line (which is marked on the test plates,
–0.5 _, –1_, 1.5_, or 2_).
D is the diameter of the zero contrast region in mm.
M is the magnification.
7. For the radiograph shown:
N D
F = ——— ———
57.3 (M–1)
N= 2
53 (mm)
Magnification M = ————— = 1.18
45 mm
(M–1) = 0.19
For the Anode–Cathode Diameter:
Du–d = 28 mm
2 28 mm
Fu–d = ——— ————-
57.3 0.18
Fu–d = 5.4 mm
For the Transverse Diameter:
Da–c = 34 mm
2 34
Fa–c = ——— ————- = 6.6 mm
57.3 0.18
Fu–d = 5.4 mm
Therefore: the Focal Spot is 5.4 mm x 6.6 mm at the kVp and mA SETTING USED.
9–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
8a. Several regions of zero contrast may be found on a single film. It is extremely
important that the largest one be used. If there is any doubt (i.e., the focal spot
calculation yields low values), then a second exposure with a lower magnification
should be taken.
8b. If the test plate is not properly centered, the pattern of the star will appear distorted.
The pattern should be re-aligned and the exposure repeated.
8c. Formula and data presented yields the equivalent homogeneous focal spot size.
RESOLUTION VS. DIAMETER
Diameter (mm)
9–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
COMMON PARTS LIST Job Card XPM–930 1 of 3
job card: SERVICE SUPPLIES
purpose: List of common PM parts and supplies time: .
SERVICE SUPPLIES
ITEM NAME PART NUMBER
Video BNC “T” connector 46–194427P123
75 BNC terminator 46–220383P1
CV Phantom 46–176464G1
Collimator adapter wrench 46–165136P1
Collimator T–handle hex wrench 46–165137P1
48–4 safety spring gauge 46–166137P1
Hew ruler 46–198452P1
HHS test kit 46–177372G1
HV spanner wrench (hex handle) 46–176584P1
HV spanner wrench (bar handle) 507A935G1
TV overlay (14I monitor) 46–219111P1
Silicone grease 46–125224P3
HV transformer oil TO552C
Lubriplate 630AA 46–194427P85
Molykote G–N 81705
Bucky strings (quantity 10) LF46L0520
Tape assembly (collimator) 46–173381G1 wide
Tape assembly (collimator) 46–173381G2
HPR 50 head cleaner 087–007
Bleeder cables C1665A
Loctite sealant 46–170686P2

Loctite 569 (for hydraulics) 46–230614P1
Hydraulic fluid 46–230006P2
Oil (Anderol 757 for laser cam) 46–266975P60
Ty–raps 46–208758P3
Epoxy 46–170096P1
Teflon tape 46–208982P1
RTV sealant 46–170619P1
Contact cement 46–208544P1
Oyster grey paint 46–170653P1
Mist grey paint 46–208777P1
Pearl grey paint 46–170652P1
AMX–4+ grey paint 2180026
9–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: SERVICE SUPPLIES Job Card XPM–930 2 of 3

Laser cam cleaning kit 46–266975P57
(One year supply of: cleaning films,
lint free cloth pads, alcohol pads)
Field service cleaning kit 46–250100G1
Kit contains the following:
Freon TF 46–136315P5
Kimwipes 46–194427P220
Optic pad 46–194427P221
Wet and dry 46–194427P215
Gold wipes 46–194427P216
6 inch swabs 46–194427P217
Brush 46–194427P219
Acid brush 46–194427P218
Alcohol bottle 91 percent 46–183000P164
Lamps
Fluoricon 300
Operator push buttons 46–194037P1
Dial lamps 48818
“Line” lamp 53388
Sentry 3 collimator
Field lamp 50475
63 Spot–Film
Cassette position indicators 46–208634P3
Transfer light 69602
88/85 Spot–Film
Cassette position indicators 46–208634P2
Push button lamps 52916 (50843)?
8835 Spot–Film
Push button lamps 46–214924P6
MPX
Upper display 46–170045P11
Lower push button 52916
MSI/MST
MST/MSI 850 “tech ol” 46–142116G1
MST “ready” MST 850 “sel tech” and “ready” 46–142116G2
MST Power Unit 46–142116G3
MSI Power Unit 46–142116G4
MSI 850 “gen ol” “quant reset” 46–142116G5
MSI 850 “sel oper” 46–154084G1
MSI 1250 “rdy” “sel tech” “sel op” 46–158984G1
MSI 1250 “tech ol” 46–158984G2
9–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: SERVICE SUPPLIES Job Card XPM–930 3 of 3

Lamps
MSI 1250 “gen ol” “quant reset” 46–158984G3
MST “quant reset” “ol reset” 46–208634P4
MSI long fluorescent lamp 69593
MSI short fluorescent lamp 69616
MST “sel op” 69618
MST/MSI “line” 69619
Tube indicator lamp 46–175104G1

AMX 3 lamps 46–170045P13
Cap 35 bulb E5200DB
Stenescope & Senix Lamps

Collimator CGC364327
Push button lamp CGC341955
kVp lamp CG99183994
9–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
PM TOOL LIST Job Card XPM–940 1 of 2
job card: TOOLS REQUIRED
purpose: List of PM tools time: .
TOOLS REQUIRED
The following tools are required in addition to the basic hand tools normally carried by the
field engineer.
RAD SYSTEMS
Storage scope
DVM
Keithley or equivalent
CV Phantom (need Cu and Al)
Densitometer
Sensitometer
Tomo Phantom (Tomo systems only)
Vacuum
Cleaning supplies (rags, state 999, oil, etc.)
10I x 12I paper cassette or equivalent
R&F AND VASCULAR SYSTEMS
All items in the RAD system are required in addition to the following:
Digital phantom (digital systems only)
Radiation meter
Hi contrast mesh phantom (resolution mesh pattern)
Optics cleaning supplies (lens tissue, brush, compressed air or equivalent, etc.)
10I x 12I paper cassette
Dale 600 leakage meter
MAMMOGRAPHY
Rags/soft cloth or equivalent
STP/Waymat oil or other high viscosity lubricant
Star Pattern 1.5 degree — 46–193546P3
Star Pattern 0.5 degree — 46–194427P266
Keithley non–invasive kVp meter
DVM: .1 mm Focal Spot Test Diaphragm — CG45203500
.3 mm Focal Spot Test Diaphragm — CG45203497
“R” Meter with Mammography Probe
RMI–156 Phantom
Densitometer
Sensitometer
Storage Scope
Dale 600 leakage meter
9–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
PLANNEDMAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
15
REV 19
DIRECTION
46–019510
REV
job card: TOOLS REQUIRED Job Card XPM–940 2 of 2
OPTIONAL TOOLS
Gray scale generator 2131805
VIC extender board 46–232194G1
MS90 adapter 131806 (for gray scale generator)
IQST phantom 2182204
IQST 40 cm holder 2182207–3
IQST 32 cm holder 2182207–2
IQST 22 cm holder 2182207
IQST SFD holder 2194911
DVM lead set 46–194427P258
MPX data transfer tool 2159747
9–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
SERVICE NOTES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NO. TITLE PAGE
SN 80001 MULTIFORMAT CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
SN 1625 GENERAL, TABLES & TUBE STANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–18
SN 2659 ROTATING ANODE X–RAY TUBES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–25
SN 2970 MA CALIBRATION – X–RAY GENERATORS, 3 PHASE . . . . . . . . 10–30

Filament Data for Maxiray 125 .3b–1.2 10_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–36
Filament Data for Maxiray 125 .3–.9–1.2 hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–37
Cine Filament Data for Maxiray 125 .3g–.9g–1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–37
Filament Data for Maxiray 100 HTC .6G–.9G 7_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–38
SN 3284 RFX/SFX TABLE TRANSLATION CHAIN INSPECTION

AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–40
10–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
10–ii
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
April 4, 1988 SERVICE NOTES Page 1 of 17
FILE TITLE Multiformat Camera SN 80001
MI–10 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
EQUIPMENT: MI–10 Camera and Autoloader Option.
MATRIX SERVICE #001

NOTE:
MATRIX SERVICE Preventive Maintenance Procedures for MI–10 Camera and Autoloader
NOTE TITLE: Option.
MATRIX SERVICE 3–1–88

NOTE TITLE:
Larry Barnett
CT Systems Integration Engineering
Copyright E 1988 by General Electric Co.
10–1
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
Attached are periodic maintenance procedures which support the Camera/Autoloader Maintenance
Schedule (Matrix document #20–20–1102). All of the system maintenance procedures are included in the
MI–10 User and Service Manual, 20–20–1001 Versions 11 and higher. All of the Autoloader maintenance
procedures are included in the Autoloader Service Manual 20–20–1101 Versions 5 and higher.
With this Service Note you can perform all of the specified periodic maintenance procedures even if you
do not have the latest revision system and Autoloader manuals.
10–2
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
1. CLEANING THE SUCTION CUPS

WHEN?: You should clean all five of the rubber suction cups every three months.
WHY?: This removes dust and silver emulsion particles which may accumulate during nor-
mal operation of the Autoloader.
POSSIBLE If such a buildup occurs, film may not adhere to the suction cups. This may result
SYMPTOMS: in the following problems:
D The suction cups may not retrieve a sheet of film from the Send Magazine (es-
pecially when the film supply is down to the last few sheets).
D The Suction Arm may not deliver a sheet of film to the first set of supply rollers.
(The film separators, designed to prevent more than one sheet of film from leav-
ing the Send Magazine at one time, may strip the film from the dirty suction cups
before it reaches the supply rollers.)
HOW?: To clean the suction cups, you must access them by removing either of the MI–10’s
side panels. The five suction cups are located on the Suction Frame which runs
across the width of the Autoloader directly above the Send Magazine (see Illustra-
tion 1).
Dampen a soft, lint–free cloth with water and wipe the underside of each suction
cup. Dry each cup, ensuring that no moisture remains.
Never use alcohol to clean the suction cups as this will cause
CAUTION deterioration of the rubber and result in premature failures of
the suction cups.
ILLUSTRATION 1
LOCATION OF THE SUCTION CUPS
10–3
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
2. CLEANING THE FILM SENSOR

WHEN?: You should clean the film sensor every three months.
POSSIBLE If the film sensor becomes blocked with dirt it may not detect film leaving the film
SYMPTOMS: plane during the receive cycle. This will result in a MISFED error message being
displayed on the MI–10’s control console.
HOW?:
D The film sensor is located below the Autoloader film plane at the end nearest
the reversible roller set. You may access it by opening the rear door of the
MI–10.
D Use a soft cotton swab to wipe any dirt off the film sensor.
ILLUSTRATION 2
CLEANING THE FILM SENSOR
10–4
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
3A. CLEANING THE METAL ROLLER SETS

WHEN?: You should clean the three metal roller sets every three months.
HOW?: Refer to Illustrations “Autoloader Left Side View” and “Autoloader Right Side View
in Section 8 of 20–20–1101. These show you the location of the first, second and
third roller sets.
D Remove the Send and Receive Magazines from the Autoloader. Dampen a
section of soft lint–free cloth with water and remove any dust or debris from
each roller. Dry the roller completely with a dry section of cloth. Use isopropyl
alcohol to remove grease and other tough stains.
D Be certain to keep the alcohol away from rubber and plastic Autoloader compo-
nents.
ILLUSTRATION 3
CLEANING THE ROLLERS
10–5
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
3B. CLEANING THE RUBBER ROLLER SET

WHEN?: You should clean the fourth roller set every three months.
HOW?: The fourth rubber roller set feeds the exposed film into the Receive Magazine. Re-
fer to the illustration “Autoloader Right Side View” in Section 8 of 20–20–1101 for
exact location of the fourth rollers.
D Remove the Send and Receive Magazines from the Autoloader. Dampen a
section of soft lint–free cloth with water and remove any dust or debris from
each roller. Dry the roller completely with a dry section of cloth. Use a mild liquid
detergent solution to remove grease and other tough stains.
10–6
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
4. AUTOLOADER LUBRICATION
WHEN?: You should lubricate the Autoloader every 12 months.
WHY?: This ensures smooth and quiet operation of the Autoloader and minimizes mechan-
ical wear.
WHERE? You should lubricate points in the Autoloader where moving metal parts contact oth-
er metal parts. This includes roller shafts and bushings, the two drive chains, and
the suction arm drive mechanism.
WHICH A micro–oiler with light grade machine oil is recommended for lubricating all moving
LUBRICANTS?: parts except where indicated in the following steps. This allows you to control pre-
cisely where and how much oil is applied. Always use a very light coating of oil and
wipe away any excess. The Autoloader runs at low RPM and does not require
heavy lubrication. Dry silicone based lubricants are also acceptable. However,
these usually come in aerosol spray cans and you must be extremely careful not
to contaminate the interior of the Autoloader with lubricant. Always mask off the
area you intend to spray.
D Avoid using heavy grease or wet lubricants such as WD–40. These can be
messy, and can attract dust and other debris after prolonged usage.
10–7
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
4. AUTOLOADER LUBRICATION (CONT.)

HOW?: Apply a light coating of the oil at the points indicated in the following illustrations:
ILLUSTRATION 4
AUTOLOADER LUBRICATION, LEFT SIDE
A. Roller Bushings and Shafts
B. Chain and Suction Arm
10–8
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
4. AUTOLOADER LUBRICATION (CONT.)

HOW?: Apply a light coating of the oil at the points indicated in the following illustrations:
ILLUSTRATION 5
AUTOLOADER LUBRICATION, RIGHT SIDE
C. Roller Bushings and Shafts
D. Chain and Suction Arm
10–9
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
5. AUTOLOADER ALIGNMENT
Autoloader alignment procedures are provided in Section 3 of 20–20–1101. Refer to that document for
specific instructions on aligning the Autoloader.
10–10
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
6. MAGAZINE INSPECTION
WHEN?: You should perform a visual inspection of the Autoloader magazines every six
months.
WHY?: This ensures that the magazines are clean and functional.
HOW?: Perform the following checks on your Send and Receive magazines:
D Empty the film out of the magazines and inspect their interiors for accumula-
tions of dust and emulsion particles. Hold the magazine vertically with the dark-
slide open and the handle side facing down. Gently shake the magazine to
empty it of any loose debris.
D Check that the darkslide opens smoothly and closes completely, and that the
darkslide release lever (marked “push”) provides positive locking of the dark-
slide in the closed position.
D Ensure that the magazines can be inserted all the way into their respective slots
in the Autoloader, and that they lock into place when you open the darkslides.
D Check the film size selector knob on the Receive magazine. Rotate the knob
through all three positions to ensure that it locks positively for each of the three
film sizes.
D Inspect the entire magazine for evidence of dents, especially around the han-
dle. A dent in the Send magazine might prevent the Autoloader’s suction arm
from picking up the film consistently.
10–11
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
7. CLEANING THE CRT FACE

Clean the CRT face every six months. Use glass cleaner and a clean cloth. Perform the following steps
to position the CRT and bellows assembly so that it is accessible.
1. Turn the power ON by pressing the power switch on the front of the camera. The message “SEL ST”
(Select Station) will appear in the message window.
2. Press the STA switch. The console message window will display the current mode of the MI–10.
3. Press the LOCK switch to unlock the camera. The LOCK light will turn off.
4. Press the FMT (Format) switch to get a readout of the current format.
5. Press the + (plus) or – (minus) switch so that “FT CAL” appears in the message window.
6. Press the RST switch to reset the camera to the CAL format
7. When the state finishes resetting, power the camera OFF and unplug the power cord from the rear
panel of the camera. Open the rear door.
8. Lift the bellows slide latch and slide the bellows toward the front of the cabinet to access the CRT.
9. Dampen the cloth with glass cleaner and wipe the CRT until it is completely dry. Avoid streaking.
10. Slide the bellows closed until the bellows slide latch catches.
ILLUSTRATION 6
CRT ACCESS FOR CLEANING
10–12
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
8. LUBRICATING THE MOTOR DRIVES

You should lubricate the four stepper motor lead screws annually in order to ensure continued smooth and
quiet operation. Use a light coating of Lithium grease (Matrix part number 14–01–021).
1. Select the CAL mode on the MI–10’s front panel console. This will extend the monitor bellows inside
the camera as far as it can go. Once the stage has reset to the CAL position, power the camera OFF
and remove the a.c. line cord from its receptacle on the Power and Signal Input Panel.
2. Remove the MI–10’s left side panel by loosening the two 1/4 turn DZUS fasteners on the bottom. Life
the panel until it disengages and store it where it will not get damaged.
3. The X and Y axis lead screws are located near the top of the unit. Inspect these for any accumulation
of dirt or debris and wipe them clean with a lint–free cloth. Apply a light coating of Lithium grease to
each lead screw and wipe off any excess.
4. The M and Z lead screws are located inside the monitor stage assembly. You can access them from
the back door side of the camera by lifting the bellows slide latch near the CRT face and sliding the
bellows toward the front of the MI–10. Both the M and Z lead screws will be exposed when the bellows
is opened up.
5. Inspect both lead screws for any accumulation of dirt or debris and wipe them clean with a lint–free
cloth. Apply a light coating of Lithium grease to each lead screw and wipe off any excess.
6. Slide the bellows closed until the bellows slide latch catches.
7. Replace the left side panel and close the rear door.
10–13
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
9. CLEANING THE INTAKE FAN FILTER

The intake fan is located on the outside of the power supply drawer. You may access it by opening the
rear door of the MI–10.
WHEN?: Inspect the fan filter for dust buildup every three months. You may have to clean
the filter at shorter or longer intervals depending upon the operating environment.
WHY?: This prevents dust and debris from clogging the intake filter and blocking the flow
of cool air into the power supply drawer.
HOW?: Power the MI–10 OFF and open the rear door. Use a vacuum cleaner to clear the
dust from the outside layer of screening on the filter. There are a total of four screens
in the filter element. If the filter is severely clogged, then gently press down on the
fan housing and remove the outer captive plate. You may now vacuum each of the
screens individually. Do not immerse the filter in water. Replace the clean filter.
ILLUSTRATION 7
CLEANING THE INTAKE FAN FILTER
10–14
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
10. CHECKING THE POWER SUPPLIES

You should verify that the system power supplies are within their rated specification every twelve months.
Check these against the table provided below. If any of the adjustable supplies are out of tolerance, then
perform procedures 6.2.3. Power Supply Alignment in 20–20–1101. For the system +5V, +15V, +26V, and
–26V (Ultra High Line Rate monitors only) use TP4 (GND) on the Monitor Mother Board as your ground
reference for the DVM.
You may gain access to the console and unregulated motor power supplies by loosening the two knurled
captive screws which hold the power supply drawer closed and pulling the drawer all the way out. Then,
loosen the four Dzus 1/4 turn fasteners which secure the power supply drawer cover and remove the cov-
er. Power the camera ON and allow it to warm up for several minutes.
Voltage Description Allowable Range Measure At (Across)

+5Vdc Console P.S. +5.35Vdc + 50 mVdc +OUT/–OUT terminals on Console P.S
+5Vdc System +5Vdc +5.04Vdc + 40 mVdc P1 pin 7 on Monitor Mother Board
+15VDC System +15Vdc +15.04Vdc + 40 mVdc P1 pin 8 on Monitor Mother Board
–15VDC System –15Vdc –15.04Vdc + 40 mVdc P1 pin 11 on Monitor Mother Board
+26VDC Monitor +26Vdc +25.04Vdc + 40 mVdc P1 pin 12 on Monitor Mother Board
–26VDC Monitor –26Vdc +25.04Vdc + 40 mVdc J2 pin 1 on Horizontal Board
+F/–F** CRT Filament +6.3Vdc + 300 mVdc J1 pin 2 (+F) and J1 pin 3 (–F) on CRT Board
+26Vdc* Unreg +26V +26Vdc + 500 mVdc +OUT and –OUT terminals on Motor P.S.
(A3A3)
* Used in ultra high line rate monitor applications only.
** Not adjustable, for verification purposes only.
10–15
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
11. CLEANING THE MI–10’S OPTICS

The MI–10’s optics are contained within the CRT bellows assembly. The optic elements include the lens
and in some cases a beam splitter mounted on the lens plate at the bottom of the bellows. The beam split-
ter is present only on those units which have the optical 35 mm camera back.
WHEN?: Inspect the optics for dust buildup every twelve months. Since they are enclosed
within the bellows, any accumulations of dust should be light.
WHY?: This allows you to remove dust and debris which could result in drop–outs in the
recorded images.
HOW?:
a. Apply power to the MI–10 and select the CAL format.
b. Power the MI–10 OFF and remove the a.c. power cord from its receptacle on
the Power and Signal Input Panel.
c. Remove the right side panel of the MI–10’s cabinet by loosening the two Dzus
1/4 turn fasteners at the bottom. Lift the panel until it disengages and store it
where it will not get damaged.
d. Refer to Illustration 8. Remove the four screws A and accompanying hardware

B, C which secure the lens housing assembly to the lens plate.
e. Lift the lens housing assembly and the attached bellows. Position them so that
you can access the top of the lens plate and the system optics.
f. Gently wipe the surface of the lens (and beam splitter) with optical lens paper.
WARNING ON SOME SYSTEMS THERE MAY BE AN ADHESIVE OPTICAL

“DOT” FIXED ON THE LENS. THIS IS INSTALLED AT THE FAC-
TORY AND YOU SHOULD NEVER REMOVE IT. DO NOT USE
HOUSEHOLD BRAND GLASS CLEANERS ON THE LENS AND
BEAM SPLITTER. THESE CAN DESTROY THE SPECIAL COAT-
INGS ON THE OPTICS ELEMENTS. USE A PROFESSIONAL
GRADE OPTICS CLEANER TO REMOVE FINGER PRINTS AND
OTHER TOUGH STAINS. DO NOT USE AEROSOL SPRAY CANS
OF COMPRESSED AIR; THESE CONTAIN PROPELLANTS
WHICH CAN ATTACK THE COATINGS ON THE OPTICS.
10–16
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
g. Carefully open the shutter blade with your hand and clean the underside of the
lens.
h. Position the lens housing assembly on the lens plate and secure it with the hard-
ware that you removed in step d above.
i. Replace the right side panel and the a.c. line cord.
ILLUSTRATION 8
CLEANING THE OPTICS
10–17
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
May 5, 1969 SERVICE NOTES Page 1 of 7
FILE TITLE General, Tables & Tube Stands SN 1625
COUNTERWEIGHT CABLE INSPECTION
Steel counterweight cables, as used in many of our products, have load carrying capabilities many times
that of the loads carried, provided only that the cable is in good condition and properly installed. With use,
wear is inevitable; normally, though, it is reasonably slow. However, if any abnormal condition is present,
deterioration of the cable may be greatly accelerated. Many SERVICE NOTES have stressed the impor-
tance of periodic inspection and have described how to do it.
The following “Inspection Recommendations” were prepared for us by the Wire Rope Engineering Depart-
ment of the American Cable Division of the American Chain & Cable Company, Inc., Wilkes–Barre, Penn-
sylvania. If anyone knows the characteristics of steel cables these people should. Read the report
carefully, then sign and return the final page to Headquarters by June 20, 1969.
XXXXXXX
“WIRE ROPE REPORT NO. 1448
Inspection Recommendations
For
General Electric Company

X–Ray Department
February 6, 1969
“This recommendation report, covering inspection procedures of counterweight cables in use on the vari-
ous models of General Electric X–Ray equipment, was originally offered for the assistance of General
Electric field personnel. In its present form, this report has been re-issued and expanded to include supple-
mentary information as well as photographs. Some of the additional information will also be found helpful
in the inspection of incoming material.
“It is common knowledge that all operating wire ropes are subject to deterioration from such common
causes as abuse, wear, and fatigue during the course of normal operation in service. All of these factors
eventually result in the development of broken wires of some form or other, and if the broken wires accu-
mulate in large enough numbers in localized areas, complete failure of the cable will result. Since the pro-
gression of broken wires is related to time and usage, and normally they do not develop in large numbers
over a short period of time, there is a warning period between the beginning of wire break–up and com-
plete rope failure. It is during this period that wire rope inspections should reveal the condition of the cable
and corrective action should be taken. We, therefore, offer the following conditions to be considered in
setting up an inspection practice.
10–18
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
“Frequency of Inspection
This is a variable factor in as much as frequency of use of the equipment is involved. It would be our recom-
mendation that counterweight cables be inspected once every six months and at more frequent intervals
if, in the opinion of the inspector, the usage of the equipment dictates. Experience and history of cable
deterioration may be used as a further criterion for this determination. (In this regard it should be pointed
out here that the number of times the X–ray head is moved is the important factor rather than the number
of subjects X–rayed.)
“Inspection Procedure
Visual inspection, plus running of the cable through a soft cloth should be the methods used, since broken
wires, and results of cable abuse in the form of kinks, distortion, etc., are the major types of deterioration
to be detected.
Care should be taken and close inspection made of all cable terminations. Inspect for broken wires and
areas of wear. Excessive wear not only weakens the cable, but influences the development and rate of
wire failure.
“Since in all probability, the entire length of cable is subject to pulley wear, all of the wire rope should be
inspected.
“Basis for Cable Replacement:

1. Broken Wires:
Cable strength is not necessarily impaired by an occasional, broken wire. However, consideration
should be given as to its location, length of time the assembly has been in service, and the general
condition of the remainder of the cable. Broken wires at cable terminals should require immediate
cable replacement. One or two broken wires in the body of the assembly during its early period of
use need not be cause for replacement, however, the same number of wire failures in an old assem-
bly should justify immediate replacement, because the rate of broken wire development is indetermi-
nate. Any broken wire development obviously caused by unusual cable abuse should require cable
replacement, and the cause for this condition determined and immediately corrected.
Because of the serious consequence of possible cable failure, the inspector must be prepared to use
his judgment regarding cable condition, and never hesitate to make a replacement. Several months
or a half year’s additional usage is small compensation if there is any danger of cable failure.
2. Lubrication:
All operating wire rope cable assemblies are lubricated at the factory with a colorless aircraft type
lubricant. This lubricant has a drip point of 250_F, which is high enough to eliminate any trouble of
this nature with normal application quantities. This lubricant may be applied in the field when needed,
at normal room temperatures, but should only be used when absolutely necessary. The commercial
name of this material is Ironsides AC–H compound and is produced by the Ironsides Company, Co-
lumbus, Ohio. (The manufacturer has approved the use of STP for field service purposes.)
10–19
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
3. Wire Splice or Joint:
In the production of wire rope it is sometimes necessary to join two wires in order to obtain the neces-
sary long continuous length of wire. Normally wire joints are made by brazing or welding, but in very
small wire sizes (.014I and smaller) a wire joint, made by twisting the ends of two wires together, is
considered acceptable practice. Such splices, however, are limited in occurrence and are not to be
closer than 20 feet apart.
A twisted wire splice in the outer layer of wires of a strand will appear in the cable as in Illustration
1, and one such splice in an inner layer. In the later case, the wire splice, or joint, being on the inside
of the strand, will tend to make a slight bulge in the strand, and/or tend to spread apart several of
the individual wires in the cover layer of wires.
4. “Stranding” Condition:
Occasionally during fabrication of a strand, a wire (or wires) may get out of position, or may cross
other wires, and its true position in the strand may therefore not be maintained. This condition may
extend over a distance of only a few feet, or even along quite a length of the cable. This condition
is considered a manufacturing defect and is easily identified by the rough surface of the affected
strand in its spiral pattern along the rope. Illustration 2 depicts an example of a “stranding condition,”
but it is to be noted that it shows up in two places only, six strands apart, because in order to follow
the helical path of the affected strand, it would be necessary to rotate the cable.
“Additional Information on Broken Wires
A wire rope containing a broken wire will show protruding wire ends, although if the break is located in the
valley between two strands, it is possible for only one broken wire end to show as in Illustration 4.
“A new assembly containing a broken wire should be subject to rejection, however, military specifications
covering aircraft cable purchased in lengths considered as acceptable one broken wire end in each 1000
ft. A single broken wire in a cable is shown in Illustration 6.
“A good example of a section of cable badly affected by fatigue wire breaks is depicted in Illustration 1.
A cable this badly affected should be removed from service. It is to be noted that all of these breaks are
crown–wire breaks, and the broken ends are therefore short.
“Valley wire breaks occur down in the valley between two adjacent strands, and therefore a protruding wire
end resulting from this type of break would be longer and would stand out much farther from the cable
than a crown wire break. See Illustration 4. Only one end – the long end – of a valley wire break can usually
be detected, since the other end remains buried in the valley between two adjacent strands. Unfortunately,
a valley wire break usually does not visibly manifest itself until quite an advanced stage of deterioration
has taken place. It is therefore recommended that if one or more valley breaks are detected, the cable
should immediately be replaced regardless of its appearance otherwise. It is also true that very often valley
wire breaks may exist without having the free end spring out of place.
10–20
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
“There is still one other type of internal wire failure which cannot be detected visually. This type of break
takes place in the outer wires of the main strands, but underneath where they are in contact with the rope
center member. Usually these breaks can only be detected by slackening the cable and bending it oppo-
site to the curvature it normally assumes over the sheaves. This however is most often impractical to do
because of inaccessibility. Here again the protruding wire ends would be considerably longer than those
of a crown, or outside type, of wire break and would be even slightly longer than the protruding end of a
valley type wire break“ as shown in Illustration 5. Sketch SK–2469 shows the cross–section of a 7 x 19
cable, and locates the positions in which the various types of wire breaks described above occur. A combi-
nation of Illustrations 3, 4, and 5 show sections of cable in the extremely advanced stages of deterioration,
and obviously it would not be too long before complete failure of this cable could be expected to occur.
Attention is called to the crown type wire breaks, the longer broken wire ends (valley or inside breaks),
and also the unbalanced cable structure resulting not only from the uneven occurrences of wire failures,
but also from the unbalanced load distribution which follows.
“While the various types of wire failures have been described above, and as stated some of them are un-
able to be detected by visual external inspection, nevertheless the surface deterioration and condition of
the cable in general can be reliably used as a basis for cable retirement, if regular, periodic inspections
are made, and experience and good judgment are used in evaluating the cable condition.
Respectfully submitted,
AMERICAN CHAIN & CABLE COMPANY, INC.
W.A. LOWEN
Wire Rope Engineering Department”
PRODUCT SERVICE
J.V.S.
10–21
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
CROWN WIRE BREAKS (NOTICEABLE)

VALLEY WIRE BREAKS (NOTICEABLE
ONLY IF BROKEN WIRE END POPS OUT)
CABLE STRAND
INTERNAL WIRE BREAKS WHICH

OCCUR NEXT TO THE CABLE
CORE. (NOTICEABLE ONLY IF
BROKEN WIRE END POPS OUT).
CABLE WIRE
INNER WIRE BREAKS
(NOT NOTICEABLE)
A STRAND IS A BUNDLE OF WIRES.

THIS CABLE HAS 7 STRANDS OF 19 CORE, OR CENTER WIRE
WIRES EACH. BREAKS (NOT NOTICEABLE)
SK–2469
CROSS–SECTION
7 X 19 CABLE
10–22
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
ILLUSTRATION 1
TWISTED WIRE SPLICE IN 1 OF 12 INNER WIRES
ILLUSTRATION 2
TWISTED WIRE SPLICE IN 1 OF 6 INNER WIRES
UNACCEPTABLE BREAK
ILLUSTRATION 3
CROWN WIRE BREAKS
CROWN WIRE BROKEN ENDS
10–23
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
ILLUSTRATION 4
VALLEY WIRE BREAKS
VALLEY WIRE BROKEN ENDS
ILLUSTRATION 5
INTERNAL WIRE BREAKS
INTERNAL WIRE BROKEN END
ILLUSTRATION 6
SINGLE CROWN WIRE BREAK
ACCEPTABLE ON BRAND NEW CABLE, BUT NOT ON USED CABLE.
10–24
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
FILE TITLE Rotating Anode X–Ray Tubes SN 2659
PRODUCT: X–RAY TUBES
Target Appearance
X–ray tube targets lead a pretty tough life. During the manufacture and seasoning of the X–ray tube, the
target is subjected to higher electron bombardment velocities and higher temperatures that occur in nor-
mal clinical situations.
In normal operation, the target must survive not only the diagnostic loading technics but also the randomly
occurring cable, transformer, or tube “tics” or “spitz” that occur in all high voltage devices.
Fortunately, target beauty is not a functional requirement for the X–ray system, since the flash heating
of the target surface cause various cosmetic marks to appear on the target face. These markings do not
affect the normal full life operation of the X–ray tube and their appearance should be considered the rule
rather than the exception.
The most common flash and seasoning marks are described as follows:
10–25
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
A. Track Surfacing Conditioning
This condition normally appears during the extensive tube seasoning process and occurs before final
X–ray tube acceptance testing. It is the result of the continuous bombardment of the target track by
the electron beam with the target bulk temperature high enough to cause minor surface erosion. This
procedure is required to evolve gases that may be in the bulk of the target track region and that if
evolved during high voltage operation, might cause unstable operation.
ILLUSTRATION 1
TRACK SURFACE CONDITIONING
10–26
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
B. “Blush” Marks
Blush marks can be found on most new X–ray tube targets and can appear any place on the target
surface facing the cathode end of the tube. This condition is the result of the high voltage tube sea-
soning process in manufacture. The “blush” marks usually appear as roundish areas of approximate-
ly 1/4 inch in diameter that reflect light differently than the rest of the track or surface. These marks
are caused by microdischarges from field emitting points on the cathode structure that are not fo-
cussed by the cathode cup. The microdischarge usually burns away the “whisker” causing the field
emission and is desirable as a seasoning process. The blush mark type of flash melt does not affect
tube life or performance.
ILLUSTRATION 2
BLUSH MARKS
10–27
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
C. “Track Slash Marks”
This surface condition is similar to that described as blush marks except that in this case, the field
emission microdischarge is focussed by the cathode cup. This type of mark usually appears in the
track or runs slightly outside of it. The mark appears as a radially elongated line or area, oriented
parallel to the filament, having a width of approximately one millimeter. The mark is the result of field
emission microdischarges from minute whiskers on the filament wire. Because of origination from
the filament surface, the field emission is focussed by the cathode cup into a more sharply defined
area on the target, resulting in the slash type mark. The appearance of the mark is usually very dis-
turbing to the uninitiated observer but since the flash mark has no depth to it, it does not affect the
life or other performance characteristics of the tube.
ILLUSTRATION 3
SLASH MARKS
10–28
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
One Final Note:
The normal manufacturing processes are designed to prepare X–ray tubes for operation at voltages well
beyond the maximum specified working voltages. At times, system faults, such as discharges in cables,
transformers, or tubes, can set up oscillatory high voltage excursions that far exceed the tube processing
voltages resulting in tube field emission microdischarges. The result of these discharges, however, will
usually be the blush type or slash type marking. If the tube performs with satisfactory high voltage stability
after the fault has been corrected, then the tube has not been damaged and normal life may be expected.
Data Source: E.T. Rate, Manager X–Ray Tube Engineering
Krista Musto
FIELD SERVICE DEVELOPMENT ENGINEERING
10–29
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
July 16, 1982 SERVICE NOTES Page 1 of 6
FILE TITLE mA Calibration – X–Ray Generators, 3 Phase SN 2970
This Service Note was originally issued as #2703 on 2/28/79. It included 20 characteristic curves and 9
pages of graphs. Although it provided a very accurate method of calibrating X–ray tubes with very few
exposures, experience has shown that only a few persons are currently using that approach. The main
drawback was that the curves had to be handled carefully and could not be xeroxed due to the subsequent
distortion.
As a result of numerous field requests to re-issue that Service Note, we have converted the curves to tabu-
lated data. It turns out that the tabulated data is shamefully easy to use compared to the original curves.
The data represents typical input/output characteristics for various X–ray tubes on MSI, MST, or MPX gen-
erators. The procedure described below allows the data to be “normalized” to the specific X–ray tube being
calibrated. Usually this takes one or two exposures at a single mA station. After normalization, the mA
stations are adjusted to the values specified by the tables. Finally, a series of exposures are made to verify
proper adjustment. Usually 1 or 2 exposures per station are all that are required. The procedure is fast,
accurate, and avoids the problems of emission characteristic shaft due to anode heating.
Unfortunately the data is old and does not cover many newer types of X–ray tubes. This is where you can
help. As you gather data on tubes not listed here you can do the entire field organization a favor by sending
the data to headquarters. Only data that is presented in a format similar to the attached data will be ac-
cepted. We will accumulate, average, and tabulate the data. This service note will be re-issued periodically
to keep the data current with the types of X–ray tubes in the field.
You may find that there is no need for additional data, however, since past experience has shown that
some tube factors, such as target angle, do not alter the shape of the characteristic curves. Of the original
21 curves presented in SN #2703, there were actually only about six distinctly different shapes.
PROCEDURE:
1. Find the table for the particular X–ray tube you are calibrating or use one similar to it.
2. Select a midrange mA stataion at a kVp where space charge compensation is zero.
3. Make an exposure and carefully measure the X–ray tube output current and the input current to the
primary of the filament transformer (AC mA meter in series with XL or XS). A true RMS meter is pre-
ferred but not essential.
4. Enter the output current right on the table in the appropriate space; e.g., if the output was 420 mA
record this between the 400 mA and 500 mA figures. Enter the input current directly opposite the
output current entry.
NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 represent a classical engineering approach. In the time it takes you to read that,
you can “tweak” the control, and zero in on the correct output. When you get there, note the
input as “corrrect input value.” You could then skip to Step 7.
10–30
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
5. Determine a corrector factor for the input current as follows: Note the difference between the tabulated
values directly above and below the recorded entry on the output column. Likewise note the difference
between the tabulated values directly above and below the recorded entry in the input column. Divide
the second difference by the first difference, this is the input/output relation in the area of the exposure,
e.g., if the table indicates that the output will go from 400 mA to 500 mA when the input goes from 582
to 596 mA then you would divide 14 mA inp by 100 mA output to get –14 mA inp per 1.0 mA out. Use
this figure to correct the input value as follows: Note the difference between the observed output and
the desired output: 2.g., 420 mA – 400 mA = 20 mA (high). Multiply this value by the relationship calcu-
lated above:
.14 mA inp
e.g., 20 mA out x = 2.8 mA inp
1.0 mA out
The resulting number is the amount by which theinput should be changed to obtain the correct output.
The hard part is over!
6. Change the input as indicated by the previous calculation and verify that the correct output is ob-
tained. If necessary, make a minor additional adjustment and record the final value of the input re-
quired for correct output. This should be recorded in the input column directly across from the correct
output value (in the above case directly across from the 400 mA point).
7. Note the difference between the value entered as “correct input” and the value originally indicated
by the table. This is your “offset.” Add or subtract this “offset” to each input value in the table to gener-
ate a new table of input values. lThese input values will generally provide outputs within 2 or 3 percent
of desired values (SEE EXAMPLE).
8. Set up the mA stations using the new table of inputs. Make no exposure until all stations are adjusted.
9. Make exposures at each mA station to verify proper adjustment. Minor adjustments may be required
(very minor).
MSI MX–100 1.0 mm 11_
EXAMPLE: 400 mA station selected. First ex- mA Output mA Input (fil. pri.)
posure measures 420 mA. Control adjusted
(150) (507) 491
to produce 400 mA and input current noted to
(160) (513) 497
be 566 mA. This is 16 mA less than the value
specified in the table so 16 mjA is subtracted 200 534 518
from each value to generate a new table. 250 551 535
300 564 548
320 568 552
400 582 566
500 596 580
600 606 590
640 611 595
800 624 608
1000 639 623
10–31
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
MSI MX–75 0.6 mm 15_ MST/MPX MX–75 0.6 mm 15_

mA Output mA Input (fil. pri.) mA Output mA Input (fil. pri.)
100 460 100 353
150 479 150 369
200 494 200 380
250 505 250 388
300 515 300 396
200 467 200 359
250 482 250 370
300 493 300 379
400 509 400 392
500 521 500 401
600 531 600 408
800 546 800 420
200 463 200 356
250 474 250 364
300 482 300 372
400 496 400 362
500 507 500 390
600 515 600 397
800 529 800 408
1000 540 1000 415
200 447 200 344
250 458 250 353
300 467 300 359
400 481 400 370
500 492 500 378
600 501 600 385
800 516 800 397
1000 526 1000 405
10–32
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15

100 447 100 345
150 467 150 359
200 481 200 370
250 493 250 379
300 503 300 387
200 437 200 336
250 449 250 345
300 459 300 353
400 473 400 364
500 484 500 372
600 492 600 378
800 505 800 388
10 359 10 276
12 365 12 281
15 371 15 286
16 372 16 287
20 380 20 294
25 387 25 298
32 394 32 305
40 403 40 310
50 411 50 316
64 420 64 323
80 428 80 329
100 436 100 335
125 444 125 341
150 451 150 347
160 454 160 349
200 463 200 356
250 472 250 363
300 480 300 369
320 483 320 372
400 493 400 380
10–33
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15

(150) (507) (150) (393)
(160) (513) (160) (397)
200 534 200 411
250 551 250 424
300 564 300 434
320 568 320 437
400 582 400 448
500 596 500 458
600 606 600 467
640 611 640 471
800 624 800 481
1000 639 1000 492
(150) (505) (150) (391)
(160) (508) (160) (393)
(200) (519) (200) (399)
(250) (529) (250) (406)
300 537 300 413
320 540 320 415
400 550 400 423
500 561 500 432
600 570 600 438
640 573 640 441
800 584 800 449
1000 595 1000 458
1200 605 1200 465
(1250) (607) (1250) (466)
10–34
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15

(150) (492) (150) (379)
(160) (495) (160) (381)
200 505 200 388
250 513 250 395
300 522 300 402
320 524 320 404
400 534 400 412
500 546 500 420
600 555 600 428
640 558 640 431
800 570 800 438
1000 583 1000 448
1200 592 1200 455
(1250) 594 (1250) 457
( ) = Extrapolated
mA Output mA Input (fil. pri.)

MSI MX–125 0.3 mm 11_
mA Output mA Input (fil. pri.)
60 476
80 490
100 501
120 511
140 519
(150) (523)
160 526
(180) (532)
200 537
( ) = Interpolated
Emanuel V Polizzi
FIELD SERVICE DEVELOPMENT ENGINEERING
W–683
10–35
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
Filament Data for Maxiray 125 .3b–1.2 10_

Data from Palo Alto Medical Clinic’s LU/A, MSI 1250 IV.
Place this information with Service Note 2970.
On Generator Select Boost Boost

kV mA Current (mA) Voltage (V)
80 80C 519 77
80 100C 518 77
80 50 479 69
80 100 506 75
80 160 533 80
80 300 547 144
80 400 561 150
80 600 583 160
80 800 604 169
80 1000 619 175
80 1200 631 181
This data was collected at 80 kVp (no space charge comp).
Small Spot Standby Current = 305 mA at 43 volts

Large Spot Standby Current = 187 mA at 37 volts
The tube unit that the sample replaced has a LS filament problem that
showed itself on an ohmmeter. Generator indicated that large spot mAs
were about 40% low.
Old Tube New Tube

Large Spot .9 ohms .5 ohms
Small Spot .5 ohms .5 ohms
These are very rough field measurements!
Data provided by Mark Buswell, San Francisco.
MSI & Omega Table Stepper
If table is engaged before ANGIO is selected at the generator (.2 sec. Rapid
Film), there is a possible relay race which may allow the stepper to step
through a complete consequence without paying any attention to the gener-
ator. There is no known solution. Write if you have one!
10–36
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
Filament Data for Maxiray 125 .3–.9–1.2 hex

Data from Kuakini Hospital – MPX 125.
Place this information with Service Note 2970.
80 kVp 50 kVp 130 kVp

mA Selected Phase Boost Phase Boost Phase Boost
on Generator A–B ACV/ACMA A–B ACV/ACMA A–B ACV/ACMA
XS
10 205 50/422 129 51/425 331 50/419
12 206 51/428 130 52/432 333 50/424
16 207 53/436 131 53/440 333 52/432
20 207 54/443 132 54/446 334 53/439
25 208 55/450 133 56/455 335 55/446
32 210 57/458 134 58/464 336 56/454
40 214 58/465 139 59/472 341 57/461
50 215 59/474 140 61/480 341 59/469
64 222 61/483 145 63/490 346 60/477
80 222 63/492 147 65/499 348 62/486
100 223 65/501 144 67/514 321 (100) 63/495
125 224 67/511 174 (60) 68/519 275 (100) 66/507
160 226 69/524 N/A N/A N/A N/A
XL
200 233 122/557 158 120/563 359 118/550
250 236 126/568 161 123/577 363 121/560
320 244 130/580 168 127/590 369 125/573
400 249 131/592 176 131/605 375 136/584
500 257 138/606 207 135/615 382 /596
640 269 142/621 244 141/627 395 137/610
800 285 140/636 260 146/642 335 (100) 145/631
1000 305 173/609 256 168/622 357 (100) 160/604
Numbers in ( ) indicate a different kVp.
Data provided by Tom Markert, Southwest.
Cine Filament Data for Maxiray 125 .3g–.9g–1.2

Boost ACMA Tub Phase VAC
Fil kV Prep/Run mA A–B
LS 70 638/650 280 219
LS 115 590/594 177 315
SS 60 513/514 41 155
SS 120 473/474 21 294
10–37
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
Filament Data for Maxiray 100 HTC .6G–.9G 7_

80 kVp 50 kVp 130 kVp
mA Selected Phase Boost Phase Boost Phase Boost
on Generator A–B ACV/ACMA A–B ACV/ACMA A–B ACV/ACMA
XS
10 211 68/363 132 69/388 336 67/360
12 211 69/369 131 70/372 337 68/365
16 211 72/377 132 73/380 336 71/374
20 211 74/382 133 75/387 337 73/380
25 210 76/390 131 77/393 337 75/386
32 210 78/398 131 79/401 337 77/394
40 216 80/403 136 81/408 342 80/401
50 216 82/412 137 82/416 343 81/404
64 217 85/420 137 86/425 344 83/416
80 220 87/428 143 88/432 347 85/423
100 220 89/436 141 91/440 348 88/430
125 227 92/442 148 93/449 352 90/438
160 231 95/452 153 97/460 357 93/447
200 232 97/462 154 100/470 360 96/455
250 240 100/471 161 103/482 367 99/464
320 244 105/483 166 109/496 370 102/475
XL
160 228 /539 150 /545 354 534
200 229 /549 150 /558 355 544
250 238 /560 155 /569 366 552
320 241 /572 164 /583 369 563
400 248 /583 170 /597 375 574
500 261 /596 177 /616 387 587
640 269 /513 180 /640 395 601
800 282 /629 — — 384 615
10–38
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
PROPRIETARY X–RAY
REV 16
46–019510
REV 15
Fluoro Data
Fil. Boost Phase

kVp XRT mA ACV/ACMA A–B R/min
60 8.1 /394 156 9
80 4.8 /376 264 8.8
120 3.0 /358 300 9
Cine Data
Fil. Boost Phase

kVp XRT mA ACV/ACMA A–B Volts
XS
60 160 111/501 199
120 80 95/453 334
XL
70 280 134/617 255
115 187 122/579 351
10–39
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
X–RAY PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
January 28, 1992 SERVICE NOTES Page 1 of 15
FILE TITLE RFX/SFX Tables SN 3284
RFX/SFX TABLE
TRANSLATION CHAIN
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
APPLIES TO: All RFX and SFX tables shipped to the field prior to January 2, 1992.
PROBLEM: Improper front and rear translation chain adjustment.
SOLUTION: Translation chain adjustments on RFX and SFX tables are critical to proper table
operation. If the chain adjustments are incorrect, then translation chains could slip
on the sprockets, causing a sudden drop in table height.
Use the inspection procedure provided at the beginning of this Service Note to
inspect table top alignment and chain tension. If the rear or front translation chains
are adjusted incorrectly, use the adjustment procedure provided in the second part
of this Service Note to adjust both rear and front translation chains.
When the inspection and adjustment procedures are complete, include this Service
Note with the Periodic Maintenance Schedule in your RFX or SFX manual.
Translation chain adjustments are interdependent. Adjusting rear

CAUTION translation chains without first removing the front chain will result in
erroneous readings. Remove the front translation chain from both
sprockets before performing any rear chain adjustment.
Inspect the rear translation chains first. If you find that rear chain tension is incorrect,
then disconnect the front translation chain and perform the RFX/SFX Translation
Chain Adjustment Procedure. Always adjust the rear chains first, before installing
and adjusting the front chain.
Glyn Livermore John Schneble

X-Ray Service Engineering Field Service Development Engineering
(414)-548-4632
8*320-4690
10–40
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
RFX/SFX TRANSLATION CHAIN INSPECTION PROCEDURE:
Introduction
Step through the procedure on the following pages to inspect current translation
chain adjustments. Remember, if additional chain adjustments are required, adjust
the rear translation chains first and adjust them only after disconnecting the front
translation chain.
Section 1. Inspect the Table at Horizontal:

Check Table Top Stability
1. Angulate the table to the horizontal position and center table top. See
Illustration 1.
2. When in the horizontal position, the table tub should resist any effort to create
side to side movement. Check table stability by exerting pressure on table tub
sides from the head or foot end position.
Note: Check table stability by exerting pressure on table tub and not the table
top sides.
If there is noticeable side to side table tub movement, you will have to adjust
translation chains. See RFX/SFX TRANSLATION CHAIN ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE.
ILLUSTRATION 1
TABLE CENTERED AT HORIZONTAL
10–41
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Section 2. Inspect the Rear Translation Chain:

Measure Head End Chain Tension
1. Angulate the table to +45_. Refer to Illustration 2.
2. Using a steel tape, locate a point on the chain 21I (533 mm) in from the outside
edge of the head end sprocket cover. See Illustration 2.
3. Check that lower chain is not rubbing against the lower chain guide and measure
from the inside edge of top chain guard to the centerline of upper chain link pins
at the 21I (533 mm) point. See Illustration 2.
S If the lower chain is not rubbing and upper chain centerline is between 3/4I
and 1I (19.1 and 25.4 mm) from the inside edge of the guard, then the head
end rear chain tension adjustment is acceptable.
S If the lower chain is not rubbing, but upper chain centerline is between 1I
and 1–3/4I (25.4 and 44.5 mm) from the inside edge of guard, chain tension
adjustment is borderline. Schedule a maintenance call to adjust the chains.
S If lower chain is rubbing or if chain centerline exceeds 1–3/4I (44.5 mm)
from the inside edge of guard, then the current chain tension adjustment is
unacceptable. Return the table to horizontal immediately and adjust chains.
See RFX/SFX TRANSLATION CHAIN ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
ILLUSTRATION 2
TABLE AND REAR TRANSLATION CHAIN AT + 45_
SPROCKET
MEASURE TO AND COVER
CENTERLINE OF
UPPER CHAIN
21” MEASURED
FROM END OF
SPROCKET
COVER
MEASURE FROM
INSIDE EDGE OF
TOP CHAIN GUARD
MEASURE TO
CENTERLINE OF CHAIN
FROM INSIDE EDGE OF
TOP CHAIN GUARD
TOP EDGE OF HEAD

CHAIN GUARD
END
OF TABLE
10–42
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
4. Angulate the table to –45_. Refer to Illustration 3.

Note: On 30/90 tables, inspect foot end chains with table at –30_. Otherwise,
foot end inspection procedure is identical to that used on 90/90 tables.
5. Using a steel tape, locate a point on the chain 21I (533 mm) in from the outside
edge of the foot end sprocket cover. See Illustration 3.
6. Check that lower chain is not rubbing against the lower chain guide and measure
from the inside edge of top chain guard to the centerline of chain link pins at the
21I (533 mm) point. See Illustration 3.
S If the lower chain is not rubbing and upper chain centerline is between 3/4I
and 1I (19.1 and 25.4 mm) from the inside edge of guard, then the foot end
rear chain tension adjustment is acceptable.
S If the lower chain is not rubbing, but upper chain centerline is between 1I and
1–3/4I (25.4 and 44.5 mm) from the inside edge of guard, then chain tension
adjustment is borderline. Schedule a maintenance call to adjust the chains.
S If lower chain is rubbing or if chain centerline exceeds 1–3/4I (44.5 mm)
from inside edge of guard, then chain tension adjustment is unacceptable.
Return the table to horizontal immediately and adjust chains. See the
RFX/SFX TRANSLATION CHAIN ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
ILLUSTRATION 3
TABLE AND REAR TRANSLATION CHAIN AT – 45_ (– 30_ FOR 30/90 TABLES)
MEASURE FROM
SPROCKET INSIDE EDGE OF MEASURE TO
AND COVER TOP CHAIN GUARD CENTERLINE OF
UPPER CHAIN
21” MEASURED
FROM END OF
SPROCKET
COVER
MEASURE TO
CENTERLINE OF CHAIN
FROM INSIDE EDGE OF
TOP CHAIN GUARD
TOP EDGE OF
CHAIN GUARD
FOOT
END
OF TABLE
10–43
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Section 3. Inspect the Front Translation Chain:

Angulate Table to Vertical
1. Angulate the table to the +45_ position. Refer to Illustration 4.
2. Reach beneath the front cover to check that front translation chain is in place
and that 3/8I turnbuckle jam nut is tightened securely. See Illustration 4.
3. Check that lower front chain is not rubbing against the lower chain guide and that
upper front chain does not contact the front support. See Illustration 4.
Note: If rear translation chain adjustments are correct, only the front
translation chains should require adjustment.
If lower chain rubs against the top edge of lower chain guard or if upper chain
contacts the front support, then front translation chain adjustment is
unacceptable. Return the table to horizontal and adjust the front chains. See the
RFX/SFX TRANSLATION CHAIN ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE.
4. When front translation chain adjustments are complete, be sure to repeat both
rear and front translation chain inspection procedures.
ILLUSTRATION 4
TABLE AND FRONT TRANSLATION CHAIN IN VERTICAL POSITION
HEAD END
REACH BENEATH
THE FRONT
TRANSLATION
CHAIN COVERS
TO CHECK CHAIN
TENSION AND
TUNBUCKLE
JAM NUT.
CHAIN AND TURNBUCKLE CONFIGURATION
TURNBUCKLE
FRONT
SUPPORT
CHAIN
FOOT END
10–44
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
RFX/SFX TRANSLATION CHAIN ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE:

Introduction
Use the following procedure to align and adjust the rear and front translation chains.
Remember, the front translation chain must be removed before any rear translation
chain adjustments are made.
Manpower requirement
It should take one service engineer about 2 hours to perform the translation chain
adjustment procedure.
Section 1. Level and Center Table:

1. Angulate the table to horizontal and center the table top. See Illustration 5.
2. Place a level on the rear foot end fluoro carriage bearing rail.
3. Turn off power at the room’s main disconnect.
4. Remove the front and rear chain covers.
Note: Refer to your RFX/SFX Service Manual for specific information

required to remove chain covers and guards on this table.
Section 2. Remove Front Translation Chain:

1. Loosen and remove the turnbuckle to relax front translation chain tension.
Remove the chain from head and foot end sprockets. Refer to Illustration 4.
ILLUSTRATION 5
TABLE CENTERED AT HORIZONTAL WITH REAR GUARDS REMOVED
10–45
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Section 3. Check Current Rear Translation Chain Adjustments:

Measure Chain Lengths
1. Using a steel tape, measure the distance from head and foot end sprocket axles
to the machined surface of chain anchor points. See Illustration 6.
Foot and head end measurements must be within 1/32I (0.8 mm) of each other.
See Illustration 6.
Note: If these measurements are not equal, go to Section 4, Adjusting Rear

Translation Chain.
ILLUSTRATION 6
MEASURE CHAIN LENGTHS
SLIDE TAPE MEASURE

BEHIND GEAR SECTOR
CHAIN
ANCHOR
FOOT END HEAD END
AXLE AXLE
GEAR SECTOR
MACHINED
SURFACE
FOOT END = HEAD END + 1/32 INCH (0.8 mm)
10–46
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Check Chain Tensions

2. Place a 10 pound (4.5 kg) weight, on the lower chain, 15 inches in from the
center of the sprocket shaft at both head and foot ends of table. Measure the
amount of deflection created by the weight at each end. See Illustration 7.
Deflection must range from 3/32I to 7/32I (2 to 5 mm) at both head and foot
ends. See Illustration 7.
Note: If these measurements are within the specification, go to Section 4,

Adjusting Rear Translation Chain.
ILLUSTRATION 7
CHECK TENSION ADJUSTMENT
15 INCHES
(381 mm)
DEFLECTION
3/32 TO 7/32 INCH
(2 TO 5 mm)
10 POUNDS
(4.5 Kg.)
10–47
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Section 4. Adjusting the Rear Translation Chain:
Translation chain adjustments are interdependent. Adjusting the rear

CAUTION translation chains without first removing front chains will result in
erroneous readings. Ensure that front translation chains have been
removed from both sprockets before initiating rear chain
adjustments.
Check and Adjust Chain Lengths

1. Back out chain anchor set screws. Set screws must be outside of chain anchor
locking grooves to turn chain anchors. See Illustration 8.
2. Using a 13/16I open end chain wrench (46–152955P1), turn chain anchors to
center the rear side of table. Refer to Illustrations 6 and 9.
For each 1/16I of variance, between head and foot end measurements, tighten
the chain anchor on the long side and back out the chain anchor on the short
side one full turn.
The rear translation chain is properly adjusted when foot and head end
measurements are within 1/32I (0.8 mm) of each other.
ILLUSTRATION 8
LOOSEN LOCKING SCREW
CHAIN SET
ANCHOR SCREW
10–48
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Check and Adjust Chain Tension

3. Using a 13/16I open end chain wrench (46–152955P1), back off or tighten both
chain anchors an equal distance. The tension adjustment is correct when a 10
pound weight (4.5 kg) placed 15I (381 mm) in from head and foot end sprocket
centers deflects the chain 3/32I to 7/32I (2 to 5 mm). Refer to Illustrations 7 and
9.
4. Check the rear translation chain alignment to ensure that table is still centered
within 1/32I (0.8 mm). If additional centering adjustments are required, be sure
to check chain tension after the rear side of the table is centered. See
Illustrations 6 and 9.
5. Align chain anchor grooves with the set screw holes. See Illustration 8. Install
set screws to secure chain anchors.
ILLUSTRATION 9
ADJUST CHAIN ANCHORS
13/16 INCH
WRENCH
10–49
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Section 5. Installing the Front Translation Chain:

Procedure
1. Back out chain anchor set screws. Set screws must be outside of chain anchor
locking grooves to turn chain anchors. See Illustration 10.
ILLUSTRATION 10
LOOSEN LOCKING SCREW
SET SCREW
CHAIN ANCHOR
2. Using a 13/16I open end chain wrench (46–152955P1), back out both front
translation chain anchors exactly two full turns (12 flats). See Illustration 11.
ILLUSTRATION 11
ADJUST FRONT CHAIN ANCHOR
13/16 INCH WRENCH
CHAIN ANCHOR
10–50
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
3. Wrap the front head and foot end chains over their respective sprockets, being
careful to align chain and sprocket paint marks. See Illustration 12.
ILLUSTRATION 12
POSITION THE FRONT CHAIN
PAINT
MARKS
SPROCKET
Creating front translation chain tension by tightening the turnbuckle

CAUTION will alter your rear translation chain adjustment. Do not attempt to
tension the chain by tightening the turnbuckle.
4. Thread the turnbuckle onto both chains simultaneously and tighten exactly two
full turns (12 flats). Upper chain should remain slack. See Illustration 13.
ILLUSTRATION 13
THREADING TURNBUCKLE
TURNBUCKLE
FRONT SUPPORT
CHAIN
10–51
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Section 6. Check Front Translation Chain Adjustments:

Check and Adjust Lower Chain Lengths
1. Using a steel tape, measure the distance from the center of head and foot end
sprocket axles to the center of front support. Foot and head end measurements
must be within 1/32I (0.8 mm) of each other. See Illustration 14.
2. Using a 13/16I open end chain wrench (46–152955P1), turn chain anchors to
center the front side of table. Refer to Illustrations 11 and 14.
For each 1/16I of variance, between head and foot end measurements, tighten
the chain anchor on the long side and back out the chain anchor on the short
side one full turn.
The front translation chain is properly adjusted when foot and head end
measurements are within 1/32I (0.8 mm) of each other.
Note: If the difference between head and foot end measurements is less than
1/16I, but greater than 1/32I, tighten the anchor on the long side one
half turn.
ILLUSTRATION 14
MEASURE CHAIN LENGTHS
HEAD END FOOT END
AXLE FRONT SUPPORT AXLE
HEAD END = FOOT END + 1/32 INCH (0.8mm)
10–52
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Check and Adjust Lower Chain Tension

3. Check front translation chain tension at both the head and foot ends. Place a
10 pound (4.5 kg) weight on the lower chain 15I (381 mm) in from the center
of the end sprocket shaft. Measure deflection at both head and foot end of table.
See Illustration 15.
Chain deflection will range from 3/16I to 7/16I (5 to 8 mm) with the proper
tension adjustment.
4. If the tension adjustment is incorrect, back off or tighten both chain anchors an
equal distance using the 13/16I open end chain wrench (46–152955P1). Refer
to Illustrations 11 and 15.
5. Check the front translation chain alignment to ensure that table is still centered
within 1/32I (0.8 mm). If additional centering adjustments are required, be sure
to check chain tension after the front side of the table is centered. See Illustration
14.
6. Align chain anchor grooves with the set screw holes. See Illustration 10. Install
set screws to secure chain anchors.
ILLUSTRATION 15
CHECK FRONT CHAIN TENSION ADJUSTMENT
DEFLECTION
3/16 TO 7/16 INCH
(5 TO 8 mm)
10 POUNDS
(4.5 Kg.)
10–53
PROPRIETARY TO
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV
REV 15
46–019510
Section 7. Front Translation Chain Turnbuckle Adjustment

1. Tighten turnbuckle until the adjustment provides just enough slack for upper
chain turnbuckle to contact the front center support. See Illustration 16.
Creating excessive front translation chain tension by over–tightening

CAUTION the turnbuckle will alter your rear translation chain adjustments. Do
not create excess tension by over–tightening the turnbuckle.
2. Adjust upper front translation chain tension by tightening the turnbuckle exactly
1/2 turn (3 flats). See Illustration 16.
3. Using a 3/8I open end wrench, tighten the turnbuckle jam nut.
ILLUSTRATION 16
THREADING THE
TURNBUCKLE
TURNBUCKLE
FRONT SUPPORT
CHAIN
Section 8. Confirm Translation Chain Adjustments:

1. Turn on power at the room’s main disconnect.
2. Check rear and front translation chain adjustments using the RFX/SFX
TRANSLATION CHAIN INSPECTION PROCEDURE beginning on page 2 of
this Service Note.
3. If rear translation chain adjustments are required, you will have to return to
Section 2 of the RFX/SFX TRANSLATION CHAIN ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE. Remove the Front Translation Chain, before initiating any
rear translation chain adjustments.
10–54
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERAL ELECTRIC
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
CHECKLISTS AND DATA SHEETS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE PAGE
RAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–1
R&F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–5
SPECIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–15
RADIOGRAPHY PORTABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–26
MOBILE FLUORO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–29
MAMMOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–32
PM DECAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–39
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–41
12–i
GENERAL ELECTRIC
ELECTRIC COMPANY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
REV 19
15 DIRECTION
12–ii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
RAD CHECKLIST Page 1 of 4
Site: System ID#

Dispatch # Room Completion Date
GE Representative Customer Contact
Equipment Summary
Safety OK Service Needed* N/A
Counterweight cables check j j Tightened j
Mounting bolt inspection j j Tightened j
Accessories checked j j Adjusted j
Functional
Component inspection j j Repaired j
Clean and lubricated j j Clean/lube j
System operation checked j j
Drives and locks checked j j Adjusted j
Indicator and interlock check j j Adjusted j
Performance
Verify generator calibration j j Adjusted j
Protection circuits confirmed j j Adjusted j
Collimation verified j j Adjusted j
Phototimer checked j j Adjusted j j
Tomo checked j j Adjusted j j
Review previous performance j j
Restored system to normal j
Reviewed results with customer j
*If this column is checked, please refer to Comments section on next page.
F4768 11/98 12–1

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
Page 2 of 4
Site: System ID#

GE Representative Date
Part Orders:
Quantity Part Numbers Description Date Ordered Comments
Comments:
F4768 12–2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
RAD DATA SHEET Page 3 of 4
Site: System ID#

Generator Calibration
Selected mA Actual mA/mAs Actual kVp (80 KV sel) No Load Voltage
SLOPE
Actual KV Actual KV
Selected mA Actual mA (60 sel) No Load Volts (120 sel) No Load Volts
S
S
L
L
F4768 11/98 12–3

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
Page 4 of 4
Site: System ID#

COLLIMATOR
Verify the following are within specifications:
Yes No
Light to x-ray alignment j j
Indicators j j
Sizing j j
Bucky alignment j j
PHOTOTIMER
Bucky Chest Spot-Film
Density
Exposure Time
PROCESSOR-SHEET FILM
Density Step# (x) Base Fog
Speed Index
Contrast:
Step (x+2) ____________
Step (xĊ2) ____________
Index ____________
F4768 11/98 12–4

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
R&F CHECKLIST Page 1 of 7
Site: System ID#

Equipment Summary
Counterweight cables check j j Tightened j
Ground leakage surveyed j j In–house j j
Functional
Film changer/stepper check j j j
Performance
Phototimer checked j j Adjusted j j
Tomo checked j j Adjusted j j
Max “R” output j j Adjusted j
Image quality evaluation j j Adjusted j
Processor checks j j j
Spot–film alignment checked j j j
Photospot camera checked j j Cleaned j j
Digital image evaluation j j Adjusted j j
Film formatter checked j j Cleaned j j
F4769 11/99 12–5

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
Page 2 of
Site: System ID#

Part Orders:
Comments:
F4769 11/99 12–6

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
RAD DATA SHEET Page 3 of
Site: System ID#

SLOPE
Actual KV Actual KV
S
S
L
L
F
F4769 11/99 12–7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
SFD DATA SHEET Page 4 of

Site: System ID#
SLOPE
Actual KV Actual KV
S
S
L
L
F
F4769 11/99 12–8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
Page 5 of 7
Site: System ID#

RAD COLLIMATOR
Yes No
Light to x–ray alignment j j
Indicators j j
Sizing j j
Bucky alignment j j
SFD COLLIMATOR
Yes No
Sizing j j
Spot–Film Centering j j
PHOTOTIMER
Bucky Chest Spot–Film
Density
Exposure Time
PROCESSOR–SHEET FILM
Speed Index
Contrast:
Step (x+2) ____________
Step (x—2) ____________
Index ____________
F
F4769 11/99 12–9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
Page 6 of 7
Site: System ID#
MAX R" LIMIT

mA/PW RAD Out kVp
At minimum kVp
At maximum kVp
FLUORO
Record “Measured Dose” value in appropriate row.
Compare “Measured Dose” values here with those shown in the Table for your positioner type. Enter
a Pass or Recal mark in columns “Mark with X.”
If the Measured Dose for your Positioner Type and Mode as shown in the Table is not within the
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Min/Max Range of + 15%, a dose calibration is recommended.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Mark with X
Mode Measured Dose PASS RECAL
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Vascular Dose D
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
DRS Photospot
DRS Dynamic
ÁÁÁÁ
F4769 11/99 12–10

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
Page 7 of 7
Site: System ID#
RESOLUTION PHOTOSPOT/DR
Normal
Exposure Time kVp
Mag 1
Mag 2
Mag 3
Photospot/DR Dose 2 Resolution

Lung Normal
Heart Mag 1
Media Mag 2
Abd Mag 2
DR Dose 1 DR Dose 3
Heart Heart
FORMATTER
Front panel settings:
Brightness
Contrast
F4769 11/99 12–11

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
REV 15
19 46–019510
ELECTRICAL LEAKAGE REPORT

Customer Name: FDO:
System ID: Room Type:
Date of Test: Engineer:
Meter Model No.: Serial No.:
Meter Calibration Date:
Leakage Current
Pwr OFF
Equipment Name Resis Power Power Gnd Pwr OFF Equip
Serial # Non–GE Milliohm OFF ON OFF Gnd ON Millivolt Loc #
SPECIFICATIONS REFER TO DIRECTION 46–014546

GENERAL SPECS: General Care Areas: 100 microamps (500 microamps with grounds
disconnected), 100 milliohms;
Critical Care Areas: 50 microamps (500 microamps with grounds
Nonpatient Care Areas: 1 milliamp (5 milliamps with grounds disconnected).
ALL SPECIFICATIONS ACCORDING TO NFPA 99–1993
12–12
REV
SENSITOMETRIC DATA SHEET
REV 12
REV 19
16
15
3.0
CUSTOMER: 9I D D% 6I D D% 6I LOG REL REL EXP
LUNG 1.74
4.21
PROPRIETARY
CITY/STATE: 2.8 2.8

HEART 2.42
DATE:
PROPRIETARY TO
MEDIA 1.73
FE NAME: ABD 2.6 2.6
- FINAL - SETUP B+F+S

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
SYSTEM ID: __________________________ D/S D -D

TF= LUNG MED. 1.6= 1.6= 2.4 2.4
- MSI-FL300 - MSI-L300
TO GENERAL
- MPX-L300 ă1)
D MAX= 2.0 + ( )=
- MPX-L500 - ADVANTX - MP _____ ă2) 1.5 FOR CINE B+F 2.2 2.2
- OTHER ă3) D MIN = 0.25 + ( )=
PROJECTOR: ă4) B+F
FOR CINE =
DENSITY LIMIT: ă5) G = (1.75 1.25 2.0 2.0
)-( )
GENERAL ELECTRIC
- VANGUARD - TAGARNO - CAP 35 ă6) D MAX D MIN

- OTHER ă7) LOG RELATIVE EXPOSURE
ă8) 1.8 1.8
X-RAY TUBE TYPE:
MEASURED FOCAL SPOT SIZE ă9)
LARGE (W) ________ (L)________ 10)
1.6 1.6
ELECTRIC COMPANY
COMPANY
MEDIUM (W) ________ (L)________ 11)

SMALL (W) ________ (L)________ 12)
12–13
IMAGE TUBE SER.# 13) 1.4
1.4
CONTRAST RATIO: 14)
CONVERSION FACTOR: 15)
MAX RESOLUTION: IMAGE TUBE 16) 1.2 1.2
(N)_____(M1)_____(M2)_____(M3)_____ 17)
18)
ssssss
FILM;
19) 1.0 1.0
(N)_____(M1)_____(M2)_____(M3)_____
FILM TYPE: 20) D
21) E
DEVELOPER: .8 N ă.8
S
PROCESSOR: I
X–RAY
DEV. TEMP: T
.6 Y ă.6
DEV. TIME:
Dial Reading:
REPLENISHMENT RATE
.4 ă.4
DEV: ___________FIX:
X–RAY PLANNED
INPUT R" LEVEL: ______(mr/frame @6I)

FINAL F" STOP: ă.2
.2
DIRECTION
CINE LENS: 1 STEP 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21

- 82/83 mm - 100 mm - OTHER
.2 .4 .6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0
MSI XR 0382 REV1

F4441 7/99 LOG RELATIVE EXPOSURE
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
46–019510
46–019510
Site: System ID# GE Representative Date REV
REV 19
FILM QUALITY CONTROL
REV 12
16
15
SENSITOMETER
0.10
SPEED POINT 0.05
(Step closest to
PROPRIETARY
B+F+.85)
PROPRIETARY TO
Step # ________ 0.05

Density ________ 0.10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
0.10
CONTRAST POINT
TO GENERAL
0.05
(4 steps above
Speed Point)
Step # ________ 0.05
Density ________ 0.10
GENERAL ELECTRIC
HOMOGENEOUS 0.20
PHANTOM 0.15
0.10
ELECTRIC COMPANY
COMPANY
0.05
12–14
Density ________ 0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
BASE + FOG 0.03

X–RAY
0.02
0.01
Normal________ 0.01
X–RAY PLANNED
0.02
DIRECTION
0.03
DATE MONTH
DAY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
TIME
MAINTENANCE
46–019510
46–019510
F4793X 11/98 MSI XR 0381 REV 1

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
SPECIALS CHECKLIST Page 1 of 8
Site: System ID#

Equipment Summary
Counterweight cables check j j Tightened j j
Ground leakage surveyed j j In–house j j
Functional
Film changer/stepper check j j j
Performance
Max “R” output checked j j Adjusted j
Image quality evaluation j j Adjusted j
Processor checks j j j
Photospot camera checked j j Cleaned j j
Cine camera checked j j Cleaned j j
Cine projector checked j j Cleaned j j
Digital image evaluation j j Adjusted j j
Film formatter checked j j Cleaned j j
F4770 11/99 12–15

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 2 of 8
Site: System ID#

Part Orders:
Comments:
F4770 11/99 12–16

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
RAD DATA SHEET Page 3 of 8
Site: System ID#

SLOPE
Actual KV Actual KV
S
S
L
L
F4770
F4 11/99 12–17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 4 of 8
Site: System ID#

COLLIMATOR
Yes No
Light to x-ray alignment j j
Indicators j j
Sizing j j
Bucky alignment j j
PHOTOTIMER
Bucky Chest Spot-Film
Density
Exposure Time
PROCESSOR–SHEET FILM
Speed Index
Contrast:
Step (x+2) ____________
Step (xĊ2) ____________
Index ____________
F4770
F4 11/99 12–18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 5 of 8
Site: System ID#
MAX R" LIMIT

mA/PW RAD Out kVp
At minimum kVp
At maximum kVp
FLUORO
Record “Measured Dose” value in appropriate row.
Compare “Measured Dose” values here with those shown in the Table for your positioner type. Enter
a Pass or Recal mark in columns “Mark with X.”
If the Measured Dose for your Positioner Type and Mode as shown in the Table is not within the
Min/Max Range of + 15%, a dose calibration is recommended.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Mark with X
Mode Measured Dose PASS RECAL
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Vascular Dose D
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
DRS Photospot
DRS Dynamic
ÁÁÁÁ
F4770 11/99 12–19

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 6 of 8
Site: System ID#
RESOLUTION PHOTOSPOT/DR
Normal
Exposure Time kVp
Mag 1
Mag 2
Mag 3
Photospot/DR Dose 2 Resolution

Lung Normal
Heart Mag 1
Media Mag 2
Abd Mag 2
DR Dose 1 DR Dose 3
Heart Heart
FORMATTER
Front panel settings:
Brightness
Contrast
F4770 11/99 12–20

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
DIGITAL DATA SHEET Page 7 of 8
Site: System ID#

VASCULAR
Trial Run
Aperture
Exposure Time
Peak Video
Vessel Step Visible (1% – 1 mm)______________________

Saturation in Step #1 - Yes - No
UNIFORMITY
DX DF
Level Level
(DELTA) UP DOWN All All
Difference in Highest ROI Mean Mean White Mean Black
Image # and Lowest Box Mean Value (a) (b) (c) (d) (2)
3
7
9
13
CARDIAC
Pulse Width ______________________
Aperture ______________________
Was Brightness OK - Yes - No
Are Penetrometers Visible - Yes - No
Does Saturation Occur - Yes - No
F4770 11/99 12–21

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 8 of 8
Site: System ID#

PROCESSOR–CINE
Speed Index
Contrast:
Step (x+2) ____________
Step (x—2) ____________
Index ____________
CINE
MA ______________________
Pulse Width ______________________
KVP ______________________
Resolution
Lung Normal
Heart Mag 1
Media Mag 2
Abd Mag 2
F4770 11/99 12–22

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION

Customer Name: FDO:
Leakage Current
Pwr OFF

12–23
REV
SENSITOMETRIC DATA SHEET
REV 19
REV 12
16
15
3.0
CUSTOMER: 9I D D% 6I D D% 6I LOG REL REL EXP
LUNG 1.74
4.21
PROPRIETARY
CITY/STATE: 2.8 2.8

HEART 2.42
DATE:
PROPRIETARY TO
MEDIA 1.73
FE NAME: ABD 2.6 2.6
- FINAL - SETUP B+F+S

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
SYSTEM ID: __________________________ D/S D -D

TF= LUNG MED. 1.6= 1.6= 2.4 2.4
- MSI-FL300 - MSI-L300
TO GENERAL
- MPX-L300 ă1)
D MAX= 2.0 + ( )=
- MPX-L500 - ADVANTX - MP _____ ă2) 1.5 FOR CINE B+F 2.2 2.2
- OTHER ă3) D MIN = 0.25 + ( )=
PROJECTOR: ă4) B+F
FOR CINE =
DENSITY LIMIT: ă5) G = (1.75 1.25 2.0 2.0
)-( )
GENERAL ELECTRIC
- VANGUARD - TAGARNO - CAP 35 ă6) D MAX D MIN

- OTHER ă7) LOG RELATIVE EXPOSURE
ă8) 1.8 1.8
X-RAY TUBE TYPE:
MEASURED FOCAL SPOT SIZE ă9)
LARGE (W) ________ (L)________ 10)
1.6 1.6
ELECTRIC COMPANY
COMPANY
MEDIUM (W) ________ (L)________ 11)

SMALL (W) ________ (L)________ 12)
12–24
IMAGE TUBE SER.# 13) 1.4
1.4
CONTRAST RATIO: 14)
CONVERSION FACTOR: 15)
MAX RESOLUTION: IMAGE TUBE 16) 1.2 1.2
(N)_____(M1)_____(M2)_____(M3)_____ 17)
18)
ssssss
FILM;
19) 1.0 1.0
(N)_____(M1)_____(M2)_____(M3)_____
FILM TYPE: 20) D
21) E
DEVELOPER: .8 N ă.8
S
PROCESSOR: I
X–RAY
DEV. TEMP: T
.6 Y ă.6
DEV. TIME:
Dial Reading:
REPLENISHMENT RATE
.4 ă.4
DEV: ___________FIX:
X–RAY PLANNED
INPUT R" LEVEL: ______(mr/frame @6I)

FINAL F" STOP: ă.2
.2
DIRECTION
CINE LENS: 1 STEP 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21

- 82/83 mm - 100 mm - OTHER
.2 .4 .6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0
MSI XR 0382 REV1

F4441 7/99 LOG RELATIVE EXPOSURE
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
46–019510
46–019510
REV 19
REV 12
16
15
SENSITOMETER
0.10
SPEED POINT 0.05
(Step closest to
PROPRIETARY
B+F+.85)
PROPRIETARY TO
Step # ________ 0.05

Density ________ 0.10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
0.10
CONTRAST POINT
TO GENERAL
0.05
(4 steps above
Speed Point)
Step # ________ 0.05
Density ________ 0.10
GENERAL ELECTRIC
HOMOGENEOUS 0.20
PHANTOM 0.15
0.10
ELECTRIC COMPANY
COMPANY
0.05
12–25
Density ________ 0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
BASE + FOG 0.03

X–RAY
0.02
0.01
Normal________ 0.01
X–RAY PLANNED
0.02
DIRECTION
0.03
DATE MONTH
DAY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
TIME
MAINTENANCE
46–019510
46–019510
F4793X 11/98 MSI XR 0381 REV 1

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
RADIOGRAPHY PORTABLES CHECKLIST Page 1 of 3
Site: System ID#

Equipment Summary
Safety/Functional OK Service Needed*

Check brake j j
Check bumpers j j
Safety inspection j j Tightened j
Inspect electrical cables j j Redraped j
Clean and lubricate j j Clean/lube j
Check drawer mounting j j Adjusted j
Verify motor drive j j
Inspect wheels and casters j j Cleaned j
Inspect handswitch j j
Performance
Verify indicators and interlocks j j
Check collimation and light j j
Check batteries j j Cleaned j
Check generator cal j j
Check phototimer j j N/A j
Compare data to previous data j j
Return system to normal operation j
F4771 11/99 12–26

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 2 of 3
Site: System ID#

Part Orders:
Comments:
F4771 11/99 12–27

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 3 of 3
RAD PORTABLE DATA SHEET
Site: System ID#

Selected kVp Actual kVp Selected mAs Actual Time

60
80
100
mA (at 80 kVp)
Collimator
Verify the following are within specifications
Light to X–ray alignment - Yes - No
Indicators - Yes - No
Measuring tape condition - Yes - No
Phototimer
Density ______________________
F4771 11/99 12–28

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
MOBILE FLUORO CHECKLIST Page 1 of 3
Site: System ID#

Equipment Summary
Safety/Functional OK Service Needed*

Function check j j
Verify skin guard j j Tightened j
Check electrical cabling j j Tightened j
Verify ground fault j j Adjusted j
Clean and lubricate j j Clean/lube j
Performance
Check indicators and interlocks j j Adjusted j
Check collimator j j Cleaned j
Check generator cal j j Adjusted j
Check spot–film j j
Check max “R” limit j j Adjusted j
Check fluoro imaging j j Cleaned j
Verify video storage j j N/A j
Compare data to previous data j j
Return system to normal operation j j
Review PM with customer j
F4772 11/98 12–29

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 2 of 3
Site: System ID#

Part Orders:
Comments:
F4772 11/98 12–30

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
MOBILE FLUORO DATA SHEET Page 3 of 3
Site: System ID#

MAX “R” LIMIT

mA/PW RAD Out kVp
At minimum kVp
At maximum kVp
FLUORO
mA Video
Dose (conv) kVp Level
1
2
3
Resolution
Normal
Mag 1
Mag 2
Mag 3
F4772 11/98 12–31

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 1 of 4
MAMMOGRAPHY CHECKLIST
Site: System ID#

Equipment Summary
Safety/Functional XPM OK Comments Service Needed*

Counterbalance condition 100/700 j j
Clean and lubricate 130 j j
Safety and interlock switches 700 j j
Electrical cables 700 j j Rerouted j
Current leakage 490 j j Tested by j
hospital
Lead glass shield condition 700 j j
Transport modification 700 j j N/A j
Lock operation 700 j j
Column drive operation 700 j j
Compression operation & condition 700 j j
Operator lamps, controls & indicators 700 j j Replaced j
bulbs
Bucky operation 700 j j
Performance
Collimator operation 700 j j Adjusted j
Generator cal 700/706/ j j
350
AEC performance 700 j j
Calculate average glandular dose 705 j j N/A j
(if required by the state)
RMI 156 phantom artifact visualization 700 j j
Focal spot resolution limit 704 j j
(if required by state or problem noted)
Film processor operation 540 j j
Perform database backup 020 j j
Return system to normal operation 020 j j
Review PM with customer 020 j
F4773 3/99 12–32

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 2 of 4
Site: System ID#

Part Orders:
Comments:
F4773 3/99 12–33

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 3 of 4
MAMMOGRAPHY PM DATA SHEET
Site: System ID#
Selected kVp Actual kVp Selected mAs Actual mAs

25/26 20
28 40
30 80
35/36 100
SF 30 160
Moly Filter RH Filter (if present)

Radiation
R di i
LF LF
Output
SF SF
Starpattern
Focal Spot
Resolution Limit lp/mm Width (mm) Length (mm)
.1 mm–mo
.3 mm–mo
.1 mm–rh
.3 mm–rh
Optical Density
Reciprocity and
kVp Linearity 2 cm Plexiglas 4 cm Plexiglas 6 cm Plexiglas
25 kVp
28 kVp
31 kVp
Glandular Tissue Dose

GTD @ kVp GTD = Glandular Tissue Dose
ESE ESE = Entrance Skin Exposure
HVL HVL = Half Value Layer
cm cm = Centimeters on Console Display (DMR, 700T, 800T)
GTD
F4773 3/99 12–34

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
Page 4 of 4
MAMMOGRAPHY PM DATA SHEET (CONT.)
Site: System ID#

RMI 156 Phantom Technique Factors kVp mAs

Phantom Score Phantom Optical Density
Fibrils
Fib il
The minimum acceptable visualization of artifacts on the
Specks
phantom are as follows:
Masses
4 fibrils, 3 sets of specs, 3 masses
Processor – Sheet Film

Density Step # Base + Fog
Speed Index (X)
15
20
Contrast:
Step (x+2)
Step (x–2)
Contrast Index
F4773 3/99 12–35

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION

Customer Name: FDO:
Leakage Current
Pwr OFF

12–36
MAMMOGRAPHY SENSITOMETRIC DATA SHEET REV
3.8
3.8
REV 19
REV 12
CUSTOMER:
16
15
3.6 3.6
CITY/STATE: D/S
ă1)
3.4 3.4
PROPRIETARY
DATE: ă2)
ă3)
PROPRIETARY TO
FE NAME: 3.2
ă4) 3.2
- FINAL - SETUP ă5)
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
SYSTEM ID:___________________________ ă6) 3.0 3.0

- SENIX ă7)
TO GENERAL
- 3F SENOGRAPHE ă8) 2.8 2.8

- OTHER ă9)
SENSITOMETER: 10) 2.6 2.6
- CUSTOMERS 11)
- FIELD SERVICE 12) 2.4 2.4
GENERAL ELECTRIC
SERIAL # 13)
FILM TYPE: 14) 2.2 2.2
CASSETTE: 15)
16) 2.0
DEVELOPER: 2.0
ELECTRIC COMPANY
COMPANY
17)
PROCESSOR: 18)
12–37
1.8 1.8
DEV. TEMP: 19)
DEV. TIME: 20)
REPLENISHMENT RATE 1.6 1.6
DEV: ___________FIX: 21)
X-RAY TUBE TYPE: 1.4 1.4

ssssss
MEASURED FOCAL SPOT SIZE

LARGE (W) ________ (L)________ 1.2
1.2
SMALL (W) ________ (L)________
HALF VALUE LAYER: 1.0 1.0
R" OUTPUT:
X–RAY
D
E
.8 N ă.8
S
D MAX= 2.0 + ( )= I
.6 T ă.6
B+F
Y
X–RAY PLANNED
D MIN = 0.25 + ( )=
B+F .4 ă.4
DIRECTION
1.75 =
G=
.2 ă.2
( D MAX
) - ( D MIN )
LOG RELATIVE EXPOSURE 1 STEP 3 5 9 11 13 15 17 19 21
.2 .4 .6 .8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0
F4794X 7/99 MSI XR 0536 REV 0
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
LOG RELATIVE EXPOSURE

MAINTENANCE
46–019510
46–019510
REV 19
REV 12
16
15
SENSITOMETER
0.10
SPEED POINT 0.05
(Step closest to
PROPRIETARY
B+F+.85)
PROPRIETARY TO
Step # ________ 0.05

Density ________ 0.10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
0.10
CONTRAST POINT
TO GENERAL
0.05
(4 steps above
Speed Point)
Step # ________ 0.05
Density ________ 0.10
GENERAL ELECTRIC
HOMOGENEOUS 0.20
PHANTOM 0.15
0.10
ELECTRIC COMPANY
COMPANY
0.05
12–38
Density ________ 0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
BASE + FOG 0.03

X–RAY
0.02
0.01
Normal________ 0.01
X–RAY PLANNED
0.02
DIRECTION
0.03
DATE MONTH
DAY
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
TIME
MAINTENANCE
46–019510
46–019510
F4793X 11/98 MSI XR 0381 REV 1

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
PM DECAL
GE Medical Systems
PMS INSPECTION LOG
PM COMPLETE
RAD EXP
FL HRS
NEXT PM DUE
F4897
12–39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 16
46–019510
15
REV 19 DIRECTION
12–40
REV 12
REV 19
REV 16
15
PROPRIETARY
PROPRIETARY TO
GE Medical Systems
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
TO GENERAL
GENERALELECTRIC
Certificate of Inspection
ELECTRICCOMPANY
COMPANY
This GE X–Ray unit has been inspected and
12–41
provided with routine maintenance by GE Medical
Systems Service Division in accordance with GE
Medical Systems’ Service specifications.
X-RAY
X–RAY PLANNED
DIRECTION
DIRECTION
HOSPITAL/SYSTEM ID FIELD SERVICE ENGINEER DATE

DIRECTION46-019510
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
11/98
MAINTENANCE
46–019510
46–019510
F4787X
PROPRIETARY
PROPRIETARY TO
TO GENERAL
GENERALELECTRIC
ELECTRICCOMPANY
COMPANY X-RAY
X–RAY PLANNED
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
REV 12
REV 16
15 DIRECTION
DIRECTION46-019510
46–019510
12–42
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS X–RAY PLANNED MAINTENANCE
ADDENDUM - PLANNED MAINTENANCE OF EXPOSURE CONTROLS
Section 13.1 AMX-4, AMX-4+, Definium AMX 700 Mobile X-ray Systems
REPLACEMENT
COMPONENT INSPECTION / CLEANING
Install / Replacement Date Replacement Interval
Clean, disinfect and perform
Hand Switch visual / functional checks of Every 3 years
Hand Switch every 12 months
13.1.1 Inspection/Cleaning
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - Before you begin:
- Disconnect the hand switch cord from the body of the hand switch before performing the
cleaning procedures
- Never use solvents or flammable solutions to clean the hand switch
- Never use dripping cloth (or) immerse hand switch in water or cleaning solutions
INSTRUCTION: Use a cloth moistened in warm soapy water (use mild soap) to clean the hand
switch.
APPROVED CLEANERS:
The cleaners listed below are approved to clean the hand switch:
- Bleach - 50% mix with water (5-8% household Bleach)
- Glutaraldehyde <5%
- Polyethylene Glycol <20% (tested as Cidex Plus 28)
- Isopropyl Alcohol 70% concentration
- Hydrogen Peroxide 15-40% concentration
CAUTION: Never use cleaners or solvents of any kind if you are uncertain of the nature of the
cleaning agent. The hand switch should be cleaned using EPA cleared and EPA registered high-
level disinfecting agents.
13.1.2 Periodic Maintenance

Disconnect the cord from the body of the hand switch before performing the maintenance
procedures.
Visual Check:
• Inspect the cord for nicks, cuts or severe pinching of the cord sheath and inspect the cord for
exposed wires at the RJ11 connector due to sheath damage. If any of these conditions are
observed, replace the cord.
• Inspect the hand switch for accumulation of dirt, contrast material, damage to the plastic
housing or loosening in the plastic housing.
Functional Check:
• Repeatedly press the hand switch buttons (Exposure / Prepare button and Collimator button)
to check that the switch moves smoothly from inactive to active positions.
• Replace the hand switch if the buttons motion is not smooth or buttons getting stuck.
13-1
13.1.3 Replacement Interval

The hand switch must be replaced every 3 years.
Section 13.2 Legacy, Precision 500D R&F X-ray Systems

REPLACEMENT
COMPONENT INSPECTION / CLEANING
Install / Replacement Date Replacement Interval
Fluoro Exposure Every 6 months Every 3 years
Foot Switch
ISFD/IDD Exposure Every 6 months Every 3 years

Switch Assy. Boot
Membrane exposure
Every 6 months Every 3 years
switches in power
assist handle
13.2.1 Inspection/Cleaning
13.2.1.1 Fluoro Exposure Foot Switch
• Visually inspect that the foot pedal is the covered style. If the foot pedal is the uncovered style,
replace with GEHC P/N 5433231.
• Visually inspect the foot pedal for dirt, contrast material, damage to cord, damage to covering,
or covering loosening at glue joint on bottom of foot pedal. Replace foot pedal if the cord is
damaged, if covering is missing, if covering has holes or tears or cracks, or if covering is
loosening at the glue joint on the bottom of the foot pedal. Clean foot pedal if dirt or contrast
is found.
• Repeatedly push foot pedal to check that switch moves smoothly from inactive to active
positions. Replace if motion is not smooth or if it does not return to inactive position promptly.
13.2.1.2 ISFD/IDD Exposure Switch Assy. Boot

• Visually inspect exposure switches for a flexible boot. If not present, update system with
GEHC PN 5460600.
• Visually inspect ISFD exposure switch boot for dirt or contrast material. Clean or replace boot
if contrast is found. Replace at least every 3 years with GEHC PN 5455781.
• Repeatedly push ISFD exposure switches to check that switches move smoothly from inactive
to active positions. Replace assembly if switches do not move smoothly.
13.2.1.3 Membrane Exposure Switches on Power Assist Handle

• Visually inspect PA handle exposure switches for dirt or contrast material in addition to
damage to the rubber sealing.
• Clean or replace the PA handle exposure switches if dirt/contrast is observed.
• Repeatedly push PA handle exposure switches to check that switches move smoothly from
inactive to active positions. If switches do not move smoothly or any damage is observed,
replace with GEHC P/N 2331869, 2331869-2, and 2147643, 2147643-2.
13.2.2 Replacement Interval

• The Fluoro Exposure Foot Switch must be replaced every 3 years.
• The ISFD/IDD Exposure Switch Assy. Boot must be replaced every 3 years.
• The membrane exposure switches in power assist handle must be replaced every 3 years.
13-2
Section 13.3 Prestilix 1600 S/E/X, Prestige 1690, Prestige 1694, Prestige SI and Prestige VH
(up to 1997) X-ray Systems
See Figure 13-1: Item 3 – Arrow Points to Footswitch Assembly
Figure 13-1 Console Footswitch Location
13.3.1 INSPECTION/CLEANING
13.3.1.1 Removal of the Front Cover and Footswitch Actuator

1. Remove the (4) four screws – 2 each side, located on the underside of the console user
interface. See Figure 13-2 .
Figure 13-2
13-3
2. Lightly pull down on the cover to clear the recess in the console frame.
3. While pulling down on the cover, also pull on the front of the cover at the base of the console.
This action will free the pins located on the inside of the cover from the holes which retain the
pins on the face of the frame. See Figure 13-3 (Pin) and Figure 13-4 (Hole in Frame).
Figure 13-3 Pin – 1 each end of cover Figure 13-4 Hole in Frame
Figure 13-4 Hole in Frame
13.3.1.2 Inspection of the Fluoroscopic Footswitch Assembly

1. Visually inspect the plastic pedal/(pedale equipee), C197324 or equivalent, for cracks and
wear of the actuator post, (extended striker tube on the bottom face of pedal).
2. Replace the foot switch assembly if the pedal has any cracks or fractures (Figure 13-5) or the
striker tube is worn (Figure 13-6 – arrow pointing at worn/eroded post).
Figure 13-5 Fractured Actuator Pedal Figure 13-6 Worn Striker Tube
Figure 13-6 Worn Striker Tube

3. Visually inspect the hinge mechanism which secures the plastic pedal to the base of the
console. It should pivot freely and should be fully retained.
13-4
4. If any of the 3 welds securing the hinge to the retaining bracket are damaged (Figure 13-7 -
arrow left), or the hinge is corroded or sticking, due to material contamination, (Figure 13-8 –
clean hinge shown), replace the foot switch assembly.
Figure 13-7 Broken Welds on Hinge Figure 13-8 Clean Hinge
Figure 13-8 Clean Hinge
5. Inspect the retaining hardware. If the retaining screws are loose or missing, tighten or replace
them, (Figure 13-9 and Figure 13-10). If the screws are stripped in the black plastic actuator
pedal (Figure 13-10), replace the footswitch.
Figure 13-9 Screws Retaining Hinge to Cover Figure 13-10 Mating Nuts for Hinge &
Screws Retaining Hinge to Black Actuator
13-5
6. Inspect the base of the console and on the lower front edge. Remove any/all contamination.
(Figure 13-11 shows console assembly rotated onto back with underside of console and foot
pedal assembly exposed. Figure 13-12 shows material build-up on face of console frame
which will cause footswitch assembly to stick in ON position.)
Figure 13-11 Front and Bottom of Console Figure 13-12 Contamination on Front Edge
Figure 13-12 Contamination on Front Edge

7. Visually inspect the alignment of the plastic pedal to the hole in the front cover of the console.
The actuator post should not contact the perimeter of the hole when actuated. Re-alignment
of the actuator to the hole in the cover is not available. If there is contact of the actuator and
the perimeter of the hole in the cover, contact Service Support Engineer for directions to
correct. (Figure 13-13 shows bottom side of front cover assembly with post (center of post is
capped with white plug to enhance visual for centering).
NOTE: White Cap is being phased in as attachment to striker post to enhance activation
performance)
Figure 13-13 Striker Post Centered in Cover
13-6

8. Visually inspect the footswitch, C189512, and the white retaining bracket,
C328068. The footswitch should be fully adhered and aligned to the
bracket. If the footswitch is not adhered and aligned to the bracket,
replace the footswitch assembly. (Figure 13-14 shows footpedal properly
aligned and adhered to bracket)
Figure 13-14 Footswitch Adhered to Mounting Bracket
9. Visually inspect the mounting of the footswitch and white retaining bracket
in the base of the console. They should be fully retained with 2 screws and
the assembly should be centered to the hole in the console cover.
Replace and or tighten loose or missing screws and align the assembly
relative to the hole in the cover if the assembly is not properly aligned.
(Figure 13-15 and Figure 13-16 show footpedal/bracket properly attached
to console frame. Note that bracket may be adjusted along slot(s) to
center footpedal relative to actuator post.)
Figure 13-15 Bottom of Console and Figure 13-16 Footswitch and Bracket
Bracket
13-7
10. Visually inspect the footswitch cord for damage. Replace the footswitch assembly if the cord
is damaged. (Figure 13-17 and Figure 13-18 show damaged cord)
Figure 13-17 Cord Cutoff Figure 13-18 Cord Frayed
11. CLEANING: During the inspection of the footswitch assembly, any dirt or material should be
cleaned from the assembly. NOTE: Inspect and remove any material from beneath the lower
front edge of the black plastic actuator is imperative to proper function.
12. If console is clean and all inspection has exhibited no adverse conditions, reattach front cover
by aligning pins on cover to holes in base of the console.
13. Push on lower edge of cover to ensure that pins are fully seated. (Aids in proper alignment of
the actuator pedal to the footswitch assembly.) If pins do not seat or are loose this may cause
the actuator to stick in the ON position.
14. Push the upper section of the front cover into the recess and re-attach the 4 mounting screws
(2 each side). NOTE: All screws must be used.
15. Test the actuator and engagement of the fluoroscopic footswitch by depressing the black
plastic actuator. The actuator should move freely and initiate fluoroscopy when depressed.
When released, the actuator should return to the OFF position and fluoroscopy should
immediately stop. There should be no binding or sticking of the footswitch assembly. If there
is any binding or extension of fluoroscopy, repeat the inspection and replacement procedure.
13.3.2 RECOMMENDED INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT INTERVAL

1. Inspection of the footswitch assembly should be completed as part of the normal 6 month
planned maintenance on this product.
Note: The Prestilix 16xx and Prestige VH products were last delivered as new products in 1997. All
products are subject to wear through normal use and these products now exceed the design life of
the footswitch assembly. It is recommended that the footswitch assembly be replaced if it has not
been serviced in the preceding 3 years. Recommend proactive replacement of foot switch
assembly based on inspection, to aid in eliminating accidental radiation occurrences.
2. Wear of the device is not limited to the footswitch assembly and may be extended to the
console and cover. In the event that alignment or mounting cannot be properly maintained with
the existing console, a console replacement kit, 5486777, is available. This kit contains
mechanical hardware to enable renewal of the existing console by transferring the electronics
from the old console frame assembly to the new console frame assembly.
13-8
13.3.3 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE FOR FOOTPEDAL ASSEMBLY

Note: Laying console on rear surface exposing bottom of console may allow better access during the
footpedal removal and replacement process.
13.3.3.1 Adhere footswitch to white mounting bracket

1. Visually inspect the bottom of the footswitch to make sure that there is no contamination on
this surface. If there is contamination clean with soap/water and allow to dry.
2. Peel the adhesive liner from the double back tape which is affixed to the bracket.
3. Align the footswitch so that the cable points through the slot in the bracket.
4. Lay the bracket with aligned footswitch on a flat surface and firmly press on the footswitch to
ensure adhesion of the double back adhesive tape. See Figure 13-19.
Figure 13-19
13.3.3.2 Install the footswitch and bracket onto the console frame
5. Place white bracket containing footswitch into the base of the console, aligning the slots to the
holes in the frame, and positioning the bracket tight against the frame as shown in Figure 13-
20 below. It is initially mounted at this position to allow sufficient cable for routing in step 7.
Figure 13-20
13-9
6. Insert two screws, each containing a lock washer (closest to head of screw) and a flat washer,
and tighten sufficiently to temporarily locate and secure bracket and footswitch. The screws
must be sufficiently tightened so that the bracket does not move when the cable is routed in
step 7.
Note: The mating hardware for the screws, nuts in the frame of the console are captive.
Figure 13-21
13.3.3.3 Route and secure the cable

7. Route the cable through the console frame and secure at the appropriate tie points used to
previously secure the old footswitch cable.
13.3.3.4 Secure the hinge to the black actuator pedal

8. If not already installed, secure the hinge to the black actuator with 3 plastic/sheet metal
screws. Note orientation of hinge in Figure 13-22 below.
Figure 13-22
13.3.3.5 Secure the black actuator pedal w/hinge to the lower front console
cover
9. Align and attach the black actuator pedal with hinge to the console lower front cover assembly.
The lower front console assembly is a formed white sheet metal component covered with a
ribbed black rubber surface.
13-10
10. Insert the two flat head screws through the hinge, as shown in Figure 13-23, then through the
lower front console cover. Note orientation and pin protruding from cover in Figure 13-23 on
left.
11. Place two (2) flat washers, one on each screw, and secure with the self locking nuts which are
provided in the kit. Note washers and securing lock nuts in Figure 13-23 on right.
Figure 13-23
Note: There is no adjustment of the striker post on the black plastic footpedal relative to the hole in the
lower front console cover. The actuator post should not contact the perimeter of the hole in the
cover. See Figure 13-24 below – actuator post may or may not be covered with white cap. White
cap may be used with front covers that have a hole of diameter 35mm or greater.
Figure 13-24
12. Check the motion of the actuator pedal and make sure that the post does not rub on the
perimeter of the hole.
13. Check that the motion of the actuator and hinge is free and does not bind or stick.
14. If the post is not approximately centered and rubs on the perimeter of the hole, or if the hinge
binds or sticks, contact your Service Support Engineer.
13-11
13.3.3.6 Install the lower front console cover foot pedal to console frame
15. Gain clearance between the actuator pedal and the footswitch assembly by flipping open the
actuator pedal at the hinge.
16. Guide the lower front console cover onto the frame of the console ensuring that the pins on
the front of the cover fully engage the holes in the frame. See Pin in Figure 13-25 below. There
will be one pin on each end of the inside of the front cover.
Pin
Figure 13-25
17. Secure the top of the cover to the console using the 4 screws, 2 each side.
13.3.3.7 Inspect and align footpedal and bracket to actuator post

18. Flip closed the actuator pedal at the hinge and view the alignment of the actuator post relative
to the footswitch which is mounted to the white bracket.
19. Loosen the screws retaining the white bracket and slide the bracket away from the frame to
align the actuator post to the center of the footswitch. See Figure 13-26.
Slide bracket in direction of arrow
Figure 13-26
20. Tighten the screws retaining the white bracket and footswitch.
21. If there is insufficient slot length on the bracket to roughly center the actuator post to the center
of the foot pedal, contact your Service Support Engineer.
22. Place console in an upright position for use.
23. Actuate and release the foot pedal several times to determine if motion is free from binding
and sticking.
13-12
24. If there is no binding or sticking, connect foot pedal to system, turn system to ON, and actuate
foot pedal. Fluoroscopy should start and stop with application and removal of force. There
should be no binding or sticking.
25. Place unit back in service upon successful completion of installation and proper function of foot
pedal assembly.
13-13
13.3.3.8 Spare Parts References
GE P/N DESIGNATION
Madrid console chassis, with new foot pedal assembly installed. All other
5486777
hardware must be swapped from old console into new console. - Figure 13-27
851539P445 Cap diam 15/20 (for console with a hole of 35mm or greater) - Figure 13-28
45313727 Footswitch Assembly - Figure 13-29, Figure 13-30 & Figure 13-31
Madrid console chassis
Foot pedal assembly
Figure 13-27 5486777 - Madrid Console Chassis with Foot Pedal Assembly
Cap diam 15/20 (for console

with a hole of 35mm or
greater) P/N: 851539P445
Figure 13-28 851539P445 - Cap
13-14
Figure 13-29 45313727 - Footswitch Assembly
Pedal support included in

45313727
Hinge pedal fluoroscopy

included in 45313727
Black pedal command

included in 45313727
Figure 13-30 45313727 - Footswitch Assembly
13-15
Pedal support included

in 45313727
Pedal command included

in 45313727
Figure 13-31 45313727 - Pedal Support & Pedal Command
13-16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS X-RAY PLANNED MAINTENANCE
REV 19 DIRECTION 46-019510
ADDENDUM - ELECTRICAL SAFETY TESTS USING FLUKE ESA612

Section 14.1 Prestige and Prestilix X-ray Systems
The IEC 62353: ‘Medical Electrical Equipment ― Planned Maintenance and power plug
replacement of medical Electrical Equipment’ standards ensures the electrical safety of
medical electrical equipment.
Perform Ground Resistance testing

Site location Installation PM Repair
Within USCAN Hioki Tool Using 25A Fluke ESA612 or ESA615 Fluke ESA612 or ESA615
current source.
Outside USCAN Hioki Tool Using 25A Fluke ESA612 or ESA615 Fluke ESA612 or ESA615
current source.
Perform Leakage current testing

Site location Installation PM Repair
Within USCAN Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612 or ESA615 Fluke ESA612 or ESA615
Outside USCAN Fluke ESA612 Fluke ESA612 or ESA615 Fluke ESA612 or ESA615
Personnel requirements
Required Persons: 01
Timing: 30mins
PM frequency – 12 months
Preliminary requirements
Tools and test equipment
• Standard Toolkit
• Fluke ESA612/ESA615 or below equivalent specification
Specification:
Test Standard Selections - ANSI/AAMI ES-1, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS
3551
Voltage
Ranges (Mains voltage) ......90.0 V to 132.0 V ac rms 180.0 V to 264.0 V ac rms
Range (Point-to-point voltage)
5000 m ......................................... 0.0 V to ≤150 V ac rms
2000 m .......................................... 0.0 V to ≤300.0 V ac rms
Accuracy ...................................... (2 % of reading + 0.2 V)
Earth Resistance
Modes ......................................... .. 2-Wire
Test Current .................................... >200 mA ac
Range ............................................... 0.000 Ω to 2.000 Ω
Accuracy. .......................................... (2 % of reading + 0.015 Ω)
14-1
Equipment Current
Range .....................................0.0 A to 20.0 A ac rms
Accuracy ............................... (5 % of reading + (2 counts or 0.2 A, whichever is greater))
Leakage Current
Modes* .................................. AC+DC (True-rms)
AC only
DC only
* For tests that do not use MAP voltage, AC+DC, AC ONLY, and DC ONLY modes are
available for all leakages. MAP voltages are available only in True-rms (shown as
AC+DC)
Patient Load Selection ............... AAMI ES1-1993, IEC 60601
Crest factor .................................... ≤3
Ranges ..........................................0.0 µA to 199.9 µA
200 µA to 1999 µA
2.00 mA to 10.00 mA
Frequency response/Accuracy
DC to 1 kHz.................. (±1 % of reading + (1 µA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 100 kHz ......... (±2 % of reading + (1 µA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
1 kHz to 5 kHz (current > 1.6 mA) ...... (±4 % of reading + (1 μA or 1 LSD, whichever
is greater))
100 kHz to 1 MHz........... (±5 % of reading + (1 µA or 1 LSD, whichever is greater))
3.2 Consumables
None
3.3 Replacement parts
None.
3.4 Safety
Follow the LOTO procedure as per the procedure written in corresponding product
document.
3.5 Required conditions
None.
Service Procedure
Under the system periodic maintenances (PM) requirements, the FE must perform the
test procedures described in this section:
• Protective Earth Resistance Test

• Equipment Leakage Current Test
Impacted products:
No. System Description
1 Prestige II, VH, SI
2 Prestilix 1600X
14-2
The test procedure below contains the specifics tool setup / to use with the Fluke ESA612.
Refer to device’s user manual for setup details if instead using an equivalent testing device
Setting the test standard
The tool is designed to perform electrical safety testing based on several different safety
standards: AAMI ES1/NFPA99, IEC62353, IEC60601-1, and AN/NZS 3551. AAMI is the
Analyzer’s default standard.
Caution
ALL THE GROUND RESISTANCE RELATED TESTING SHOULD BE PERFORMED WHEN THE
SYSTEM POWER IS OFF.
1. From the setup menu, press F4 button to select More to reveal additional menu selections.
2. Press F2 button to select Instrument to select the instrument setup.
3. Press F1 button, to select Standard to open the scroll box.
14-3
4. Press up or down to scroll through the standard selections.
5. When the desired standard is displayed, press F1 button to select Standard to confirm the
standard (IEC 62353).
14-4
6. Press F4 button to select Done to complete the standard setup.
ZERO THE LEADS

It is important to Zero leads to eliminate resistance in test leads as follows:
• Make sure the power cord from the DUT is connected into the test receptacle.
• Connect 75 FT RED test cable and 75 FT BLACK test cable across V/Ω/A jack.
• Turn ON the Safety analyzer.
• Press the button POINT TO POINT
• Press F2 button Resistance to access resistance interface
• Connect the two test leads together and press Zero Leads.
GROUND RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT
Pre-requisite
Clean the copper bar in the Generator cabinet and remove any dust or rust accumulated
which will increase the resistance during the measurements.
1. Connect the black color lead and other end alligator clip to Generator Cabinet Bus bar.
14-5
System ground points identification Reference only
2. Connect the red color lead to V/Ω/A jack and other end of alligator clip to DUT, refer Table
1.1
3. Press POINT TO POINT then go to Resistance.
4. Note the measured resistance values.

Note
Fluke Manufacturer recommendation is to perform Null test before testing each test
point.
14-6
Test Signature, Conditions.

Expected Measured Result
Point DUT To Date See
Value Value Pass/Fail
# Appendix
1 Collimator cover SPGP* <0.2 Ω
2 CRT Monitor SPGP* <0.2 Ω
3 Rotation tube lever SPGP* <0.2 Ω
4 Spot film device tray SPGP* <0.2 Ω
5
Table top Rails SPGP* <0.2 Ω
6
Foot rest handle <0.2 Ω
7 Table Frame (upper

SPGP* <0.2 Ω
chassis)
8 Table foot (lower
SPGP* <0.2 Ω
chassis)
9 GPX Console foot
SPGP* <0.2 Ω
cover
10 Generator Madrid
SPGP* <0.2 Ω
Console
11 Table Madrid
SPGP* <0.2 Ω
console frame
*Identify your System Power Ground Point upon your system configuration that can be
either in the Generator cabinet or in the table cabinet or in the room main wall electrical
cabinet.
Table 1.1
Notice
The DUTs that are not part of system configuration are provided with NA in Measured
Value column.
14-7
LEAKAGE CURRENT TEST PROCEDURE

• Leakage current testing should be performed by turning ON the system.
• Connect the black color lead and other end alligator clip to System Cabinet Bus bar.
• Connect the red color lead to V/Ω/A jack and other end of alligator clip to DUT.
• Press POINT TO POINT then go to Leakage.
• Note the measured leakage current values in Table 1.2
Notice
If the measurement value has any fluctuations, wait for 60 seconds to stabilize the
value.
Test Signature, Conditions.
Expected Measure Result
Point DUT To Date See Appendix
Value d Value Pass/Fail
#
1
Collimator SPGP* <500µA
cover
2
CRT Monitor SPGP* <500µA
3 Rotation tube <500µA

SPGP*
level
4 Spot film
SPGP* <500µA
device tray
5
Table top SPGP* <500µA
Rails
6 Foot
SPGP* <500µA
rest
handle
7 Table Frame
SPGP* <500µA
(upper
chassis)
8 Table foot <500µA
SPGP*
(lower
chassis)
9 GPX Console <500µA
SPGP*
foot cover
10 Generator <500µA
Madrid SPGP*
Console
frame
11 Table <500µA
SPGP*
Madrid
console
frame
*Identify your System Power Ground Point upon your system configuration that can be
either in the Generator cabinet or in the table cabinet or in the room main wall electrical
cabinet.
Table 1.2
14-8
Appendix 1: Test Point Locations for Prestige SI, VH, II and Prestilix 1600
This section contains the illustrations of the test points listed in Table 1.1 & 1.2
Test Point 1: All Prestige and Prestilix Ultranet Collimator box (not applicable to Ralco
collimator plastic box). Prestige VH and II Ultranet collimator shown below:
14-9

Test Point 2: Distar CRT monitor installed on monitor suspension, wall stand and cart:
Remove rear cable connection panel to access the monitor chassis grounding screw.
Test Point 3: Tube rotation lever (Prestige SI shown below):
14-10
Test Point 4: Prestilix 1600X, Prestige SI, VH and II Bucky tray (Prestige VH, II tray shown
below):
14-11
Test Point 5: Prestilix 1600X, Prestige SI, VH, II table top rails (Prestige VH and II table top
assembly shown below)
Use one part of the rail with no Varnish as test point. If there is no scratch, no
dent, use a metallic file in a no visible area as shown below to remove the
varnish.
If there is a too high resistance or no connection, the table top rail bottom may be
isolated with contrast Media deposit made of Baryte as shown below.
14-12
Test Point 6: Prestilix 1600X, Prestige SI, Prestige VH and II foot rest
Test Point 7: Prestilix 1600X, Prestige SI, Prestige VH/II table frame (Upper chassis) Prestige SI,
Prestilix 1600X frame shown below:
Use any bolt with good contact on the frame as test point.
14-13
Prestige VH table frame shown below:
Test Point 8: Prestilix 1600X, Prestige SI, Prestige VH/II table foot (lower chassis) Prestige SI
shown below:
14-14
Prestige VH, II shown below:
Test Point 9: Prestige SI, Prestige VH, Prestige II GPX Console
14-15
Test Point 10: Generator Madrid consoles
Madrid console with hand switch option
Generator console without hand switch
14-16
Test Point 11: Table Madrid Console (Prestilix 1600X add-on shown)
Appendix 2: Test Equipment

This section contains the illustrations of the meters used in the IEC 62353 tests.
Fluke ESA612 or equivalent (For more details refer the product manuals and video
explanation at http://www.flukebiomedical.com/)
14-17
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371

P.O. Box 414, Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201 U.S.A.
(Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America)
GE Medical Systems — Europe: Telex 698626
283, rue de la Miniére, B.P. 34, 78533 Buc Cedex
France

X-Ray Planned Maintenance - SM - 46-019510 - 19

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

X-Ray Planned Maintenance - SM - 46-019510 - 19

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

GE Medical Systems

X–Ray Planned Maintenance

© 1991 - 2019 General Electric Company,

D THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

D CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

D DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

D ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

D ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL

D IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

X–Ray Planned Maintenance

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION

GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY MEDICAL SYSTEMS

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

TAB TITLE PAGE

REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

RAD RAD FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAD–1

R&F R&F FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R&F–1

SPECIALS SPECIALS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPEC–1

RAD PORT RAD PORTABLES FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAD PORT–1

MOBILE FL MOBILE FLUORO FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOB FL–1

MAMMO MAMMO FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAMMO–1

1 XPM 0–99 GENERAL &

2 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE

3 XPM–300 GENERATOR PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–i

4 XPM–400 GENERATOR PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–i

5 XPM–500 IMAGING PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–i

6 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE

7 XPM–700 MAMMO and RAD MOBILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–i

8 XPM–800 RADIOGRAPHIC PORTABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–i

9 XPM–900 MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–i

10 SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–i

11 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE

12 CHECKLISTS AND DATA SHEETS. . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . 12–i

13 ADDENDUM - PLANNED MAINT. OF EXPOSURE CONTROLS.. 13–1

14 ADDENDUM - ELECTRICAL SAFETY TESTS FLUKE ESA612.........14-1

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

Title Page 17 TAB 2 TAB 9

STATEMENT OF INTENT AND USE

The goal is to provide a living, updatable, planned maintenance inspection

The inspections are intended to be done semi-annually, or divided into

Prior to implementing this program, a contract review should be done with

The X–ray Products Guide for Planned Maintenance inspections is in-

Following the inspection, the customer should be contacted every time.

Check List Job Card Name

Next or Optional Job Card

RAD FLOW DIAGRAM

Discuss PM with Customer Discuss PM

Mounting Bolt Safety–RAD–Mounting

Component Visual Inspection–RAD

Clean and Clean and Lube–RAD

System Operation Functional–RAD

Drives and Locks Functional–RAD

Indicator and Interlock Indicator Lamps–RAD

RAD FLOW DIAGRAM (CONT.)

Verify Generator RAD Timer

Protection Circuits Tube Protector

Memory Data and Battery

Collimation Collimation and Phototiming

Phototimer Collimation and Phototiming

Tomo Functional–Dedicated Tomo